- Manuals
- Brands
- Siemens Manuals
- Protection Device
- SIPROTEC 7UM62
Manuals and User Guides for Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62. We have 3 Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 manuals available for free PDF download: Manual
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 Manual (602 pages)
Multifunction Generator, Motor and Transformer Protection Relay
Brand: Siemens
|
Category: Relays
|
Size: 9.19 MB
Table of Contents
-
Table of Contents
7
-
1 Introduction
17
-
Overall Operation
18
-
C53000-G1176-C149
19
-
Applications
21
-
Features
23
-
-
2 Functions
29
-
Introduction, Reference Power System
32
-
Functional Scope
34
-
Description
34
-
Setting Hints
34
-
Settings
39
-
Power System Data 1
43
-
Functional Description
43
-
Setting Hints
43
-
Settings 1
49
-
List of Information
50
-
Setting Groups
51
-
Functional Description
51
-
Setting Hints
51
-
Settings
51
-
Information
51
-
Power System Data 2
52
-
Functional Description
52
-
Setting Hints
52
-
Settings
52
-
Information
52
-
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In38
54
-
Functional Description
54
-
Setting Hints
55
-
Settings for the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)
56
-
Information from Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)
57
-
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection
58
-
Functional Description
58
-
Setting Hints
60
-
Settings for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
63
-
Information for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
63
-
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V)
64
-
Functional Description
64
-
Setting Hints
68
-
Settings of the Inverse O/C Time Protection
69
-
Information for the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
70
-
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)
71
-
Functional Description
71
-
Setting Hints
75
-
Thermal Overload Protection Settings
79
-
Information List for the Thermal Overload Protection
80
-
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)
81
-
Functional Description
81
-
Setting Hints
83
-
Settings of the Unbalanced Load Protection
85
-
Information for the Unbalanced Load Protection
86
-
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
87
-
Functional Description
88
-
Setting Hints
88
-
Settings of the Startup Overcurrent Protection
90
-
Information for the Startup Overcurrent Protection
90
-
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T)
91
-
Functional Description
91
-
Protected Object Generator or Motor: Particularities
93
-
Protected Object Transformer: Particularities
94
-
Evaluation of Measured Quantities
97
-
Setting Hints
105
-
Differential Protection for Generators and Motors
105
-
Differential Protection for Transformers
107
-
Settings of the Differential Protection
111
-
Information for the Differential Protection
112
-
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN)
114
-
Functional Description
114
-
Setting Hints
119
-
Settings of the Earth Current Differential Protection
121
-
Information for the Earth Current Differential Protection
121
-
Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)
122
-
Functional Description
122
-
Setting Hints
125
-
Settings of the Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection
129
-
Information for the Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection
130
-
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
131
-
Functional Description
131
-
Setting Hints
132
-
Settings of the Reverse Power Protection
133
-
Information for the Reverse Power Protection
134
-
Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
135
-
Functional Description
135
-
Setting Hints
136
-
Settings of the Forward Active Power Supervision
136
-
Information for the Forward Power Supervision
137
-
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)
138
-
Functional Description
138
-
Pickup
138
-
Determination of the Short-Circuit Impedance
139
-
Tripping Characteristic
141
-
Tripping Logic
142
-
Setting Hints
144
-
Power Swing Blocking
147
-
Setting Hints
148
-
Settings of the Impedance Protection
151
-
Information from the Impedance Protection
151
-
Out-Of-Step Protection (ANSI 78)
153
-
Functional Description
153
-
Measuring Principle
153
-
Out-Of-Step Logic
155
-
Setting Hints
158
-
Settings of the Out-Of-Step Protection
162
-
Information for the Out-Of-Step Protection
163
-
Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
164
-
Functional Description
164
-
Setting Hints
165
-
Settings of the Undervoltage Protection
166
-
Information for the Undervoltage Protection
166
-
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)
167
-
Functional Description
167
-
Setting Hints
167
-
Settings of the Overvoltage Protection
168
-
Information for the Overvoltage Protection
168
-
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
170
-
Functional Description
170
-
Setting Hints
171
-
Settings for the Frequency Protection
173
-
Information for Frequency Protection
173
-
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24)
175
-
Functional Description
175
-
Setting Hints
177
-
Settings of the Overexcitation Protection
179
-
Information from the Overexcitation Protection
179
-
Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
180
-
-
Functional Description
180
-
Setting Hints
181
-
Settings of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection
182
-
Information for the Inverse Undervoltage Protection
182
-
Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection Df/Dt (ANSI 81R)
183
-
Functional Description
183
-
Setting Hints
184
-
Settings of the Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection
186
-
Information for the Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection
187
-
Jump of Voltage Vector
188
-
Functional Description
189
-
Setting Hints
190
-
Settings of the Vector Jump Detection
191
-
Information for the Vector Jump Detection
192
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
193
-
Functional Description
193
-
Setting Hints
197
-
Settings of the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection
199
-
Information for the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection
200
-
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)
201
-
Functional Description
201
-
Setting Hints
203
-
Settings of the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
204
-
Information for the Sensitive Earth Current Detection
204
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3Rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3Rd Harm.)
205
-
Functional Description
205
-
Setting Hints
207
-
Settings of the 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3Rd Harmonics
208
-
Information for the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3Rd Harmonics
209
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%)
210
-
Functional Description
210
-
Setting Hints
213
-
Settings of the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
215
-
Information for the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
216
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, Fn (ANSI 64R)
217
-
Functional Description
217
-
Setting Hints
219
-
Settings of the Rotor Earth Fault Protection
220
-
Information for the Rotor Earth Fault Protection
221
-
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz)
222
-
Functional Description
222
-
Setting Hints
227
-
Settings of the Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection
228
-
Information for the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
228
-
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
229
-
Functional Description
229
-
Setting Hints
231
-
Settings of the Motor Starting Time Supervision
232
-
Information for the Motor Starting Time Supervision
232
-
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
233
-
Functional Description
233
-
Setting Hints
236
-
Settings of the Restart Inhibit for Motors
239
-
Information for the Motor Restart Inhibit
240
-
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
241
-
Functional Description
241
-
Setting Hints
243
-
Settings for Breaker Failure Protection
244
-
Information for the Breaker Failure Protection
245
-
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27)
246
-
Functional Description
246
-
Setting Hints
247
-
Settings of the Inadvertent Energizing Protection
248
-
Information for the Inadvertent Energizing Function
248
-
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC)
250
-
Functional Description
250
-
Setting Hints
252
-
Settings of the DC Voltage Protection
254
-
Information from the DC Voltage Protection
254
-
Analog Outputs
255
-
Functional Description
255
-
Setting Hints
255
-
Settings of the Analog Outputs
256
-
Measured Value Monitoring Functions
257
-
Functional Description
257
-
Hardware Monitoring
257
-
Software Monitoring
259
-
Monitoring of External Current Transformer Circuits
259
-
Fuse Failure Monitoring
261
-
Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions
263
-
Setting Hints
265
-
Settings
266
-
Information of the Monitoring Functions
267
-
Sum Events of the Monitoring Functions
268
-
Trip Circuit Supervision
270
-
Functional Description
270
-
Setting Hints
274
-
Settings for the Trip Circuit Supervision
276
-
-
Information
276
-
Threshold Supervision
277
-
Functional Description
277
-
Setting Hints
279
-
Settings of the Threshold Supervision
280
-
Information for the Threshold Supervision
282
-
External Trip Coupling
283
-
Functional Description
283
-
Setting Hints
283
-
Settings
284
-
Information for the Function Control
284
-
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes
286
-
Functional Description
286
-
Setting Hints
287
-
Settings of the Temperature Detection Function
289
-
Information for the Temperature Detection Function
293
-
Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal)
295
-
Functional Description
295
-
Setting Hint
296
-
Protection Function Logic
297
-
Functional Description
297
-
Processing Tripping Logic
297
-
Processing Tripping Logic
298
-
Functional Description
298
-
Settings for the Tripping Logic
299
-
Fault Display on the Leds/Lcd
299
-
Principle of Function
299
-
Settings
299
-
Statistical Counters
300
-
Functional Description
300
-
Setting/Resetting
300
-
Information for the Statistical Counter
301
-
Auxiliary Functions
302
-
Processing of Messages
302
-
Operational Annunciations
303
-
Fault Annunciations
303
-
General Interrogation
304
-
Spontaneous Annunciations
304
-
Statistical Counters
304
-
Measurements
305
-
Oscillographic Fault Recording (Waveform Capture)
308
-
Date and Time Stamping
309
-
Commissioning Aids
310
-
Influencing Information on the System Interface During Test Operation
310
-
Testing the System Interface
310
-
Testing the States of the Binary Inputs/Outputs
311
-
Creating a Test Oscillographic Recording
311
-
Setting Hints
311
-
Settings for Oscillographic Fault Recording
312
-
Information for the Oscillographic Fault Recording
312
-
Information for Minimum and Maximum Values
313
-
Breaker Control
314
-
Types of Commands
315
-
Steps in the Command Sequence
315
-
Interlocking
316
-
Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching
317
-
Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands
324
-
-
-
3 Installation and Commissioning
325
-
Installation and Connections
326
-
Installation
326
-
Connections
330
-
Hardware Modifications
332
-
General
332
-
Disassembling the Device
334
-
Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards
337
-
Interface Modules
348
-
To Reassemble the Device
351
-
Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration
352
-
Checking the Data Connections of Serial Interfaces
352
-
Checking the Device Connections
354
-
Checking the Integration in the Plant
359
-
General Hints
359
-
Commissioning
362
-
Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission
363
-
Testing the System Interface
363
-
Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
365
-
Testing the Breaker Failure Scheme
367
-
Checking the Analog Outputs
368
-
Testing User-Defined Functions (CFC)
368
-
Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection at Stand-Still
368
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, Fn)
368
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz)
370
-
Checking the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
372
-
Checking the DC Voltage/DC Current Circuit
374
-
Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment
375
-
Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator
376
-
General Hints
376
-
Checking the Current Circuits
380
-
Checking the Differential Protection
382
-
Checking the Earth Current Differential Protection
384
-
Checking the Voltage Circuits
389
-
Checking the Stator Earth Fault Protection
390
-
Unit Connection
391
-
Busbar Connection
394
-
Testing the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
398
-
Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection When Used for Rotor Earth Fault Protection
400
-
Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection During Operation
400
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, Fn)
400
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 to 3 Hz)
401
-
Tests with the Generator Connected to the Network
402
-
Checking the Correct Connection Polarity
402
-
Measurement of Motoring Power (Reverse Power) and Angle Error Correction
402
-
Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection
403
-
Checking the Underexcitation Protection
404
-
Checking the Directional Function of the Overcurrent Time Protection
405
-
Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
405
-
Final Preparation of the Device
407
-
-
4 Technical Data
409
-
General Device Data
411
-
Analog Inputs
411
-
Power Supply
412
-
Binary Inputs and Outputs
412
-
Communications Interfaces
413
-
Electrical Tests
417
-
Mechanical Stress Tests
419
-
Climatic Stress Tests
419
-
Service Conditions
420
-
Certifications
420
-
Construction
421
-
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67)
422
-
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67)
423
-
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49)
428
-
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46)
430
-
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51)
432
-
Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M)
433
-
Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T)
435
-
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN/TN)
438
-
Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40)
439
-
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R)
440
-
Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)
441
-
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)
442
-
Out-Of-Step Protection (ANSI 78)
443
-
Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27)
444
-
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59)
446
-
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)
447
-
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24)
448
-
Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R)
450
-
Jump of Voltage Vector
451
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
452
-
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R)
453
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3Rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3Rd Harm.)
454
-
Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, -100 %)
455
-
Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, Fn, ANSI 64R)
456
-
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R)
457
-
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48)
458
-
Restart Inhibit for Motors
459
-
Rotor )
459
-
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF)
460
-
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27)
461
-
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59N DC /51N DC )
462
-
Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection
463
-
Additional Functions
464
-
Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions
471
-
Dimensions
473
-
-
-
Appendix
477
-
Ordering Information and Accessories
478
-
Accessories
480
-
A.1.1 Accessories
480
-
Schematic Diagram of the Accessories
483
-
Dimensional Drawing of the Accessories
487
-
General Diagrams (IEC)
498
-
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation
498
-
Housing for Panel Surface Mounting
500
-
General Diagrams (ANSI)
502
-
Connection Examples
504
-
A.4 Connection Examples
504
-
Connection Examples for RTD-Box
514
-
100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor
515
-
Protection Settings
516
-
Commissioning
516
-
A.5.1 Protection Settings
516
-
Definition of the Active Power Measurement
518
-
Current Transformer Requirements
520
-
Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information
522
-
Source: BI, F, C; Destination: BO, LED, C
522
-
Destination: Indication Buffer, System Interface
526
-
Default Settings
527
-
Binary Inputs
527
-
Binary Outputs (Output Relays)
527
-
A.9 Default Settings
527
-
LED Indicators
530
-
Function Keys
530
-
A.9.3 LED Indicators
530
-
Establishing a Default Display
531
-
Spontaneous Display Messages
531
-
Pre-Defined CFC Charts
532
-
A.9.7 Pre–Defined CFC Charts
532
-
Interoperability List
533
-
A.10 Interoperability List
533
-
Functions Overview
535
-
A.11 Functions Overview
535
-
Settings
539
-
A.12 Settings
539
-
List of Information
565
-
List of Measured Values
594
-
Protocol-Dependent Functions
600
-
-
Index
601
Advertisement
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 Manual (638 pages)
Multifunctional Machine Protection
Brand: Siemens
|
Category: Protection Device
|
Size: 12.96 MB
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 Manual (94 pages)
Input/Output unit, Bay control unit, Communication module, PROFIBUS-DP Communication profile
Brand: Siemens
|
Category: Protection Device
|
Size: 0.65 MB
Table of Contents
-
Preface
3
-
Revision Index
7
-
Table of Contents
9
-
1 PROFIBUS Communication Modules
11
-
Communication Module Types and Hardware Revisions
12
-
Communication Module Types
12
-
Hardware Revisions
12
-
Compatibility of the Communication Module Hardware with PROFIBUS-DP Firmware Versions and Mapping Files
13
-
Display of Module-Specific Information at the SIPROTEC Device
15
-
Block 1: Status and Parameters of the PROFIBUS-DP Slave
17
-
Block 2: Firmware Versions and Mapping File
19
-
Block 3: Module Hardware Information and Boot Firmware Version
20
-
Block 4: OLM Information
21
-
Block 5: Status of the Event List Via PROFIBUS-DP
24
-
-
2 Parameters and Properties
25
-
Bus Specific Parameters
26
-
PROFIBUS-DP Settings
26
-
Configuration of the Fibre-Optical Interface
28
-
Event List Settings
31
-
PROFIBUS-DP Configuration Data
31
-
Execution of Switching Operations Via PROFIBUS-DP
32
-
Command Output Modes
32
-
Transformer Tap Change Commands
33
-
Behaviour under Special Operating Conditions
33
-
Response in the Event of Disturbed Communication to the PROFIBUS-DP Master
34
-
Communication Interruption
34
-
Signalling of Line-Breaks in a Redundant Fibre-Optical Ring
35
-
Annunciations to the PROFIBUS-DP Master
37
-
Event List Via PROFIBUS-DP (Sequence of Events Recorder)
38
-
Properties of the Event List
39
-
Structure of a PROFIBUS-DP Telegram with Event List
40
-
Telegram in Input Direction
40
-
Telegram in Output Direction
42
-
Handshake Mechanism
43
-
-
3 Data Type Definitions
45
-
Single-Point Indication (SP, Input)
46
-
Single Command (SC, Output)
47
-
Double-Point Indication (DP, Input) / Double Command (DC, Output)
48
-
Measured Value (Signed Integer)
49
-
Measured Value (Float)
50
-
Metered Measurand (Unsigned Long)
51
-
Transformer Tap Change Command (TC)
52
-
Transformer Tap Position Indication (TM)
53
-
Message Block for Event List Via PROFIBUS-DP
54
-
-
4 PROFIBUS-DP — Parameterization in DIGSI
57
-
Interface Selection and Mapping Files
58
-
Standard Mappings 3-1 to 3-N
58
-
Compatibility with Standard Mappings of Previous Versions
59
-
Interface Selection and Mapping Selection in DIGSI 4.21
59
-
Interface Selection and Mapping Selection in DIGSI 4.3 or Higher
63
-
Customization of the Allocations
66
-
Scaling of Measured Values
70
-
Measurement Conversion
70
-
Number Representation Depending on the Parameterization
71
-
Parameterization in DIGSI
73
-
Time Synchronization
75
-
PROFIBUS-DP Master
75
-
Parameterization in DIGSI
77
-
Using SFC14 and SFC15 in STEP7
79
-
-
5 Technical Data
83
-
Connection Via the PSE Module
84
-
Connection Via the PSO Module
86
-
Glossary
89
-
Index
91
-
Advertisement
Advertisement
Related Products
-
Siemens 7UM515
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM61
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT613 series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT63 series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT613*-*D/E series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT633*-* D/E series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT633*-* P/Q series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT635*-* D/E series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT635*-* P/Q series
-
Siemens SIPROTEC 7UT613*-* B series
Siemens Categories
Controller
Control Unit
Industrial Equipment
Washer
Switch
More Siemens Manuals
(Ocr-Read Summary of Contents of some pages of the Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 Document (Main Content), UPD: 01 September 2023)
-
132, Functions 116 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Figure 2-57 Logic Diagram of the Reverse Power Protection 2.15.2 Setting Hints General The reverse power protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 2.2, address 0131, REVERSE POWER = Enabled.SetDisabled if the function is not required. The address 3101 REVERSE POWER, serves to switch the function ON-orOFF or to block only the trip command …
-
51, Setting Groups 35 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.4 Setting Groups 2.4.1 Functional Description Purpose of Setting Groups Two independent groups of parameters can be set for the device functions. The user can switch back and forward between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface. A setting group includes the setting values for a…
-
249, Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 233 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 05543 I.En. ACTIVE Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE 05546 I.En. release Release of the current stage 05547 I.En. picked up Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up 05548 I.En. TRIP Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP F.No. Alarm Comments
… -
293, Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 277 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.42.2.2 Information for the Temperature Detection Function 9121A RTD12 TYPE not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm not connected RTD12: Type 9122A RTD12 LOCATION Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD12: Location 9123 RTD12 STAGE 1 -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9124 RTD12 STAGE 1 -58.…
-
566, Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 A Appendix 550 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Supervision OUT ON * M LED BO 135 136 1 GI 00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device OUT ON OF F * LED BO 135 145 1 GI 00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Sum Alarm) Supervision OUT * * LED BO 00147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Supervision OUT ON OF F *LEDBO 00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Event) Supervision OUT * * LED BO …
-
562, A Appendix 546 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 9071A RTD 7 TYPE RTD-Box not connected Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm not connected RTD 7: Type 9072A RTD 7 LOCATION RTD-Box Oil Ambient Winding Bearing Other Other RTD 7: Location 9073 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9074 RTD 7 STAGE 1 RTD-Box -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 7: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9075 RTD 7 STAGE 2 RTD-Bo…
-
303, Auxiliary Functions 287 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 annunciations have been acknowledged, the initial display is shown again. Acknowledgement can be performed by pressing the LED button on the front panel. The relay is also equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery. These messages can be retrieved, at any time, using the operatin…
-
472, 4 Technical Data 456 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 1 ) Thermical replica registers cooling-down 2 ) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained 3 ) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained, if the measured voltage is not too small 4 ) 25 Hz < f/Hz ≤ 40 Hz 5 ) Function is only active at rated frequency ± 3 Hz Operational Condition 1 The frequency follow-up circuit can operate only , when at least one a.c. measured quantity is present at one of the the analog inputs (u…
-
444, 4 Technical Data 428 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Setting Ranges / Resolution Measurement Quantities: PositiveSequence Voltages Pickup Voltage U<, U<<, Up< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) (27) Dropout Ratio U<, U<< 1.01 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01) (27-1 and 27-2 only) Delay Time T U<, T U<< 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) (27-Delay) or ∞ (does not expire) Time Multiplier T MUL 0.10 s to 5.00 …
-
400, 3 Installation and Commissioning 384 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 3.4.8 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection when Used for Rotor Earth Fault Protection If the sensitive earth fault protection is used for rotor earth fault protection, it must first be set to Block relay under address 5101. An earth fault is simulated via a resistor which is roughly equivalent to the desired trip resistance. In generators with rotating rectifier excitation,…
-
349, 3.1 Installation and Connections 333 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 The order numbers of the exchange modules can be found in the Appendix in Section A.1.1 Accessories. Serial Interfaces with Bus Capability If the device variant used has interfaces with bus capability, the bus should be terminated with resistors at the last device on the bus. In the case of the 7UM62, these are variants with RS485 or Profibus interfaces. Th…
-
218, Functions 202 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 The rotor earth fault calculation calculates the complex earth impedance from the aux- iliary AC voltage U RE and the current I RE . The earth resistance R E of the excitation circuit is then calculated from the earth impedance. The device also considers the cou- pling capacitance of the coupling unit C K , the series (e.g. brush) resistance R series and the capacitance to the earth excitation circuit C…
-
536, A Appendix 520 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 133 IMPEDANCE PROT. Disabled Enabled Enabled Impedance Protection 135 OUT-OF-STEP Disabled Enabled Enabled Out-of-Step Protection 140 UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Enabled Undervoltage Protection 141 OVERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Enabled Overvoltage Protection 142 FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Enabled Enabled Over / Underfrequency Protec- tion 143 OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Enabled Enabled Overexcitation Protection (U/f) 144 INV.UNDERVOLT. Disabled E…
-
585, A.13 List of Information 569 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 05581 >BLOCK Vector Jump (>VEC JUMP block) Jump of Voltage Vector SP * * LED BI BO 05582 Vector Jump is switched OFF (VEC JUMP OFF) Jump of Voltage Vector OUT ON OF F * LED BO 72 72 1 GI 05583 Vector Jump is BLOCKED (VEC JMP BLOCKED) Jump of Voltage Vector OUT ON OF F ON OFF LED BO 72 73 1 GI 05584 Vector Jump is ACTIVE (VEC JUMP ACTIVE) Jump of Voltage Vector OUT ON OF F * LED BO 72 74 1 GI 05…
-
523, Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information 507 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Single Controls negated –C_SN ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X –C_SN Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close –C_D2 ON/OFF – – X X – X – X X X –C_D2 Open/Close – – X X – X – X X X –C_D2 Transformer Tap Changer – – X X – X – X X X Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close 1 Common –C_D3 ON/OFF …
-
283, Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 External Trip Coupling 267 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.41 External Trip Coupling 2.41.1 Functional Description Up to four desired signal from external protection or supervision units can be incorporated into the processing of 7UM62. The signals are coupled as ”External signal” via binary inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can be annunciated, time delayed, transmitted to the tri…
-
484, A Appendix 468 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Figure A-4 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 10:1; 20:1; 3PP1326-0BZ-012009 Figure A-5 General Diagram of Controller Unit 7XT7100-0 ∗A00 Figure A-6 General Diagram of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0 ∗A00 12 500 Ω 3 500 Ω 4 9000 Ω UControl Auxiliary voltage 230 VAC UMeas Flush mounting housing Surface mounting housing 120, 125 VAC X = 7 7UM 7XR60 9 9 7 17 15 25 27 19 21 21 19 27 25 17 15 11…
-
191, Jump of Voltage Vector 175 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Pickup Values The value to be set for the vector jump (address 4602 DELTA PHI) depends on the feeding and load conditions. Abrupt load changes in the active power cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be specifically determined for the power system considered. This can be done on the basis of the equivalent circuit diagram in Figure 2-80, or by means of a network calculation software. I…
-
285, External Trip Coupling 269 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 04571 Ext 3 OFF External trip 3 is switched OFF 04572 Ext 3 BLOCKED External trip 3 is BLOCKED 04573 Ext 3 ACTIVE External trip 3 is ACTIVE 04576 Ext 3 picked up External trip 3: General picked up 04577 Ext 3 Gen.TRP External trip 3: General TRIP 04583 >BLOCK Ext 4 >BLOCK external trip 4 04586 >Ext trip 4 >Trigger external trip 4 04591 Ext 4 OFF External trip 4 is switched OFF 04592 Ext 4 BLOCKED External trip 4 is …
-
455, Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %) 439 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %) Setting Ranges/ Resolution Alarm Stage R SEF <20to700Ω (Increments 1 Ω) Tripping Stage R SEF << 20 to 700 Ω (Increments 1 Ω) Earth Currrent StageI SEF > 0.02 to 1.50…
-
Page 1
Preface Table of Contents Introduction Functions SIPROTEC Installation and Commissioning Multifunction Generator, Technical Data Motor and Transformer Protection Relay Appendix 7UM62 Index V4.1 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 2
Liability Statement Copyright We have checked the text of this manual against the Copyright © Siemens AG 2002. All rights reserved. hardware and software described. Exclusions and de- Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evalu- viations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for ation and communication of its contents, is not authorized lack of total agreement. -
Page 3
(EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within certain voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards EN 50081 and EN 50082 for EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255–6 for the low-… -
Page 4
4 devices, please contact your Siemens representative. Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalog, or questions can be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative. Instructions and The following indicators and standard definitions are used: Warnings… -
Page 5
Preface Typographic and The following text formats are used to identify concepts giving device information Graphical described by the text flow: Conventions Parameter names, or identifiers for configuration or function parameters that appear ® in the device display or on the screen of a PC (with DIGSI 4) are shown in mono- script (same point size) bold text. -
Page 6
Preface Exclusive–OR gate: output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active simultaneously Input signals of dynamic quantity Formation of one output signal from a number of analog inputs 1706 I2>>… -
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Table of Contents Introduction……………………….1 Overall Operation ……………………2 Applications ……………………..5 Features ……………………..7 Functions……………………….13 Introduction, Reference Power System …………….16 Functional Scope……………………18 2.2.1 Description ……………………… 18 2.2.2 Setting Hints ……………………. 18 2.2.2.1 Settings ……………………..23 Power System Data 1………………….27 2.3.1 Functional Description ………………….
-
Page 8
Table of Contents 2.7.2 Setting Hints ……………………. 44 2.7.2.1 Settings for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection ……. 47 2.7.2.2 Information for the I>> stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection ……47 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) …………..48 2.8.1 Functional Description …………………. -
Page 9
Table of Contents 2.15.2.1 Settings of the Reverse Power Protection…………….117 2.15.2.2 Information for the Reverse Power Protection…………..118 2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F)…………..119 2.16.1 Functional Description ………………….119 2.16.2 Setting Hints ……………………120 2.16.2.1 Settings of the Forward Active Power Supervision…………. 120 2.16.2.2 Information for the Forward Power Supervision ………….. -
Page 10
Table of Contents 2.23.1 Functional Description ………………….164 2.23.2 Setting Hints ……………………165 2.23.2.1 Settings of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection …………..166 2.23.2.2 Information for the Inverse Undervoltage Protection …………166 2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) ……….. 167 2.24.1 Functional Description …………………. -
Page 11
Table of Contents 2.31.2.2 Information for the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection …………212 2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) …………… 213 2.32.1 Functional Description ………………….213 2.32.2 Setting Hints ……………………215 2.32.2.1 Settings of the Motor Starting Time Supervision …………..216 2.32.2.2 Information for the Motor Starting Time Supervision ………… -
Page 12
Table of Contents 2.39.2.2 Information…………………….. 260 2.40 Threshold Supervision ………………….261 2.40.1 Functional Description ………………….261 2.40.2 Setting Hints ……………………263 2.40.2.1 Settings of the Threshold Supervision …………….264 2.40.2.2 Information for the Threshold Supervision…………….266 2.41 External Trip Coupling ………………….267 2.41.1 Functional Description …………………. -
Page 13
Table of Contents 2.45.6 Setting Hints ……………………295 2.45.6.1 Settings for Oscillographic Fault Recording …………… 296 2.45.6.2 Information for the Oscillographic Fault Recording …………296 2.45.6.3 Information for Minimum and Maximum Values …………..297 2.46 Breaker Control ……………………298 2.46.1 Types of Commands …………………. -
Page 14
Table of Contents 3.4.6 Checking the Stator Earth Fault Protection ……………. 374 3.4.6.1 Unit Connection ……………………375 3.4.6.2 Busbar Connection ………………….378 3.4.7 Testing the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection …………… 382 3.4.8 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection when Used for Rotor Earth Fault Protection ……………… -
Page 15
Table of Contents 4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21)………………426 4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) ………………427 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) ………………428 4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) ………………430 4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81)………………431 4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) ………….. 432 4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R) ………… -
Page 16
Table of Contents Connection Examples………………….488 A.4.1 Connection Examples for RTD-Box………………498 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor ……..499 A.5.1 Protection Settings………………….500 A.5.2 Commissioning ……………………500 Definition of the Active Power Measurement…………..502 Current Transformer Requirements………………504 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information …….. -
Page 17: Introduction
Introduction ® The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 devices are introduced in this section. An overview of the devices is presented in their application, characteristics, and scope of functions. Overall Operation Applications Features 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3…
-
Page 18: Overall Operation
1 Introduction Overall Operation ® The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 is a numerical, multi-functional, protective and control device equipped with a powerful microprocessor. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the measured quantities, issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other primary power system equipment, are processed in a completely digital way.
-
Page 19: C53000-G1176-C149
1.1 Overall Operation equipped with sensitive input transformers (I ) and can measure secondary currents in the mA range. A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-earth voltage (connection to phase-to-phase voltages and voltage transformers in V connection is possible as well).
-
Page 20
1 Introduction Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local interaction with the 7UM62. All information of the device can be accessed using the integrated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control ® settings, operating and fault messages, and metering values (see also SIPROTEC 4–System Manual). -
Page 21: Applications
1.2 Applications Applications ® SIPROTEC 7UM62 is a numerical machine protection unit from the “7UM6 Numerical Protection series”. It provides all functions that are necessary for the protection of generators, motors and transformers. As the scope of functions of the 7UM62 can be customized, it is suited for small, medium-sized and large generators.
-
Page 22
1 Introduction Messages and A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power Measured Values; system and the 7UM62 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated Storage of Data for can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. Fault Recordings Messages of the 7UM62 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and… -
Page 23: Features
1.3 Features Features • Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. General Features • Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of the analog input quantities to the initiation of outputs for, as an example, tripping circuit breakers or other switch-gear devices. •…
-
Page 24
1 Introduction • Evaluation of negative sequence component of the three phase currents; Unbalanced Load Protection • Alarm stage when a set unbalanced load is exceeded; • Thermal replica for rotor temperature rise with adjustable negative sequence factor K and adjustable time for cool down; •… -
Page 25
1.3 Features • Phase selective overcurrent fault detection with undervoltage seal-in (for Impedance Protection synchronous machines which take their excitation voltage from the terminal voltage); • 2 impedance zones, 1 overreach zone for zone extension (controlled via binary input), 4 time stages; •… -
Page 26
1 Introduction • Measurement of displacement voltage at the machine via the neutral transformers or earthing transformer or by calculation from phase-to-earth voltages; • Highly sensitive earth current detection, optional with or without directional determination with zero sequence components (I •… -
Page 27
1.3 Features • Different prolongation of cool-down time constants for rest/operation period is taken into consideration; • Disabling of the start inhibit is possible if an emergency start-up is required. • Breaker failure condition determined by current flow after a trip signal has been Breaker Failure Protection issued, or the breaker position indication (binary input) can be evaluated;… -
Page 28
1 Introduction • Circuit breakers can be opened and closed via the programmable function keys on Breaker Control the front panel, through the SCADA, or through the front operator interface using a ® personal computer with DIGSI • Circuit breakers are monitored via the breaker auxiliary contacts; •… -
Page 29: Functions
Functions ® This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC 7UM62 relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to determine setting values and formulae where required. Introduction, Reference Power System Functional Scope Power System Data 1 Setting Groups Power System Data 2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage…
-
Page 30
Functions 2.26 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.28 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.29 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) -
Page 31
® Regionalization The SIPROTEC 7UM62 protective relays are offered in regional versions. The user should purchase only the functional scope that is needed. The prepared functions are adapted to the technical requirements of the regions. Table 2-1 Regionalization Function Region DE Region Worldwide Region US Germany… -
Page 32: Introduction, Reference Power System
Functions Introduction, Reference Power System The following chapters explain the individual protective and additional functions and provide information about on the setting values. Generator The calculation examples are based on two reference power systems with the two typical basic connections, i.e. the busbar connection and the unit connection (see Figure 2-1).
-
Page 33
Introduction, Reference Power System Technical Data of Generator: = 5.27 MVA N, G the Reference = 6.3 kV N, G Power Systems = 483 A N, G cos ϕ = 0.8 Current transformer: = 500 A; = 1 A N,prim N, sec Toroidal current transformer I = 60 A;… -
Page 34: Functional Scope
Functions Functional Scope 2.2.1 Description General The 7UM62 has numerous protective and additional functions. The hardware and firmware provided is designed for this scope of functions. Nevertheless a few restrictions apply to the use of the earth fault current and earth fault voltage inputs U and I respectively.
-
Page 35
Functional Scope Parameter 0104 FAULT VALUE is used to specify whether the oscillographic fault recording should record Instantaneous values or RMS values. If RMS values are recorded, the available recording time increases by the factor 16. For some protective functions you can also choose the measuring inputs of the relay to which they will be allocated (side 1 or side 2);… -
Page 36
Functions Table 2-2 Allocation of Device Inputs to Protection Functions Side 1 Side 2 Protection Function ANSI L1S1 L2S1 L1S2 L2S2 L3S1 L3S2 Impedance Protection ANSI 21 Fixed Fixed Out-of-Step Protection ANSI 78 Fixed Fixed Undervoltage Protection ANSI 27 Fixed Overvoltage Protection ANSI 59 Fixed… -
Page 37
Functional Scope For the differential protection, address 0120 DIFF. PROT. allows to specify the type of protected object (Generator/Motor or 3-phase Transformer); the function can be excluded altogether by setting Disabled. Side 2 Side 1 3∼ Address 0120 DIFF. PROT. = Generator/Motor 7UM62 Figure 2-2… -
Page 38
Functions For the following application, the differential protection of device A must be set to Generator/Motor, and that of device B to 3-phase Transformer. Also, the settings of the generator data under Power System Data 1 must be same as for the transformer data of side: (A) Side 2 (A) Side 1… -
Page 39: Settings
Functional Scope 2.2.2.1 Settings Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option Enabled FAULT VALUE Disabled Instantaneous Fault values Instantaneous values values RMS values DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Differential Protection Enabled PROT.
-
Page 40
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments IMPEDANCE Disabled Enabled Impedance Protection PROT. Enabled OUT-OF-STEP Disabled Enabled Out-of-Step Protection Enabled UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Undervoltage Protection Enabled OVERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Overvoltage Protection Enabled FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Enabled Over / Underfrequency Protec- Enabled tion OVEREXC. -
Page 41
Functional Scope Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1 (Port B) Positive Sequence Current I1 [%] Negative Sequence Current I2 [%] Positive Sequence Voltage U1 [%] Active Power |P| [%] Reactive Power |Q| [%] Frequency f [%] |Power Factor| [%] p.u. -
Page 42
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output D2 (Port D) Positive Sequence Current I1 [%] Negative Sequence Current I2 [%] Positive Sequence Voltage U1 [%] Active Power |P| [%] Reactive Power |Q| [%] Frequency f [%] |Power Factor| [%] p.u. -
Page 43: Power System Data 1
Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 2.3.1 Functional Description General The device requires certain basic data regarding the protected equipment, so that the device will be compatible with its desired application. These may be, for instance, rated power system and transformer data, measured quantity polarities and their physical connections, breaker properties etc.
-
Page 44
Functions Figure 2-7 shows an example. Although the starpoints of both CT sets are turned to- wards the protected object, “side 2” is set to the opposite: 210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 = “Side 2“ “Side 1“ 0210 STRPNT–>OBJ S2 0201 STRPNT–>OBJ S1 = YES = NO Figure 2-7 Current Transformer Starpoints in Transverse Differential Protection — Example… -
Page 45
Power System Data 1 At addresses 0221 Unom PRIMARY and 0222 Unom SECONDARY, information is Nominal Values of Voltage entered regarding the primary nominal voltage and secondary nominal voltages Transformers (phase-to-phase) of the connected voltage transformers. At address 0223 UE CONNECTION the user specifies to the device which type of volt- Voltage Connection age is connected to the U input. -
Page 46
Functions The address 0225A serves to communicate the adaptation factor between the phase Uph/Uen Adaption Factor voltage and the displacement voltage to the device. This information is relevant for measured-quantity monitoring. If the voltage transformer set has broken delta windings and if these windings are input), this must be specified accordingly in address 0223 connected to the device (V (see below at side title ”Voltage Connection U… -
Page 47
Power System Data 1 Setting parameters: 0249 SN TRANSFORMER N,Transf 0241 UN-PRI SIDE 1 N, S1 0252 SN GEN/MOTOR N, Generator 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR N, Generator These normalizing factors apply for transformer protection and overall protection (see Figures 2-3 and 2-4). Protected Object: Regardless of the configuration and intended use of the differential protection, the generator/motor ratings must be specified. -
Page 48
Functions Parameter 0274A ATEX100 allows compliance with PTB requirements (special ATEX100 requirements for Germany) for thermal replicas. If this parameter is set to YES, all thermal replicas of the 7UM62 are stored in case of a power supply failure. As soon as the supply voltage returns, the thermal replicas continue operating with the stored values. -
Page 49: Settings 1
Power System Data 1 2.3.2.1 Settings 1 Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency 60 Hz PHASE SEQ. L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 Phase Sequence L1 L3 L2 SCHEME Direct connected to busbar Direct connected Scheme Configuration Unit transformer connected…
-
Page 50: List Of Information
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments Unom PRIMARY 0.10..400.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage Unom SECON- 100..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (Ph- DARY UE CONNECTION UE connected to neutral UE connected to UE Connection transformer neutral transformer UE connected to broken…
-
Page 51: Setting Groups
Setting Groups Setting Groups 2.4.1 Functional Description Purpose of Setting Two independent groups of parameters can be set for the device functions. The user Groups can switch back and forward between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface.
-
Page 52: Power System Data 2
Functions Power System Data 2 2.5.1 Functional Description General protective data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 2.3, these settings can be changed over with the setting groups.
-
Page 53
Power System Data 2 F.No. Alarm Comments 05017 f: Frequency at trip 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 54: Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, Ansi 50/51) With Undervoltage Seal-In38
Functions Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In General The overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the protected object.
-
Page 55: Setting Hints
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In Figure 2-10 shows the logic diagram of the overcurrent time protection I> with undervoltage seal-in. FNo. 01722 FNo. 01966 I> BLOCKED >BLOCK I> FNo. 01970 U< seal in Tripping FNo. 01811 matrix &…
-
Page 56: Settings For The Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)
Functions The 1205 U< undervoltage stage (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below Undervoltage Seal–In the lowest phase-to-phase voltage permissible during operation, e.g. 80 V. The seal-in time 1206 T-SEAL-IN limits the pickup seal-in introduced by the overcurrent/undervoltage. It must be set to a value higher than the T I> time delay. The dropout ratio r = I of the overcurrent pickup I>…
-
Page 57: Information From Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>)
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In 2.6.2.2 Information from Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Stage I>) F.No. Alarm Comments 01722 >BLOCK I> >BLOCK I> 01950 >Useal-in BLK >O/C prot. : BLOCK undervoltage seal-in 01965 I> OFF O/C prot. stage I> is switched OFF 01966 I>…
-
Page 58: Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, Ansi 50, 51, 67) With Direction Detection
Functions Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection The overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the protected object.
-
Page 59
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection typically used as the cross-polarized voltage (Figure 2-12). This is considered during the calculation of the directional vector in the clockwise rotating phase sequence by way of a rotation by +90° and in the anti-clockwise and in the anti-clockwise rotating phase by way of a rotation by –90°. -
Page 60: Setting Hints
Functions period (2 cycles), the detected direction is stored, as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available. If a short circuit already exists at generator startup (or, in case of motors or transformers, during connection), so that no voltage is present in the memory and no direction can be determined, a trip is issued.
-
Page 61
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Address 1301 O/C I>> is used to switch the definite time I>> stage for phase I>>Time- currents ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay). The high- Overcurrent Stage current stage I>>… -
Page 62
Functions Line ϕ LINE ANGLE Direction straight line 1304 Phase Direction 1305 LINE Figure 2-14 Definition of the Parameters ANGLE The setting value of the direction straight line results from the short-circuit angle of the feeding network. As a rule, it will be > 60°. The current pick-up value results from the short-circuit current calculation. -
Page 63: Settings For The I>> Stage Of The Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection
Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection 2.7.2.1 Settings for the I>> Stage of the Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection The following list indicates the setting ranges and the default settings of a I = 1 A secondary nominal current. For a secondary nominal current of I = 5 A, these values must be multiplied by 5.
-
Page 64: Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ansi 51V)
Functions Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) 2.8.1 Functional Description General The overcurrent time protection represents the short-circuit protection for small or low- voltage machines. For larger machines it is used as back-up protection for the machine short-circuit protection (differential protection and/or impedance protection). It provides back-up protection for network faults which are not promptly disconnected and thus may endanger the machine.
-
Page 65
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Factor ⋅ ≤ ≤ ∞ ————- 1.00 for 1.00 pickup 0.75 ⋅ ≤ ≤ ————- — for 0.25 ————- 1.00 pickup 0.25 ⋅ ≤ ≤ ————- 0.25 for 0.00 0.25 pickup 0.25 0.75 ⁄ – Generator nominal voltage = parameter 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR where I(U) –… -
Page 66
Functions FNo. 01899 O/C Ip pick.up FNo. 01896 O/C Ip Fault L1 1403 T Ip Pickup IL1 & FNo. 01900 FNo. 01897 Tripping matrix O/C Ip TRIP O/C Ip Fault L2 1403 T Ip (Pickup) & TMin FNo. 01898 TRIP CMD O/C Ip Fault L3 1403 T Ip (Pickup) -
Page 67
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) FNo. 01899 O/C Ip pick.up FNo. 01896 O/C Ip Fault L1 1402 Ip 1403 T Ip & FNo. 01897 FNo. 01900 Tripping O/C Ip Fault L2 1402 Ip O/C Ip TRIP matrix 1403 T Ip &… -
Page 68: Setting Hints
Functions FNo. 01899 O/C Ip pick.up FNo. 01896 O/C Ip Fault L1 1402 Ip 1403 T Ip & FNo. 01897 FNo. 01900 Tripping O/C Ip Fault L2 1402 Ip matrix O/C Ip TRIP 1403 T Ip & TMin FNo. 01898 TRIP CMD O/C Ip Fault L3 1402 Ip…
-
Page 69: Settings Of The Inverse O/C Time Protection
Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) times of the setting value is present. The function will reset as soon as the value falls below 95 % of the pick-up value. The current is set at address1402 Ip. The maximum operating current is of primary importance for the setting.
-
Page 70: Information For The Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1406 ANSI CURVE Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve Inverse Moderately Inverse Extremely Inverse Definite Inverse 1407 VOLT. INFLUENCE without without Voltage Influence Voltage controlled Voltage restraint 1408 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U<…
-
Page 71: Thermal Overload Protection (Ansi 49)
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.9.1 Functional Description General The thermal overload protection feature of the 7UM61 is designed to prevent overloads from damaging the protected equipment. The device is capable of projecting excessive operating temperatures for the protected equipment in accordance with a thermal model, based on the following differential equation: dΘ…
-
Page 72
Functions Coolant The thermal model of the 7UM62 considers an external temperature value. Depending Temperature/ on the application, this temperature can be the coolant or ambient temperature or, in Ambient the case of gas turbines, the entry temperature of the cold gas. The temperature to be Temperature considered can be fed in by one of the following: −… -
Page 73
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) the tripping signal via a binary input (”>Emer.Start O/L”). Since the calculated operating temperature may be higher than the maximum allowable operating temperature after drop out of the binary input has taken place, the thermal overload protection function features a programmable run-on time interval run-on time interval (T EMERGENCY) which is started when the binary input drops out. -
Page 74
Functions CB closed BkrClosed I MIN 0281 I> 1615A I MAX THERM. 1612A Kt-FACTOR Θ τ kτ 1610A 1602 I ALARM K-FACTOR FNo. 01515 1603 TIME CONSTANT & O/L I Alarm 1604 Q ALARM FNo. 01516 dΘ — — Θ ⋅… -
Page 75: Setting Hints
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.9.2 Setting Hints Thermal overload protection is only effective and accessible if address 0116 General Therm.Overload was set to Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Transformers and generators are prone to damage by overloads which last for an extended period of time.
-
Page 76
Functions Time Constant τ The thermal overload protection element tracks excessive temperature progression, employing a thermal differential equation that uses an exponential function. The TIME CONSTANT τ (address 1603) is used in the calculation to determine the operating temperature. If the overload characteristic of the generator to be protected is pre-determined, the user must select the protection trip characteristic in a way that it covers the overload characteristic to a large extent, at least with small overloads. -
Page 77
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) despite increasing current values. The limit value must be specified at a value ensuring that, even for the highest possible short-circuit current, the trip times of the overload protection exceed the trip times of the short-circuit protective relays (differential protection, impedance protection, time overcurrent protection). -
Page 78
Functions If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature deviates from the internal reference temperature of 40 °C. The following formula can be used to calculate the trip time: Θ – 40 °C æ ö… -
Page 79: Thermal Overload Protection Settings
Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) The following trip times result for different ambient temperatures Θ with a supposed load current of I = 1.5 ⋅ I and a preload I N, device æ ö æ ö 40 °C 40 °C –…
-
Page 80: Information List For The Thermal Overload Protection
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1607 TEMP. INPUT Disabled Disabled Temperature Input 4-20 mA Fieldbus Temp. of RTD 1 40..300 °C 100 °C 1608 TEMP. SCAL. Temperature for Scaling 104..572 °F 212 °F 1609 TEMP. SCAL. Temperature for Scaling 2.9.2.2 Information List for the Thermal Overload Protection…
-
Page 81: Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (Ansi 46)
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 2.10 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) General Unbalanced load protection detects unbalanced loads. The negative sequence currents associated with unbalanced loads create reverse fields in three-phase induction machines, which act on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are induced at the rotor surface, and local overheating of the rotor end zones and the slot wedges begins to take place.
-
Page 82
Functions Definite-Time High negative phase-sequence currents can only be caused by a two-pole power Trip Stage system short circuit which must be covered in accordance with the network grading plan. For this reason, the thermal characteristic is cut by a selectable, definite-time, negative phase-sequence current stage (address 1706 I2>>… -
Page 83: Setting Hints
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Logic Figure 2-22 shows the logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection. The protection may be blocked via a binary input (”>BLOCK I2”). Pickups and time stages are reset and the metered values in the thermal model are cleared. The binary input ”>RM th.rep.
-
Page 84
Functions Conversion to The factor K can be derived from the unbalanced load characteristic according to Figure 2-23 by reading the time corresponding to the FACTOR K at the point I Secondary Values = 1. Example: = 20 s for I perm The constant K = 20 s determined in this way is valid for the machine side… -
Page 85: Settings Of The Unbalanced Load Protection
Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) The parameter 1705 T COOL DOWN is defined as the time required by the thermal Time for Cool Down image to cool down from 100 % to 0 %. If the machine manufacturer does not provide this information, the setting value can be calculated by assuming an equal value for the cool-down time and the heating time of the object to be protected.
-
Page 86: Information For The Unbalanced Load Protection
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 1703 T WARN 20.00 sec Warning Stage Time Delay 2.0..100.0 sec; ∞ 1704 FACTOR K 18.7 sec Negativ Sequence Factor K 1705 T COOL DOWN 0..50000 sec 1650 sec Time for Cooling Down 1706 I2>>…
-
Page 87: Startup Overcurrent Protection (Ansi 51)
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) 2.11 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) General Gas turbines can be started by means of a frequency starting converter. A switched- mode converter feeds a current into the generator and creates a rotating field whose frequency gradually increases.
-
Page 88: Functional Description
Functions The function is also active above 70 Hz because at that frequency the protection is again in operational condition 0. 2.11.1 Functional Description Measuring At frequencies below 10 Hz, the protection works in operating condition 0, with the Principle sampling frequency automatically set to nominal conditions (f = 800 Hz for 50 Hz net- works and 960 Hz for 60 Hz networks).
-
Page 89
Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) f/fn Figure 2-26 Short-Circuit Currents in the Generator during the Startup (Generator: 300 MVA, 15.75 kV, 50 Hz) Delay Times Since the generator circuit breaker is open during startup, there is no need to coordi- nate the delay time with the network. -
Page 90: Settings Of The Startup Overcurrent Protection
Functions f/fn Idiff I>> O/C START Figure 2-27 Operating Range and Possible Pickup Threshold of Short-Circuit Protection Functions 2.11.2.1 Settings of the Startup Overcurrent Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1801 O/C STARTUP Startup O/C protection Block relay for trip com- mands 1802 STARTUP I>…
-
Page 91: Differential Protection (Ansi 87G/87M/87T)
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) 2.12 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) General The numerical current differential protection of the 7UM62 is a fast and selective short- circuit protection for generators, motors and transformers. The individual application can be configured, which ensures optimum matching to the protected object. The protected zone is selectively limited by the CTs at its ends.
-
Page 92
Functions The stabilizing quantity is derived from the arithmetical sum of the absolute values of | + |I |. The following definitions apply: The differential current = |I diff and the stabilization or restraining current = |I | + |I stab is derived from the fundamental frequency current and produces the tripping effect diff… -
Page 93: Protected Object Generator Or Motor: Particularities
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) This result shows that for internal fault and under ideal conditions I diff stab Consequently, the characteristic of internal faults is a straight line with a upward slope of 45° (dot-and-dash line in Figure 2-30). The currents I and I are compared by the differential protection with the diff…
-
Page 94: Protected Object Transformer: Particularities
Functions Due to their predominantly inductive component, faults in the proximity of the generator have relatively high short-circuit time constants that cause a magnetization of the current transformers. The CTs should be designed accordingly (see Appendix A.7). Figure 2-31 Definition of Current Direction for Longitudinal Differential Protection For use as a transverse differential protection, there is a particularity.
-
Page 95
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) Mismatching of Differences in the matching of CTs to the transformer rated current are not uncommon. These differences result in an error that leads to a differential current. Voltage Control by Voltage control tap changers (usually in-phase regulators) change the transformation Tap Changers ratio and the rated current of the transformer. -
Page 96
Functions The higher voltage side has a wye connection and the lower voltage side a delta connection. The phase rotation is n ⋅ 30° (i.e. 5 ⋅ 30° = 150°). Side 1 (higher voltage side) is the reference system. The vector group correction feature transforms the currents flowing from side 2 to side 1. -
Page 97: Evaluation Of Measured Quantities
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) Side 1 Side 2 √3 ⋅ I – – – ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ — — —— — – – – – – – Figure 2-34 Vector Group Matching for Y(N) d5 (with Earthed Starpoint) In Figure 2-35 on the left-hand side, a zero sequence current will occur in case of e.g. an external fault;…
-
Page 98
Functions The stabilizing quantity is calculated from the arithmetic average of a rectified quantity, so that the filter effect is less for it. As a result, the stabilization component in interference components, especially aperiodic DC components, will be higher than their differential current. -
Page 99
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) High-Speed Trip The high-speed trip stage I >> clears high-current internal faults instantaneously. Diff Stage I >> As soon as the differential current rises above the threshold I >> (branch d), a trip Diff Diff signal is issued regardless of the magnitude of the stabilizing current. This stage can operate even when, for example, a considerable second harmonic is present in the differential current, which is caused by current transformer saturation by a DC component in the short-circuit current, and which could be interpreted by the… -
Page 100
Functions Immediately after the fault (A), the short-circuit currents rise strongly, causing a equally high stabilizing current (2xthrough-flowing current). Saturation occurring on one side (B) now causes a differential current and reduces the stabilizing current, so that the operating point I may move into the tripping area (C). -
Page 101
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) Unwanted differential currents may also be cause by parallel connection of transformers or by transformer overexcitation due to excessive voltage. The inrush current can amount to a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a considerable 2nd harmonic content (double rated frequency) which is practically absent in the case of a short-circuit. -
Page 102
Functions condition lasts, i.e. cross-blocking is possible only once after a fault has occurred, and only for the set cross-block time. The further harmonic stabilizations operate individually per phase. However, it is also possible – as it is for the inrush stabilization – to set the protection such that not only the phase with harmonics content in excess to the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the differential stage I-DIFF>… -
Page 103
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) diff ————— — NObj Pickup Steady-state characteristic I–DIFF> Beginning of 0.85 · I–DIFF> add-on stabilization EXF–STAB 0.85 stab ————— — NObj Figure 2-41 Pickup of the Differential Protection If stabilization by higher-order harmonics is activated, the system first performs a harmonics analysis (for about 1 period) to check the stabilization conditions, if required. -
Page 104
Functions FNo 05631 Diff picked up & Characteristic Diff> L1 Diff> L2 2026A T I-DIFF> Diff> L3 Inrush stabilization FNo 05691 (2nd harm.)*) Diff> TRIP Diff TRIP Diff TRIP Harmonic stabilization Diff TRIP (3rd or 5th)*) Tripping matrix Add-on TMin stabilization TRIP CMD (ext. -
Page 105: Setting Hints
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) 2.12.2 Setting Hints General The differential protection is only effective and accessible if the type of protected object for this function was set within the framework of the protective function configuration (Section 2.2, address 0120, DIFF. PROT. = Generator/Motor or Three-phase trans.).
-
Page 106
Functions The parameters for the tripping characteristic are set at the addresses 2021 through Tripping 2044A. The meaning of the parameters is shown in Figure 2-43. The numerical values Characteristic at the branches are the parameter addresses. Address 2021 I-DIFF> is the pickup value for the differential current. The pickup value is referred to the nominal current of the generator or motor. -
Page 107: Differential Protection For Transformers
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) Add-on Where very high currents flow through the protected object during external short- circuits, an add-on stabilization takes effect that is set at address 2056A I-ADD ON Stabilization During STAB. (stabilization in case of saturation). Please note that the stabilizing current is Current Trans- former Saturation the arithmetical sum of the currents entering and leaving the protected zone, i.e.
-
Page 108
Functions − Rated current of the current transformer set in A (see above). Winding 1 is defined as the reference winding and therefore needs no numeral; the other windings are referred to winding 1. The reference winding is normally that of the higher voltage. If not the higher voltage side is used as reference winding, it must be considered that the vector group changes: e.g. -
Page 109
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) Cross-Blocking The inrush restraint can be extended by the so-called ”cross-block” function. This means that not only the phase with inrush current exhibiting harmonics content in excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the differential stage IDIFF>… -
Page 110
Functions the parameter 2042A BASE POINT 1. This branch considers current-proportional error currents. These are mainly transformation errors of the main CTs and, especially, the differential currents which may occur in the final tap changer positions due to the transformer regulation range. This branch of the characteristic limits the stabilization area. -
Page 111: Settings Of The Differential Protection
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) for each differential protection level and each phase. The dropout delay is linked to the minimum trip command duration that is valid for all protection functions. All setting times are additional time delays which do not include the operating times (measuring time, drop-out time) of the protective function.
-
Page 112: Information For The Differential Protection
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2073A IDIFFmax n.HM 0.5..12.0 I/InO 1.5 I/InO Limit IDIFFmax of n-th Harm.Restraint 2.12.2.4 Information for the Differential Protection F.No. Alarm Comments 05603 >Diff BLOCK >BLOCK differential protection 05615 Diff OFF Differential protection is switched OFF 05616 Diff BLOCKED Differential protection is BLOCKED 05617 Diff ACTIVE…
-
Page 113
Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M/87T) F.No. Alarm Comments 05692 Diff>> TRIP Differential prot.: TRIP by IDIFF>> 05620 Diff Adap.fact. Diff: adverse Adaption factor CT 05713 Diff CT-S1: Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 1 05714 Diff CT-S2: Diff. prot: Adaptation factor CT side 2 05701 Diff L1: Diff. -
Page 114: Earth Current Differential Protection (Ansi 87Gn, Tn)
For applications such as auto-transformers, starpoint earthing transformers and shunt reactors, Siemens recommends to use the 7UT612 protective relay instead. For high-ohmic earthing of generators, the earth fault protection function (Section 2.26) is used.
-
Page 115
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN) Protected object: Generator L1S1 L1S2 L2S1 L2S2 L3S1 L3S2 Figure 2-46 Connection Scheme and Definition of Current Vectors In both measuring principles, there is a vector addition of the phase currents on the line side (always side 1 in the 7UM62), which yields the zero sequence current. -
Page 116
Functions When an external non-earthed fault causes a heavy current to flow through the pro- tected zone, differences in the magnetic characteristics of the phase current trans- formers under conditions of saturation may cause a significant summation current which may simulate an earth current flowing into the protected zone. Measures must be taken to prevent this current from causing a trip. -
Page 117
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN) In applications with direct measurement of the starpoint current (e.g. earth current dif- ferential protection for transformers), the starpoint current is queried to the evaluation of the characteristics. This provides additional restraint against CT problems such as wrong zero sequence current modeling of the phase current transformers on side 1. -
Page 118
Functions • Phase current monitoring To preclude spurious tripping due to CT saturation in the presence of external faults, the protection function is blocked as soon as a maximum phase current is reached. To do so, the phase currents of side 1 are monitored. As soon as one phase current exceeds the threshold, the blocking takes effect. -
Page 119: Setting Hints
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN) 5812 REF BLOCKED 5803 >BLOCK REF 2102 REF I> BLOCK 5817 5821 REF picked up REF TRIP L1Sm 5840 2112 T I-REF> REF I> blocked Tripping matrix & L2Sm & Tmin TRIP L3Sm 5841 2103 REF U0>RELEASE REF U0>…
-
Page 120
Functions Address 2101 REF PROT. is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block relay). Note: When the device is delivered, the earth current differential protection is set to OFF. This is because this protection must not be used before at least the allocation and po- larity of the CTs have been correctly set. -
Page 121: Settings Of The Earth Current Differential Protection
Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN, TN) 2.13.2.1 Settings of the Earth Current Differential Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2101 REF PROT. Restricted Earth Fault Protection Block relay for trip com- mands 2102 REF I> BLOCK 1.0..2.5 I/InO 1.5 I/InO REF Pickup of Phase Current…
-
Page 122: Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection (Ansi 40)
Functions 2.14 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) General The underexcitation or loss of field protection protects a synchronous generator/motor from asynchronous operation in the event of a malfunction in the excitation system and from local overheating of the rotor. Furthermore, it ensures that the network sta- bility is not endangered due to the underexcitation of large synchronous generators.
-
Page 123
Note: The generator diagram can be visualized in more than one way. Figure 2-51 shows a form that is quite common at Siemens Power Generation, with a rotation of 90° and mirroring at the active power axis. The 7UM62 underexcitation protection provides three independent characteristics which can be freely combined. -
Page 124
Functions Excitation Voltage In case of a faulty voltage regulator or a failure of the excitation voltage, it is possible to switch up with a short delay (time stage T SHRT Uex<, e.g. 1.5 s). To do so, the Request device must either be informed via a binary input of the excitation voltage failure, or the excitation voltage must be fed in via measuring transducer TD3 and a voltage divider, provided that at address 3012 EXCIT. -
Page 125: Setting Hints
Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 3003 ANGLE 1 3004 T CHAR. 1 FNo. 05344 Exc<1 TRIP & FNo. 05329 >Char. 1 BLK. 3005 1/xd CHAR. 2 Tripping 3006 ANGLE 2 3007 T CHAR. 2 FNo. 05345 matrix Exc<2 TRIP &…
-
Page 126
Functions The trip characteristics of the underexcitation protection in the admittance value diagram are composed of straight lines which are respectively defined by their α conductance section 1/xd (=coordinate distance) and their inclination angle . The α α straight lines (1/xd CHAR.1)/ 1 (characteristic 1) and (1/xd CHAR.2)/ (characteristic 2) form the static underexcitation limit (see figure 2-54). -
Page 127
Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) = 6300 V U = U I = I = 5270 kVA = 50.0 Hz = 1500 RPM cos ϕ = 0.800 Limit of the stator = 2.470 winding heating = 1.400 Measuring point Limit of the stator Phase winding heating angle… -
Page 128
Functions Voltage transformer: U = 6.3 kV N VT prim 483 A 6300 V ⋅ ⋅ ———— — ———- — —————— — —————— — 0.39 2.47 6300 V 500 A dsec Multiplied by a safety factor of about 1.05, the setting value 1/xd CHAR. 1 at address 3002 results. -
Page 129: Settings Of The Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection
Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) This feature is set at address 3011 T SHRT Uex<. The following messages and trip commands are typically assigned: Table 2-6 Setting the Underexcitation Protection Characteristic 1 and 2 static not delayed Annunciation: Err < PU stability Characteristic 1 and 2 static long-time delayed…
-
Page 130: Information For The Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3012 EXCIT. VOLT. State of Excitation Volt. Supervi- sion 3013 Uexcit. < 0.50..8.00 V 2.00 V Excitation Voltage Superv. Pik- 3014A Umin 10.0..125.0 V 25.0 V Undervoltage blocking Pickup 3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 0.25..3.00 0.41 Conductance Intersect Charac-…
-
Page 131: Reverse Power Protection (Ansi 32R)
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 2.15 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) General Reverse power protection is used to protect a turbo-generator unit in case of failure of energy to the prime mover. In this case the synchronous generator runs as a motor and drives the turbine, taking the required motoring energy from the network.
-
Page 132: Setting Hints
Functions FNo. 05096 Pr picked up 3105A T-HOLD 3102 P> REVERSE 3103 T-SV-OPEN & FNo. 05097 Tripping Pr TRIP matrix 3104 T-SV-CLOSED & FNo. 05098 Pr+SV TRIP TMin FNo.05083 FNo. 05092 TRIP CMD >Pr BLOCK Pr BLOCKED FNo.05086 >SV tripped Figure 2-57 Logic Diagram of the Reverse Power Protection 2.15.2 Setting Hints…
-
Page 133: Settings Of The Reverse Power Protection
Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) = √3 ⋅ U ⋅ I . If the primary motoring energy is known, it must be converted Nsec Nsec Nsec to secondary quantities using the following formula: mach N mach N mach ⋅ ⋅ Setting ————— — ——————- -…
-
Page 134: Information For The Reverse Power Protection
Functions 2.15.2.2 Information for the Reverse Power Protection F.No. Alarm Comments 05083 >Pr BLOCK >BLOCK reverse power protection 05086 >SV tripped >Stop valve tripped 05091 Pr OFF Reverse power prot. is switched OFF 05092 Pr BLOCKED Reverse power protection is BLOCKED 05093 Pr ACTIVE Reverse power protection is ACTIVE 05096 Pr picked up…
-
Page 135: Forward Active Power Supervision (Ansi 32F)
Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 2.16 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) General The machine protection 7UM62 includes an active power supervision which monitors whether the active power falls below one set threshold, and whether a separate second set threshold is exceeded. Each of these functions can initiate different control functions.
-
Page 136: Setting Hints
Functions 2.16.2 Setting Hints General The forward active power protection is only effective and accessible if this function was set within the framework of the protective function configuration (section 2.2, 0132, FORWARD POWER = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not address required.
-
Page 137: Information For The Forward Power Supervision
Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 2.16.2.2 Information for the Forward Power Supervision F.No. Alarm Comments 05113 >Pf BLOCK >BLOCK forward power supervision 05116 >Pf< BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf< stage 05117 >Pf> BLOCK >BLOCK forw. power superv. Pf> stage 05121 Pf OFF Forward power supervis.
-
Page 138: Impedance Protection (Ansi 21)
Functions 2.17 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) General The machine impedance protection is used as a selective time graded protection to provide shortest possible tripping times for short-circuits in the synchronous machine, on the terminal leads as well as in the lower voltage winding of the unit transformer. It thus provides a fast back-up protection to the generator and transformer differential relays.
-
Page 139: Determination Of The Short-Circuit Impedance
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 2.17.1.2 Determination of the Short–Circuit Impedance For calculation of the fault impedance, the currents and voltages of the faulty loop are decisive. The phase selective fault detector determines the faulted loop and releases the corresponding measurement values for impedance calculation (see Table 2-7). −…
-
Page 140
Functions Table 2-8 Fault Modeling and Measuring Errors on the Generator Side in Case of System Faults System Fault Fault Model on the Loop selection Measuring Errors Generator Side 3–pole short 3–pole short circuit Phase-earth Always correct circuit measuring 2–pole short 3–pole short circuit Phase-earth loop Always correct… -
Page 141: Tripping Characteristic
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) FNo. 03967 Imp. Fault L1 FNo. 03968 Pickup I > Imp. Fault L2 & FNo. 03969 Imp. Fault L3 Pickup I > FNo. 03966 & Imp. picked up Pickup I > & FNo. 03953 FNo. 03962 >Imp.
-
Page 142: Tripping Logic
Functions The protected zones can be chosen such that the first stage (ZONE Z1, T-Z1) covers faults in the generator and the lower voltage side of the unit transformer, whereas the second stage (ZONE Z2, ZONE2 T2) measures into the network. It should be noted that faults in the system cause impedance measurement errors due to the connection group (star-delta) of the unit transformer (see subsection 2.17.1.2).
-
Page 143
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) A drop-out can only be caused by a drop-out of the overcurrent pickup and not by leaving the tripping polygon. Figure 2-61 illustrates the logic diagram of the impedance protection. FNo. 03966 3312 T END Imp. picked up 3310 ZONE Z2 3311 ZONE2 T2 &… -
Page 144: Setting Hints
Functions 2.17.2 Setting Hints General The machine impedance detection is only effective and accessible if it was previously set within the framework of project configuration (Section 2.2) at address 0133, IMPEDANCE PROT. = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 3301 IMPEDANCE PROT.
-
Page 145
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) with its operating time or with a slight time delay (undelayed tripping). A 0.1 s time delay is preferred. For ZONE Z2 the reach could be set to about 100 % of the transformer reactance, or in addition to a network impedance. -
Page 146
Functions Consequently, the secondary side setting value of zone 1 at address 3306 ZONE Z1 ⁄ 500 A 1 A ———————————— — 0.3669 Ω ⋅ 2.91 Ω ⁄ secondary 6.3 kV 100 V Note: The following ratio would result from the connection of a 5 A device to a 5 A transformer: ⁄… -
Page 147: Power Swing Blocking
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) The Z1B zone is usually switched effective with an open high-voltage circuit breaker. In this case, every impedance protection pickup can only be due to a fault in the protection zone of the block, as the power system is disconnected from the block. Consequently, the undelayed tripping zone can be extended to 100 % to 120 % of the protection zone without any loss of selectivity.
-
Page 148: Setting Hints
Functions polygon P/SPOL and the trip polygon TPOL, and the rate of change ∆Z/∆t are matched to one another in such a way that power swings are reliably detected and the desired impedance zone (Z1 or Z1 & Z2) of the impedance protection is blocked. The blocking remains effective until the measured impedance vector has left again the trip polygon / power swing polygon, the impedance changes faster than the change rate, or asymmetrical power conditions rule out the possibility of a power swing.
-
Page 149
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) The following relation allows to estimate the rate of change: dZ t ( ) dR t ( ) Xπf Xπf Ω ≈ ————- — ————— —————————- — ———————- — in — — δ πf æ ö 2sin 2sin — -… -
Page 150
Functions ⋅ 47 24 Ω —————————— — L min ⋅ ⋅ 3 1 1 )∆/t 43 20 Ω/20 ms 2160 Ω/s —— — – L min If safety factor 4 is chosen, dZ/dt should never be set higher than 500 Ω/s (or 100 Ω/s for 5 A transformers). -
Page 151: Settings Of The Impedance Protection
Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 2.17.3.2 Settings of the Impedance Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3301 IMPEDANCE Impedance Protection PROT. Block relay for trip com- mands 3302 IMP I> 0.10..20.00 A 1.35 A Fault Detection I> Pickup 3303 U<…
-
Page 152
Functions F.No. Alarm Comments 03967 Imp. Fault L1 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L1 03968 Imp. Fault L2 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L2 03969 Imp. Fault L3 Imp.: Fault detection , phase L3 03977 Imp.Z1< TRIP Imp.: Z1< TRIP 03978 Imp.Z1B<… -
Page 153: Out-Of-Step Protection (Ansi 78)
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 2.18 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) General In extensive high-voltage networks, short-circuits which are not disconnected quickly enough, or disconnection of coupling links which may result in an increasing of the coupling reactance, may lead to system swings. These consist of power swings which endanger the stability of the power transmission.
-
Page 154
Functions The current I is independent of the location of the measurement: – I(m) ——————— — The voltage U at the location of measurement m is: ⋅ ⋅ U(m) – Thus results with: j δ j δ ⋅ ⋅ δ δ… -
Page 155: Out-Of-Step Logic
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Im(Z) δ =0° ——— — = 0.8 ——— — (1–m)Z δ =180° (0.5–m)Z ϕ Re(Z) ——— — = 1.0 δ =180° –mZ = 1.3 ——— — δ =0° ——— — = 1.2 Figure 2-66 Impedances at the Measurement Location m 2.18.1.2 Out-of-Step Logic Figure 2-67 shows, more detailed, the power swing detection characteristic.
-
Page 156
Functions Im(Z) Œ –Z Characteristic 2 Z=R +jX Characteristic 1 ϕ Re(Z Ž Figure 2-67 Polygonal Out-of-Step Characteristic and Typical Power Swing Occurrences An out-of-step condition requires, additionally, that the impedance vector enters a power swing characteristic at one side and leaves it at the other side (loss of synchronism, cases Œ… -
Page 157
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Figure 2-68 shows the logic diagram of the out-of-step protection. The feature has two stages and can be blocked by a binary input. 3512 T-SIGNAL FNo. 05067 O/S char. 1 3511 T-HOLDING FNo. 05069 Release O/S det. char.1 Reset FNo. -
Page 158: Setting Hints
Functions 2.18.2 Setting Hints General The out-of-step protection is only effective and accessible if this function has been set during the configuration of the protective functions (Section 2.2, address 0135, OUT- OF-STEP = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 3501 OUT-OF-STEP is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay).
-
Page 159
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) ‘ can be calculated from the per unit reactance x ‘ as follows: ü N, Gen ⋅ ⋅ —————————- — x —— — ⋅ ü N, Gen where X – Transient reactance of the machine – Transient per unit reactance –… -
Page 160
Functions The setting Z is decisive for the width of the power swing polygon. This setting value 3504 Za is determined by the total impedance Z and can be derived from the equation in Figure 2-70. Z can be calculated from the sum of Z and Z ;… -
Page 161
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) The inclination angle ϕ of the power swing polygon can be set at address 3508 PHI POLYGON and thus matched to the conditions. Calculation Example: Generator data: ‘ = 0.20 = 6.3 kV = 483 A Transformer data: = 7 % = 5.3 MVA… -
Page 162: Settings Of The Out-Of-Step Protection
Functions Address 3509 REP. CHAR. 1 determines the number of out-of-step periods for Number of Power Swings characteristic 1 which will lead to trip, i.e.the number of times this characteristic must have been passed through. For characteristic 1, 1 or 2 passes are normally adequate as out-of-step conditions with the electrical centre within the power station unit should not be tolerated too long, and the power swing frequency tends to accelerate during an out-of-step condition, so that the electrical and dynamic stress of the machine…
-
Page 163: Information For The Out-Of-Step Protection
Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3510 REP. CHAR. 2 1..8 Number of Power Swing: Cha- racteristic 2 3511 T-HOLDING 0.20..60.00 sec 20.00 sec Holding Time of Fault Detection 3512 T-SIGNAL 0.02..0.15 sec 0.05 sec Min.
-
Page 164: Undervoltage Protection (Ansi 27)
Functions 2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) General Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause an asymmetrical voltage collapse. Compared with three monophase measuring systems, the detection of the positive phase-sequence system is not influenced by these procedures and is advantageous especially with regard to the judgement of stability problems.
-
Page 165: Setting Hints
Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) FNo. 06533 U< picked up 4002 U< 4003 T U< & Tripping FNo. 06539 matrix FNo. 06506 U< TRIP >BLOCK U< FNo. 06537 U<< picked up 4004 U<< 4005 T U<< & TMin TRIP CMD FNo. 06540 FNo.
-
Page 166: Settings Of The Undervoltage Protection
Functions 2.19.2.1 Settings of the Undervoltage Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4001 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage Protection Block relay for trip com- mands 4002 U< 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V U< Pickup 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 4003 T U< 3.00 sec T U<…
-
Page 167: Overvoltage Protection (Ansi 59)
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 2.20 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) General Overvoltage protection serves to protect the electrical machine, and the associated electrical plant connected to it, from the effects of impermissible voltage increases. Overvoltages can be caused by incorrect manual operation of the excitation system, faulty operation of the automatic voltage regulator, (full) load shedding of a generator, separation of the generator from the system or during island operation.
-
Page 168: Settings Of The Overvoltage Protection
Functions Address 4107A VALUES U> serves to specify the measured quantities used by the Setting Values protection feature. The default setting (normal case) is specified for phase-to-phase voltages (= U-ph-ph). The phase-earth-voltages should be selected for low-voltage machines with grounded neutral conductor (= U-ph-e). It should be noted that even if phase-earth voltages are selected as measured quantities, the setting values of the protection functions are referred to phase-to-phase voltages.
-
Page 169
Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) F.No. Alarm Comments 06516 >BLOCK U> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U> 06517 >BLOCK U>> >BLOCK overvoltage protection U>> 06565 Overvolt. OFF Overvoltage protection switched OFF 06566 Overvolt. BLK Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED 06567 Overvolt. ACT Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE 06568 U>… -
Page 170: Frequency Protection (Ansi 81)
Functions 2.21 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) General The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the system. If the frequency lies outside the allowable range, appropriate actions are initiated, such as separating a generator from the system. A decrease in system frequency occurs when the system experiences an increase in the real power demand, or when a malfunction occurs with a generator governor or automatic generation control (AGC) system.
-
Page 171: Setting Hints
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Figure 2-73 shows the logic diagram for the frequency protection function. f1 picked up FNo. 05232… >BLOCK f1 FNo. 05206… & 4202 f1 PICKUP 4204 T f1 f1 TRIP FNo. 05236… 4215 Umin U>Umin Measurement/ Logic FNo.
-
Page 172
Functions If underfrequency protection is used for load shedding purposes, then the frequency settings relative to other feeder relays are generally based on the priority of the customers served by the protective relay. Normally a graded load shedding is required that takes into account the importance of the consumers or consumer groups. -
Page 173: Settings For The Frequency Protection
Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 2.21.2.1 Settings for the Frequency Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4201 O/U FREQUENCY Over / Under Frequency Protec- tion Block relay for trip com- mands 4202 f1 PICKUP 40.00..65.00 Hz 48.00 Hz f1 Pickup 4203 f1 PICKUP…
-
Page 174
Functions F.No. Alarm Comments 05233 f2 picked up f2 picked up 05234 f3 picked up f3 picked up 05235 f4 picked up f4 picked up 05236 f1 TRIP f1 TRIP 05237 f2 TRIP f2 TRIP 05238 f3 TRIP f3 TRIP 05239 f4 TRIP f4 TRIP 7UM62 Manual… -
Page 175: Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (Ansi 24)
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 2.22 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) General The overexcitation protection is used to detect impermissible overexcitation conditions which can endanger generators and transformers. The overexcitation protection must pick up when the induction admissible for the protected object (e.g. power station unit transformer) is exceeded.
-
Page 176
Functions The thermal characteristic is prespecified by 8 value pairs concerning the U/f overexcitation (related to nominal values) and the t trip time. In most cases, the specified characteristic related to standard transformers provides for sufficient protection. If this characteristic does not correspond to the actual thermal behavior of the object to be protected, each desired characteristic can be implemented by entering customer-specific trip times for the specified U/f overexcitation values. -
Page 177: Setting Hints
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Figure 2-75 illustrates the logic diagram of the overexcitation protection. The counter can be reset to zero by means of a blocking input or a reset input. FNo. 05370 U/f> picked up 4302 U/f > 4303 T U/f >…
-
Page 178
Figure 2-76 Tripping Time Characteristic of the Overexcitation Protection – Presettings The characteristic of a Siemens standard transformer was selected as a presetting for the parameters 4306 to 4313. If the manufacturer of the object to be protected did not include any instructions on this subject, the preset standard characteristic should be used. -
Page 179: Settings Of The Overexcitation Protection
Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Voltage A perhaps existing deviation between the primary nominal voltage of the voltage Transformer transformers and the object to be protected is compensated by means of the internal Adaptation correction factor (U ). As a prerequisite, however, the incoming power N prim N mach system parameters 0221 Unom PRIMARY and 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR must have…
-
Page 180: Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (Ansi 27)
Functions 2.23 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) General The inverse-time undervoltage protection mainly protects consumers (induction machines) from the consequences of dangerous voltage drops in island networks and prevents impermissible operating conditions and possible loss of stability. It can also be used as a criterion for load shedding in interconnected networks.
-
Page 181: Setting Hints
Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) The pickup/dropout ratio is 101 % or 0.5 V absolute of the threshold set at address 4402 Up< PICKUP. The integral action of the tripping time determination is “frozen“ between the pickup and the dropout value. Figure 2-77 shows the logic diagram of the inverse undervoltage protection.
-
Page 182: Settings Of The Inverse Undervoltage Protection
Functions 2.23.2.1 Settings of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4401 INV. UNDERVOLT. Inverse Undervoltage Protec- tion Up< Block relay for trip com- mands 4402 Up< PICKUP 10.0..125.0 V 75.0 V Up< Pickup 4403 T MUL 0.10..5.00 sec;…
-
Page 183: Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection Df/Dt (Ansi 81R)
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.24 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) General With the rate-of-frequency-change protection, frequency changes can be quickly de- tected. This allows a prompt response to frequency dips or frequency rises. A trip com- mand can be issued even before the pickup threshold of the frequency protection (see Section 2.21) is reached.
-
Page 184: Setting Hints
Functions 5516 df1/dt pickup 5517 df2/dt pickup 5518 df3/dt pickup & «1» 5519 df4/dt pickup 4505 df1/dt & f1 5520 5232 df1/dt TRIP f1 picked up 5521 df2/dt TRIP -df/dt< 5522 df3/dt TRIP +df/dt> «1» 5523 df4/dt TRIP 4504 T df1/dt 4502 df1/dt >/<…
-
Page 185
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) The following relations can be used as an example for estimation of the pickup value. They apply for the change rate at the beginning of a frequency change (approx. 1 sec- ond). ∆P ⋅ —- — ——— — ——- — –… -
Page 186: Settings Of The Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection
Functions Table 2-12 Setting Value df/dt HYSTERESIS dfx/dt M WINDOW stage dfn/dt (Addr. 4519A, 4521A) (Addr. 4520A, 4522A) ≈ 0,05 0.1…0.5 Hz/s 25…10 ≈ 0,1 0.5…1 Hz/s 10…5 ≈ 0,2 1…5 Hz/s 10…5 ≈ 0,5 5…20 Hz/s 5…1 Address 4518 U MIN is used to set the minimum voltage below which the frequency Minimum Voltage change protection will be blocked.
-
Page 187: Information For The Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4509 df2/dt & f2 AND logic with pickup of stage f2 4510 df3/dt >/< -df/dt< negative rate of freq. -df/dt< negative Mode of Threshold (df3/dt >/<) change rate of freq.
-
Page 188: Jump Of Voltage Vector
Functions 2.25 Jump of Voltage Vector General It is not uncommon that consumers with their own generating plant feed power directly into a network. The incoming feeder is usually the ownership boundary between the utility and these consumers/producers. A failure of the input line, e.g. because of a three-pole automatic reclosure, can cause a deviation of the voltage or frequency at the feeding generator which is a function of the overall output.
-
Page 189: Functional Description
Jump of Voltage Vector 2.25.1 Functional Description Measuring The vector of the positive sequence system voltage is calculated from the phase-to- Principle earth voltages, and the phase angle change of the voltage vector is determined over a delta interval of 2 cycles. The presence of a phase angle jump is an indicator for an abrupt change of the current flow.
-
Page 190: Setting Hints
Functions The vector jump function becomes ineffective on leaving the permissible frequency band. The same is true for the voltage, for which the limiting parameters are U MIN and U MAX. On violation of the frequency or voltage band, the logic generates a logical “1”, and the reset input is continuously active.
-
Page 191: Settings Of The Vector Jump Detection
Jump of Voltage Vector The value to be set for the vector jump (address 4602 DELTA PHI) depends on the Pickup Values feeding and load conditions. Abrupt load changes in the active power cause a jump of the voltage vector. The value to be set must be specifically determined for the power system considered.
-
Page 192: Information For The Vector Jump Detection
Functions 2.25.2.2 Information for the Vector Jump Detection F.No. Alarm Comments 05581 >VEC JUMP block >BLOCK Vector Jump 05582 VEC JUMP OFF Vector Jump is switched OFF 05583 VEC JMP BLOCKED Vector Jump is BLOCKED 05584 VEC JUMP ACTIVE Vector Jump is ACTIVE 05585 VEC JUMP Range Vector Jump not in measurement range 05586 VEC JUMP pickup…
-
Page 193: Stator Earth Fault Protection (Ansi 59N, 64G, 67G)
90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 2.26 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) General The stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of three- phase machines. The machine can be operated in busbar connection (directly connected to the network) or in unit connection (via unit transformer).
-
Page 194
Functions 7UM62 – Loading resistor – Generator earth capacitance – Voltage divider – Line earth capacitance – Displacement voltage – Unit transformer earth capacitance – Coupling capacitance of unit transformer Figure 2-82 Unit Connected Generator with Neutral Earthing Transformer – Loading resistor –… -
Page 195
90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) L3 L2 L1 7UM62 Figure 2-84 Earth Fault Direction Detection with Busbar Connection Consequently, the loading resistor must be situated on the other side of the measurement location (current transformer, toroidal current transformer) when viewed from the machine. -
Page 196
Functions On the occurrence of earth fault in the machine zone, the disconnection of the machine is initiated after a set delay time. When the earth current is not decisive to detect an earth fault, e.g. because the circuit breaker is open, the earth current detection can be switched off by a control signal via a binary input of the relay. -
Page 197: Setting Hints
90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Determination of In addition to this, a supplementary function serves to determine the faulty phase. As the Faulty Phase the phase-earth-voltage in the faulty phase is less than in the two remaining phases and as the voltage even increases in the latter ones, the faulty phase can be determined by determining the smallest phase-earth voltage in order to generate a corresponding result as fault message.
-
Page 198
Functions For machines in unit connection, the pickup value has to be chosen such that displacements during network earth faults which are transferred via the coupling capacitances of the unit transformer to the stator circuit, do not lead to pickup. The damping effect of the loading resistor must also be considered in this case. -
Page 199: Settings Of The 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection
90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Voltage divider 500 V / 100 V Toroidal c.t. 60 A/1 A Protected zone 90 % With full neutral displacement voltage, the load resistor supplies: 500 V ————— — 50 A 10 Ω Referred to the 6.3 kV side, this results in: 500 3 ⁄…
-
Page 200: Information For The 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection
Functions 2.26.2.2 Information for the 90% Stator Earth Fault Protection F.No. Alarm Comments 05173 >S/E/F BLOCK >BLOCK stator earth fault protection 05176 >S/E/F Iee off >Switch off earth current detec.(S/E/F) 05181 S/E/F OFF Stator earth fault prot. is switch OFF 05182 S/E/F BLOCKED Stator earth fault protection is BLOCK.
-
Page 201: Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (Ansi 51Gn, 64R)
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.27 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.27.1 Functional Description General The highly sensitive earth fault protection has the task to detect earth fault in systems with isolated or high-impedance earthed star-point. The pick-up criterion is the magnitude of the (residual) earth current.
-
Page 202
Functions Figure 2-89 shows the logic diagram of sensitive earth fault detection. 3PP13 7UM62 7XR61 Figure 2-88 Application Example as Rotor Short Circuit to Earth Protection (7XR61 – series device for the rotor short circuit to earth protection; 3PP13 – from UPU > 150 V, resistors in the 7XR61 must be shorted!) FNo. -
Page 203: Setting Hints
Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.27.2 Setting Hints General The sensitive earth fault detection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during the configuration of the protective functions at address 0151 O/C PROT. Iee> = with Iee1 or with Iee2. If one of the options with current evaluation was selected during the configuration of the 90–%–stator earth fault protection (0150 S/ E/F PROT., see Section 2.2) the sensitive current measuring input of the 7UM62 is assigned to this feature.
-
Page 204: Settings Of The Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
Functions Use as Earth Short- For low-voltage machines with neutral conductor incorporated in cables or machines Circuit Protection with low-impedance earthed starpoint, the time-overcurrent protection of the phase branches already is a short-circuit to earth protection, as the short-circuit to earth current also flows through the faulty phase.
-
Page 205: Stator Earth Fault Protection With 3Rd Harmonics (Ansi 27/59Tn 3Rd Harm.)
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.28 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.28.1 Functional Description General As described in section 2.26, the measuring procedure based on the fundamental wave of the displacement voltage serves to protect maximally 90 % to 95 % of the stator winding.
-
Page 206
Functions 1. Ue connected to neutral transformer: Connection of the U input to the voltage transformer in the machine starpoint 2. Ue connected to broken delta winding: Connection of the U input to the broken delta winding 3. Not connected: Calculation of the displacement voltage by means of the three phase-earth-voltages, if the U input is not connected 4. -
Page 207: Setting Hints
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) FNo. 05567 5202 U0 3.HARM< U(3.H.) SEF 3H pick.up neutral transformer 5204 T SEF 3. HARM. Tripping matrix & 5203 U0 3.HARM> FNo. 05568 SEF 3H TRIP not connected broken delta winding 5205 P min >…
-
Page 208: Settings Of The 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection With 3Rd Harmonics
Functions Pickup Value for Depending on the selection of the connection type, only one of the two setting parameters 5202 or 5203 is accessible. The setting values can only be determined 3rd Harmonics within the framework of a primary test. The following principle is generally valid: −…
-
Page 209: Information For The 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection With 3Rd Harmonics
100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.28.2.2 Information for the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics F.No. Alarm Comments 05553 >SEF 3H BLOCK >BLOCK SEF with 3.Harmonic 05561 SEF 3H OFF SEF with 3.Harm. is switched OFF 05562 SEF 3H BLOCK SEF with 3.Harm.
-
Page 210: Stator Earth Fault Protection With 20 Hz Voltage Injection (Ansi 64G — 100%)
Functions 2.29 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) General The 100-% stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of generators which are connected with the network via a unit transformer. This protec- tion function, which works with an injected 20 Hz voltage, is independent of the sys- tem-frequency displacement voltage appearing in earth faults, and detects earth faults in all windings including the machine starpoint.
-
Page 211
100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) The driving 20 Hz voltage is picked up directly at the loading resistor via a voltage di- vider. In addition, the 20 Hz current flow is measured via a miniature CT. Both quanti- ties (U and I ) are fed to the protection device. -
Page 212
Functions In addition to the determination of the earth resistance, the protection function features an earth current stage which processes the current r.m.s. value and thus takes into account all frequencies. It is used as a backup stage and covers approx. 80 to 90 % of the protection zone. -
Page 213: Setting Hints
100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 2.29.2 Setting Hints General The 100-% stator earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set to Enabled at address 0153 100% SEF-PROT. during the configuration of the protection functions.
-
Page 214
Functions The conversion factor of the earth resistance is set as FACTOR R SEF at address 0275 in Power System Data 1. The general formula for calculation (R ) is: Eprim Esec ü Divider ⋅ FACTOR R SEF ü ——————- — Transf ü… -
Page 215: Settings Of The 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) The parameter PHI I SEF (default setting 0°) of address 5309 is used to compen- Correction Angle, Contact Resistance sate the angle error of the CTs and angle distortions caused by a less than ideal earth- ing or neutral transformer.
-
Page 216: Information For The 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
Functions 2.29.2.2 Information for the 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection F.No. Alarm Comments 05473 >SEF100 BLOCK >BLOCK Stator earth fault protection 05476 >U20 failure >Failure 20Hz bias voltage (S/E/F) 05481 SEF100 OFF S/E/F 100% protection is switched OFF 05482 SEF100 BLOCKED Stator earth flt.
-
Page 217: Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, Fn (Ansi 64R)
Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 2.30 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) General Rotor earth fault protection is used to detect earth faults in the excitation circuit of synchronous machines. One earth fault in the rotor winding does not cause immediate damage;…
-
Page 218
Functions The rotor earth fault calculation calculates the complex earth impedance from the aux- iliary AC voltage U and the current I . The earth resistance R of the excitation circuit is then calculated from the earth impedance. The device also considers the cou- pling capacitance of the coupling unit C , the series (e.g. -
Page 219: Setting Hints
Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 2.30.2 Setting Hints General The rotor earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set during the configuration of the protective functions at address 0160 ROTOR E/F = Enabled. Set Disabled if the function is not required.
-
Page 220: Settings Of The Rotor Earth Fault Protection
Functions The series resistors R for the protection of the coupling capacitors can be considered with the total series resistance (address 6007) since the brush resistance and the series resistance are connected in series in the measurement circuit. The resultant resistance applies for R SERIES, i.e. the parallel connection in each case of the series resistors R and for the resistance of the two brushes.
-
Page 221: Information For The Rotor Earth Fault Protection
Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6006 X COUPLING -100..800 Ohm 398 Ohm Coupling Reactance 6007 R SERIES 0..999 Ohm 50 Ohm Series Resistance (e.g. Meas. Brushes) 6008 I RE< 1.0..50.0 mA;…
-
Page 222: Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection With 1 To 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (Ansi 64R — 1 To 3 Hz)
Functions 2.31 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) General The rotor earth fault protection has the task to detect high- or low-resistance earth faults in the excitation circuit of synchronous generators. Although an earth fault in the excitation winding does not cause immediate damage, a second earth fault will lead to a turn-to-turn fault in the excitation winding.
-
Page 223
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 7XR6003 7XR6004 7XT71 7UM62x : 0.5 Hz to 4.0 Hz Galvanic lg (t) isolation 40 k Ω Control (MU1) Control = 1/6 +/-50 V… -
Page 224
Functions 50 V 2 ⋅ U Displacement voltage U 50 V Meas ∞ 5 mA 5 mA Meas = 5 k Ω 2 ⋅ U 2 ⋅ I , with R << R 2 ⋅ I = 2 ⋅ I offset = Interference offset… -
Page 225
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) Test mode 100 kΩ 20 kΩ (Series resistor = R 6107 TEST RESISTOR 5411 & 2 Cir. open RE> &… -
Page 226
Functions 10 V 4-20 mA 20 mA «1» 295 TRANSDUCER 1 & 10 V 4-20 mA «1» 20 mA 296 TRANSDUCER 2 Edge detector 5401 T Edge Fail REF 1-3Hz & 6106 Qc < òdt 5395 T Interference & REF 1-3Hz open 10 s 6102 RE<… -
Page 227: Setting Hints
Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 2.31.2 Setting Hints General The sensitive rotor earth fault protection is only effective and accessible if it has been set to Enabled at address 0161 REF 1-3Hz during the configuration of the protection functions.
-
Page 228: Settings Of The Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection
Functions 2.31.2.1 Settings of the Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6101 REF 1-3Hz Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1- 3Hz) Block relay for trip com- mands 6102 RE< WARN 5.0..80.0 kOhm 40.0 kOhm Pickup Value of Warning Stage Re<…
-
Page 229: Motor Starting Time Supervision (Ansi 48)
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 2.32 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) General When the 7UM62 relay is used to protect a motor, the starting time monitoring feature supplements the overload protection described in Section 2.9 by protecting the motor against the potential damage that might result from frequent starting or extended starting durations.
-
Page 230
Functions Therefore, if the starting current I actually measured is smaller (or larger) than the entered at address START. CURRENT), the actual tripping nominal starting current I time t is lengthened (or shortened) accordingly (see also Figure 2-102). trip Definite-Time During motor starting, the definite time characteristic is designed to initiate a trip if the Overcurrent motor starting time exceeds the maximum allowable blocked rotor time t… -
Page 231: Setting Hints
Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 2.32.2 Setting Hints The motor starting time supervision is only effective and accessible if address 0165 General STARTUP MOTOR has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the protective functions. Set Disabled if the function is not required. Address 6501 STARTUP MOTOR is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay).
-
Page 232: Settings Of The Motor Starting Time Supervision
Functions æ ö StartCurr. ⋅ ——————— — è ø Trip Startmax Under nominal conditions, the tripping time is the maximum starting time T . For Startmax ratios deviating from nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes. At 80 % of nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80% of nominal starting current), the tripping time can be: æ…
-
Page 233: Restart Inhibit For Motors (Ansi 66, 49Rotor)
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 2.33 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) General The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its maximum allowable temperature during normal operation and even during severe loading conditions. However, during motor starting, the rotor can heat up quickly. If multiple starting attempts are made in a short duration of time, the rotor could suffer thermal damage.
-
Page 234
Functions Although the heat distribution at the rotor cage bars can range widely during motor starting, the different maximum temperatures in the rotor do not necessarily affect the motor restart inhibit (see Figure 2-104). It is much more important to establish a thermal profile, after a complete motor start, that is appropriate for the protection of the motor’s thermal condition. -
Page 235
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) Extending the In order to properly account for the reduced heat exchange when a self-ventilated Cooling Time motor is stopped, the cooling time constants can be increased relative to the time constants for a running machine by the factor Kt at STOP (address 6608). A stopped Constant motor is defined by current below an adjustable current flow monitoring threshold BkrClosed I MIN, assuming that the motor idle current is greater than this… -
Page 236: Setting Hints
Functions 6609 Kt at RUNNING τ kτ at Running x 6602 IStart/IMOTnom 6608 Kt at STOP 6603 T START MAX τ 6606 MAX.WARM STARTS kτ at Stop x 6607 #COLD-#WARM 6604 T EQUAL 0281 BkrClosed I MIN Θ (t) Calculator Θ…
-
Page 237
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) RESTART INHIBIT is used to switch the function ON or OFF, or to block only the trip command (Block Relay). Necessary The user communicates to the protective relay the characteristic motor values Characteristic supplied by the manufacturer, which are necessary for calculation of the rotor Values temperature. -
Page 238
Functions For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, a setting of. T EQUAL = 1 min has proven to be a good value. The value for the minimum inhibit time T MIN. INHIBIT depends of the requirements made by the motor manufacturer, or by the system conditions. It must in any case be higher than T EQUAL. -
Page 239: Settings Of The Restart Inhibit For Motors
Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) In Figure 2-107, the motor is also restarted twice in warm condition, but the pause between the restart attempts is longer than in the first example. After the second restart attempt, the motor is operated at 90 % nominal current. After the shutdown following the first starting attempt, the thermal profile is “frozen”.
-
Page 240: Information For The Motor Restart Inhibit
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6608 Kτ at STOP 1.0..100.0 Extension of Time Constant at Stop 6609 Kτ at RUNNING 1.0..100.0 Extension of Time Constant at Running 6610 T MIN. INHIBIT 0.2..120.0 min 6.0 min Minimum Restart Inhibit Time 2.33.2.2 Information for the Motor Restart Inhibit F.No.
-
Page 241: Breaker Failure Protection (Ansi 50Bf)
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.34 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.34.1 Functional Description General The breaker failure protection can be assigned to the current inputs of side 1 or side 2 during the configuration of the protective functions (see Section 2.2). The breaker failure protection function monitors the reaction of a circuit breaker to a trip signal.
-
Page 242
Functions The current criterion is fulfilled if at least one of the three phase currents exceeds a parameterized threshold value (CIRC. BR. I>). The dropout is performed if all three phase currents fall below 95 % of the pickup threshold value. If the binary input of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact is inactive, only the current criterion is effective and the breaker failure protection cannot become active with a tripping signal if the current is below the CIRC. -
Page 243: Setting Hints
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) Device-internal protective functions I >TRIP HW model of relays U>>TRIP BO 12 binary output (Relay R12), potential-free Masking f<TRIP FNo. 01442 (via CFC) >int. start B/F FNo. 01441 >ext.start2 B/F 7002 TRIP INTERN ”0” FNo. 01471 BrkFailure TRIP FNo.
-
Page 244: Settings For Breaker Failure Protection
Functions The pickup threshold 7003 CIRC. BR. I> setting of the current criterion refers to all three phases. The user must select a value ensuring that the function still picks up even for the lowest operating current to be expected. For this reason, the value should be set at least 10% below the minimum operating current.
-
Page 245: Information For The Breaker Failure Protection
Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.34.2.2 Information for the Breaker Failure Protection F.No. Alarm Comments 01403 >BLOCK BkrFail >BLOCK breaker failure 01422 >Break. Contact >Breaker contacts 01423 >ext.start1 B/F >ext. start 1 breaker failure prot. 01441 >ext.start2 B/F >ext. start 2 breaker failure prot. 01442 >int.
-
Page 246: Inadvertent Energization (Ansi 50, 27)
Functions 2.35 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) General The inadvertent energizing protection serves to limit damages by accidental connection of the standing or already started, but not yet synchronized generator by a fast actuation of the mains breaker. A connection to a standing machine corresponds to the connection to an inductivity.
-
Page 247: Setting Hints
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 7104 PICK UP T U1< no meas. quant. 7105 DROP OUT T U1< (operational condition 0) FNo. 05546 I.En. release 7103 RELEASE U1< & FNo. 05547 I.En. picked up Fuse Failure Tripping matrix & 7102 I STAGE FNo.
-
Page 248: Settings Of The Inadvertent Energizing Protection
Functions Figure 2-112 illustrates the course of events during an unwanted connection in case of a machine standstill and, contrary to this, during a voltage collapse in case of a short circuit close to generator terminals. Start T U1 Pickup <…
-
Page 249
Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) F.No. Alarm Comments 05543 I.En. ACTIVE Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE 05546 I.En. release Release of the current stage 05547 I.En. picked up Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up 05548 I.En. TRIP Inadvert. Energ. prot.: TRIP 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 250: Dc Voltage/Dc Current Protection (Ansi 59Ndc/51Ndc)
Functions 2.36 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) General To detect DC voltages, DC currents and small AC quantities, the 7UM62 is equipped with a measuring transducer input (TD1) that can be used either for voltages (± 10 V) or currents (± 20 mA). Higher DC voltages are connected via an external voltage divider.
-
Page 251
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) Earth Fault If an earth fault occurs in the startup converter circuit, a current flows through all Detection in the earthed parts of the system because of the DC voltage. As earthing and neutral Startup Converter transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than voltage transformers, the thermal load is the highest on them. -
Page 252: Setting Hints
Functions 7204 U DC >< FNo. 05306 7205 I DC >< DC Prot.pick.up 7202 MEAS.METHOD 7203 DC >/< FNo. 05307 DC Prot. TRIP 7206 T DC mean mean value absolute Tripping Mean formation value & matrix or . U∼ I∼ r.m.s.
-
Page 253
DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) The DC voltage/DC current protection can be set to operate for overvoltage or undervoltage (address 7203 DC >/<). Depending on the whether current or voltage input has been set at address 0295 Pickup Thresholds TRANSDUCER 1, one of the following parameters is available, whereas the other is masked out: −… -
Page 254: Settings Of The Dc Voltage Protection
Functions 2.36.2.1 Settings of the DC Voltage Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7201 DC PROTECTION DC Voltage/Current Protection Block relay for trip com- mands 7202 MEAS.METHOD Mean Value Mean Value Measurement Method (MEAN/ Root Mean Square RMS Values) 7203 DC >/<…
-
Page 255: Analog Outputs
Analog Outputs 2.37 Analog Outputs 2.37.1 Functional Description Depending on the variant ordered, the 7UM62 machine protection can have up to four analog outputs (plug-in modules on ports B and D). The values to be transmitted via these interfaces have been specified during the configuration of the scope of protection functions (see Section 2.2).
-
Page 256: Settings Of The Analog Outputs
Functions For analog output B1 at location”B” (port B1): At address 7301 20 mA (B1) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA, At address 7302 MIN VALUE (B1) the smallest valid value. For analog output B2 at location”B” (port B2): At address 7303 20 mA (B2) = the percent value to be displayed at 20 mA, At address 7304 MIN VALUE (B2) the smallest valid value.
-
Page 257: Measured Value Monitoring Functions
Measured Value Monitoring Functions 2.38 Measured Value Monitoring Functions The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities — both for hardware and software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated into the monitoring.
-
Page 258
Functions Measured Value In the current path, there are three input transformers each on side 1 and side 2; the Acquisition — digitized sum of the outputs of these on one side must be almost zero for generators Currents with isolated starpoint and earth-fault-free operation. A current circuit fault is detected | >… -
Page 259: Software Monitoring
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Note: Voltage sum (phase-earth) monitoring is only operative if an externally formed displacement voltage s connected to the residual voltage input of the relay and if this was communicated to the device via the parameter 0223 UE CONNECTION. Voltage sum (phase-earth) monitoring can operate properly only if the matching factor Uph / Udelta at address 0225A has been correctly configured (see Section 2.3.2).
-
Page 260
Functions Current Symmetry The currents fed in at the current inputs of side 1 and side 2 are monitored for symmetry. During normal system operation (i.e. the absence of a short-circuit fault), symmetry among the input currents is expected. This symmetry is checked by the device, using a quantity monitor. -
Page 261: Fuse Failure Monitoring
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Slope: BAL. FACTOR U BALANCE I LIMIT Figure 2-119 Voltage Symmetry Monitoring Current and To detect swapped phase connections in the voltage and current input circuits, the Voltage Phase phase sequence of the phase-to-phase measured voltages and the phase currents Sequence are checked by the monitoring.
-
Page 262
Functions If fuses are used instead of a secondary miniature circuit breaker with connected auxiliary contacts, then the fuse failure monitoring can detect problems in the voltage transformer secondary circuit. Of course, supervision of the miniature circuit breaker and the fuse failure monitor can be used at the same time. This function uses the current of side 2. -
Page 263: Malfunction Responses Of The Monitoring Functions
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Figure 2-120 illustrates the logic diagram of the measuring voltage failure detection feature. Voltage at U Input Depending on how U is connected, it may be necessary to block the voltage mea- surement of this input. A blocking can be generated with the CFC tool and linked by the annunciation “Fuse Failure“.
-
Page 264
Functions Table 2-13 Overview of Error Reactions by the Protection Relay Monitoring Possible Cause Reaction Annunciation Output Supply voltage failure External (power supply) Relay goes out of service all LEDs go dark ) drops internal (converter) Internal supply- Internal (converter) or Relay goes out of service ”ERROR”… -
Page 265: Setting Hints
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Table 2-13 Overview of Error Reactions by the Protection Relay Monitoring Possible Cause Reaction Annunciation Output ”Fail. Isym 2” Current symmetry External (power system or Annunciation as masked Side 2 current transformer) (FNo. 000572) Voltage sum Internal (measured value Annunciation ”Fail S U Ph-E”…
-
Page 266: Settings
Functions Address 8108 SUM.thres. U determines the voltage threshold above which the summation voltage monitoring picks (see Figure 2-117) (absolute component, referred only to U ). The relative component for pickup of the summation voltage monitoring (Figure 2-117) is set at address 8109 SUM.Fact. U. Note: In the power system data 1, the voltage earth path and its matching factor Uph / Udelta have been specified.
-
Page 267: Information Of The Monitoring Functions
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8109 SUM.Fact. U 0.60..0.95; 0 0.75 Factor for Volt. Sum. Monitoring ΣI THRESHOLD S1 0.05..2.00 A 8110 0.10 A Summated Cur. Mon. Threshold on Side 1 ΣI FACTOR S1 8111 0.00..0.95 0.10…
-
Page 268: Sum Events Of The Monitoring Functions
Functions F.No. Alarm Comments 00194 Error neutralCT Error: Neutral CT different from MLFB 00212 Err. TD1 jumper Err: TD1 jumper different from setting 00213 Err. TD2 jumper Err: TD2 jumper different from setting 00214 Err. TD3 jumper Err: TD3 jumper different from setting 00191 Error Offset Error: Offset 00264 Fail: RTD-Box 1…
-
Page 269
Measured Value Monitoring Functions Table 2-14 Sum Events Sum events Content Designation Designation Meaning 0210 Err1A/ 5AwrongS1 0211 Err1A/ 5AwrongS2 0194 Error neutralCT 0212 Err. TD1 Jumper 0213 Err. TD2 Jumper 0181 Failure measured val. 0214 Err. TD3 Jumper 0140 Alarm sum event (Live status contace drops out/ 0190 Error BG0 = C–CPU–2… -
Page 270: Trip Circuit Supervision
Functions 2.39 Trip Circuit Supervision 2.39.1 Functional Description The Multifunctional Protection 7UM62 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit monitor. Depending on the number of available binary inputs, monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be selected. If the configuration of the binary inputs needed for this does not match the selected monitoring type, then a message to this effect (”TripC ProgFail”) is sent.
-
Page 271
Trip Circuit Supervision Table 2-15 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, depending on RTC and CB Position Trip Contact Circuit AuxCont 1 AuxCont 2 BI 1 BI 2 Breaker Open CLOSED Closed Open Open OPEN Open Closed Closed Closed CLOSED Open Closed OPEN Open… -
Page 272
Functions Depending on the conditions of the trip contact and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are activated (logical condition ”H” in Table 2-16), or not activated (logical condition ”L”). Table 2-16 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, Depending on RTC and CB Position Trip Contact Circuit AuxCont 1… -
Page 273
Trip Circuit Supervision 7UM62 FNo. 06852 >TripC trip rel 7UM62 Legend: — Relay trip contact — Circuit breaker — Circuit breaker trip coil AuxCont1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NO contact) AuxCont2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (NC contact) — Equivalent resistor AuxCont 2 —… -
Page 274: Setting Hints
Functions 0182 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled with 2 Bin. Inp. ”1” with 1 Bin. Inp. & FNo. 06864 FNo. & TripC ProgFail 06852 Configured >TripC trip rel & FNo. 06853 Configured >TripC brk rel. FNo. 06861 TripC OFF 8201 TRIP Cir. SUP. FNo.
-
Page 275
Trip Circuit Supervision contact (AuxCont2), to facilitate the detection of a malfunction when the circuit breaker auxiliary contact (AuxCont1) open and the trip contact has dropped out (see Figure 2- 124). This resistor must be sized such that the circuit breaker trip coil is no longer energized when the circuit breaker is open (which means AuxCont1 is open and AuxCont2 is closed). -
Page 276: Settings For The Trip Circuit Supervision
Functions æ 110 V 19 V ö – 500 Ω ——————————— — 50.1 kΩ – è ø 1.8 mA æ 110 V 2 V ö – 500 Ω ⋅ —————————— — 27 kΩ è ø ——————————- — 38.6 kΩ The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is: æ…
-
Page 277: Threshold Supervision
Threshold Supervision 2.40 Threshold Supervision General This function monitors the thresholds of selected measured values, checking whether the values exceed or drop below these thresholds. The processing speed of this func- tion is so high that it can be used for protection applications. The necessary logical can be implemented by means of CFC.
-
Page 278
Functions Table 2-17 Measured Values Measured Value Scaling Comments ⋅ 100 % I0/I The zero sequence current is determined from N,S2,sec (Zero sequence the phase currents on the basis of the definition (normalized with addr. 212) current system equation for symmetrical components. The side 2) calculation is perfomed once per cycle. -
Page 279: Setting Hints
Threshold Supervision Disabled Delta Pa 8502 THRESHOLD MV1> 7960 Meas. Value1> 8501 MEAS. VALUE 1> Disabled Delta Pa 8512 THRESHOLD MV6< 7965 Meas. Value6< 8511 MEAS. VALUE 6< Figure 2-127 Logic Diagram of the Threshold Supervision The figure shows that the measured values can be freely allocated to the threshold supervision blocks.
-
Page 280: Settings Of The Threshold Supervision
Functions The measured values for power P, Q and ∆P, as well as the phase angle, can be either positive or negative. Where the monitoring is for a negative threshold value, the num- ber line definition applies (–10 is smaller than –5). Example: The measured quantity P (active power) is allocated to MV1>…
-
Page 281
Threshold Supervision Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8503 MEAS. VALUE 2< Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold Active Power P MV2< Reactive Power Q Change of Active Power Delta P Positive Sequence Voltage Negative Sequence Voltage Zero Sequence Current I0 Positive Sequence Current Negative Sequence Current Power Angle PHI… -
Page 282: Information For The Threshold Supervision
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8509 MEAS. VALUE 5> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold Active Power P MV5> Reactive Power Q Change of Active Power Delta P Positive Sequence Voltage Negative Sequence Voltage Zero Sequence Current I0 Positive Sequence Current Negative Sequence Current Power Angle PHI…
-
Page 283: External Trip Coupling
External Trip Coupling 2.41 External Trip Coupling 2.41.1 Functional Description Up to four desired signal from external protection or supervision units can be incorporated into the processing of 7UM62. The signals are coupled as ”External signal” via binary inputs. Like the internal protection and supervision signals, they can be annunciated, time delayed, transmitted to the trip matrix, and blocked.
-
Page 284: Settings
Functions 2.41.2.1 Settings Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 External Trip Function 1 Block relay for trip com- mands 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 8602 T DELAY 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay 8701 EXTERN TRIP 2 External Trip Function 2 Block relay for trip com- mands…
-
Page 285
External Trip Coupling F.No. Alarm Comments 04571 Ext 3 OFF External trip 3 is switched OFF 04572 Ext 3 BLOCKED External trip 3 is BLOCKED 04573 Ext 3 ACTIVE External trip 3 is ACTIVE 04576 Ext 3 picked up External trip 3: General picked up 04577 Ext 3 Gen.TRP External trip 3: General TRIP 04583 >BLOCK Ext 4… -
Page 286: Temperature Detection By Thermoboxes
Functions 2.42 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Up to 2 thermoboxes with a total of 12 measuring points can be used for temperature detection and evaluated by the protection device. They are particularly useful for mon- itoring the thermal condition of motors, generators and transformers. In rotating ma- chines, they also check the bearing temperatures for violation of limit values.
-
Page 287: Setting Hints
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 9011A RTD 1 TYPE 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 Temperature Non-linear- RTD 1 St.1 p.up calculation ized values 14112 FNo. 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD 1 St.2 p.up 14113 FNo. Monitoring Fail: RTD 1 14111 FNo.
-
Page 288
Functions The location RTD1 is communicated to the device at address 9012A RTD 1 LOCA- TION. Setting options are Oil, Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other. This set- ® ting is only possible with DIGSI 4 under “Advanced Parameters”. You can also set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depending on the temperature unit selected in the power system data (Section 2.3 at address 0276 TEMP. -
Page 289: Settings Of The Temperature Detection Function
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 2.42.2.1 Settings of the Temperature Detection Function Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9011A RTD 1 TYPE not connected Pt 100 Ohm RTD 1: Type Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm 9012A RTD 1 LOCATION Winding…
-
Page 290
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments -50..250 °C; ∞ 120 °C 9035 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 248 °F 9036 RTD 3 STAGE 2 RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9041A RTD 4 TYPE… -
Page 291
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C 9063 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F 9064 RTD 6 STAGE 1 RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -50..250 °C;… -
Page 292
Functions Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9092A RTD 9 LOCATION Other RTD 9: Location Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C 9093 RTD 9 STAGE 1 RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F 9094 RTD 9 STAGE 1… -
Page 293: Information For The Temperature Detection Function
Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9121A RTD12 TYPE not connected not connected RTD12: Type Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm 9122A RTD12 LOCATION Other RTD12: Location Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 °C;…
-
Page 294
Functions F.No. Alarm Comments 14172 RTD 7 St.1 p.up RTD 7 Temperature stage 1 picked up 14173 RTD 7 St.2 p.up RTD 7 Temperature stage 2 picked up 14181 Fail: RTD 8 Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) 14182 RTD 8 St.1 p.up RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up 14183 RTD 8 St.2 p.up RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up… -
Page 295: Inversion Of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal)
Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal) 2.43 Inversion of Phase Sequence (Phase Sequence Reversal) 2.43.1 Functional Description General A phase rotation feature via binary input and parameter is implemented in the 7UM62, thus ensuring that all protective and monitoring functions operate correctly when the phase rotation is reversed.
-
Page 296: Setting Hint
Functions Influence on The swapping of phases directly impacts the calculation of positive and negative Protective sequence quantities, as well as phase-to-phase voltages via the subtraction of one Functions phase-to-ground voltage from another. Therefore, this function is vital so that phase detection messages, fault values, and operating measurement values are not falsified.
-
Page 297: Protection Function Logic
Protection Function Logic 2.44 Protection Function Logic The function logic is the heart of the device. It coordinates the sequence of both the protective and auxiliary functions, processes functional decisions, and processes data received from the system. In particular, the function logic is responsible for the following: •…
-
Page 298: Processing Tripping Logic
Functions 2.44.2 Processing Tripping Logic 2.44.2.1 Functional Description General trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by ”OR” and generate a message ”General TRIP” indicating that the device has initiated a trip signal. This annunciation, like individual trip indications, can be allocated to an LED or an output relay.
-
Page 299: Settings For The Tripping Logic
Protection Function Logic that can initiate trip signals, as well as for trip signals that are initiated using the device function controller. Addr. Parameter Setting Default Settings Comment 0280 TMin TRIP CMD. 0.01 .. 32.00 s 0.15 s Minimum duration of the trip command 2.44.3 Fault Display on the LEDs/LCD 2.44.3.1 Principle of Function…
-
Page 300: Statistical Counters
Functions 2.44.4 Statistical Counters 2.44.4.1 Functional Description Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the 7UM62 is counted, as long as the position of the circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs. To use this function, the internal pulse counter ”Trip Count”…
-
Page 301: Information For The Statistical Counter
Protection Function Logic 2.44.4.3 Information for the Statistical Counter F.No. Alarm Comments 00003 >Time Synch >Synchronize Internal Real Time Clock 00005 >Reset LED >Reset LED 00060 Reset LED Reset LED 00015 >Test mode >Test mode Test mode Test mode 00016 >DataStop >Stop data transmission DataStop Stop data transmission…
-
Page 302: Auxiliary Functions
Functions 2.45 Auxiliary Functions The auxiliary functions of the 7UM62 relay include: • processing of messages, • processing of operational measured values, • storage of fault record data. • Commissioning aids. 2.45.1 Processing of Messages After the occurrence of a system fault, data regarding the response of the protective relay and the measured quantities should be saved for future analysis.
-
Page 303: Operational Annunciations
Auxiliary Functions annunciations have been acknowledged, the initial display is shown again. Acknowledgement can be performed by pressing the LED button on the front panel. The relay is also equipped with several event buffers, for operational messages, circuit breaker statistics, etc., which are protected against loss of the auxiliary voltage by a buffer battery.
-
Page 304: General Interrogation
Functions U0> picked up Protective Function that picked up first; S/E/F TRIP Protective Function that dropped out last; PU Time 440ms Running time from general pickup to dropout; TRIP Time 301ms Running time from general pickup to the first trip command Figure 2-133 Display of Spontaneous Messages on the Device Front Retrieved The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved.
-
Page 305: Measurements
Auxiliary Functions 2.45.2 Measurements Display of A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly Measured Values available for call up on site, or for data transfer (See Table 2-19, as well as the following list). The operational measured values listed in Table 2-19 can be read out as secondary, primary or percent values.
-
Page 306
Functions Table 2-19 Conversion Formulae between Secondary Values and Primary/Percentage Values Measured Val. Secondary Primary measured: E sec. E prim. ⋅ ⋅ FACTOR UE ——————————————————————— — 100 U E sec ⁄ UN–GEN PRIMARY calculated: UN – VT PRIMARY ⋅ ————————————————————- — U E sec UN –… -
Page 307
Auxiliary Functions where Parameter Address Parameter Address Unom PRIMARY 0221 0205 FACTOR IEE1 Unom SECONDARY 0222 0213 FACTOR IEE2 IN-PRI I-SIDE1 0202 0224 FACTOR UE IN-SEC I-SIDE1 0203 0251 UN GEN/MOTOR IN-PRI I-SIDE2 0211 0252 SN GEN/MOTOR IN-SEC I-SIDE2 0212 0225A Uph / Udelta UN-PRI SIDE 1… -
Page 308: Oscillographic Fault Recording (Waveform Capture)
Functions − U/f th. Overtemperature caused by an overexcitation, in % of the tripping overtemperature, − Coolant temperature (or ambient temperature) In addition, the following may be available: − Minimum and maximum values for the positive-sequence components I Min/Max Values and U the active power P, reactive power Q, in primary values, of the frequency and of the 3rd harmonic content in the displacement voltage, in secondary values U…
-
Page 309: Date And Time Stamping
Auxiliary Functions and u L1 S1 L2 S1 L3 S1 L1 S2 L2 S2 L3 S2 or i of the three measuring transducers are sampled at intervals of 1.25 ms (for 50 Hz) or 1.04 ms (for 60 Hz), and stored in a circulating buffer (16 samples per cycle).
-
Page 310: Commissioning Aids
Functions Here you may select the time standard for internal time stamping by selecting from the following modes: Operating Mode Explanations Internal Internal synchronization using RTC (pre-set) IEC 60870–5–103 External synchronization using the system interface and the IEC 60870–5–103 protocol PROFIBUS DP External synchronization using PROFIBUS interface IRIG B Time signal External synchronization using IRIG B…
-
Page 311: Testing The States Of The Binary Inputs/Outputs
Auxiliary Functions A dialog box displays the texts of all annunciations that have been masked to the system interface in the matrix. In another column of the dialog box you can specify a value for the annunciations that you want to test (e.g. coming/ going) to generate an annunciation as soon as you have entered password no.
-
Page 312: Settings For Oscillographic Fault Recording
Functions SETTINGS menu. Waveform capture makes a distinction between the trigger for an oscillographic record and the criterion to save the record (address 0401 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). Normally the trigger is the pickup of a protective element, i.e. when a protective element picks up the time is 0. The criterion for saving can be the pickup as well (Save w.
-
Page 313: Information For Minimum And Maximum Values
Auxiliary Functions F.No. Alarm Comments 00203 Wave. deleted Waveform data deleted FltRecSta Fault Recording Start 2.45.6.3 Information for Minimum and Maximum Values F.No. Alarm Comments 00396 >I1 MiMaReset >I1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset 00399 >U1 MiMa Reset >U1 MIN/MAX Buffer Reset 00400 >P MiMa Reset >P MIN/MAX Buffer Reset 00402 >Q MiMa Reset…
-
Page 314: Breaker Control
Functions 2.46 Breaker Control General In addition to the protective functions described thus far, a control command process ® is integrated in the SIPROTEC 7UM62 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four command sources: −…
-
Page 315: Types Of Commands
Breaker Control ® Operation using Control commands for switchgear can also be entered in DIGSI 4 with a PC that is ® DIGSI connected to the operator interface. The procedure to do so is described in the ® SIPROTEC 4 System Manual (Control of Switchgear). Operation using the Control commands for switchgear can also be entered through the serial SCADA SCADA Interface…
-
Page 316: Interlocking
Functions • Command Entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device) Check Sequence − Check password → Access rights − Check Switching Mode (interlocking activated/deactivated→ Selection of Deactivated Interlocking Recognition • User configurable Interlocking checks −…
-
Page 317: Interlocked / Non-Interlocked Switching
Breaker Control The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific commands object properties box for the specific control device. For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode) can be selected: −…
-
Page 318
Functions EVENT LOG ——————— 19.06.01 11:52:05,625 CO+ close 19.06.01 11:52:06,134 FB+ close Figure 2-134 Example of an Operational Annunciation for Switching Circuit Breaker Q0 Standard The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each Interlocking controllable device. -
Page 319
Breaker Control Switching Authority Switching Mode Device with source of command = ON/OFF LOCAL Local & REMOTE & Local DIGSI AUTO & & Rem. Switching Authority (LOCAL/REMOTE) DIGSI & DIGSI Switch Authority DIGSI: Rem. & Switch mode LOCAL: Non-interlocked (interlocked/non-interl.) SCHED. -
Page 320
Functions ® Figure 2-136 DIGSI 4 Dialog Box for Setting the Interlocking Conditions The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters ex- plained in the following Table 2-21: Table 2-21 Interlocking Commands Interlocking Commands Abbreviation Message Switching Authority System Interlock Zone Controlled… -
Page 321
Breaker Control Control Logic using For Zone Controlled (field interlocking), control logic can be developed, using the CFC. Via specific release conditions the information “released” or “zone controlled” is available. Switching Switching authority configures the relay to perform Local/Remote Supervisory Authority functions. -
Page 322
Functions In detail, the following interlocking logic is derived when using default configuration settings: Current Switching Switching Command Issued Command Issued Command Issued from Authority Status Authority Locally from SAS or SCADA DIGSI DIGSI LOCAL Not checked Allowed Interlocked *2) Interlocked — switching authority ”DIGSI not… -
Page 323
Breaker Control Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired: − directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or −… -
Page 324: Recording And Acknowledgement Of Commands
Functions 2.46.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain message cause indication. The messag- es are entered in the event list.
-
Page 325: Installation And Commissioning
Installation and Commissioning This section is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety rules, safety regulations, and the operation of a power system. Installation of the 7UM62 is described in this section. Connections for the device are discussed.
-
Page 326: Installation And Connections
3 Installation and Commissioning Installation and Connections Warning! ® Trouble free and safe use of this SIPROTEC 4 device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction manual. Of particular importance are the general installation and safety regulations for work in a high-voltage environment (for example, ANSI, IEC, EN, DIN, or other national and international regulations.) These regulations must be observed.
-
Page 327
3.1 Installation and Connections Elongated SIPROTEC Holes SIEMENS ERROR 7UM621 MAIN MENU 01/04 Annunciations Measured values MENU ENTER Annunciations Measured values Alarm Figure 3-1 Panel Mounting of a 7UM621 with Size Housing Elongated Holes SIPROTEC SIEMENS ERROR 7UM622 MAIN MENU… -
Page 328
Furthermore, the cross-sectional area of the ground wire must be at least AWG 13. Mounting Bracket SIPROTEC SIEMENS ERROR 7UM621 TRIP PICKUP… -
Page 329
3.1 Installation and Connections SIPROTEC SIEMENS ERROR 7UM622 MAIN MENU 01/04 Annunciations Measured values MENU ENTER Annunciations Masured values Alarm Figure 3-4 Installing a 7UM621 ( Size Housing) in a Rack or Cubicle Connect the plug terminals and/or the threaded terminals on the rear side of the device according to the elementary diagram for the rack. -
Page 330: Connections
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.1.2 Connections Overview diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. CT and VT connections for a 7UM62 are shown in the Appendix, Section A.4. Make sure that the settings of the Power System Data 1 (Section 2.3) match the connections. Currents/Voltages Overview diagrams are shown in the Appendix.
-
Page 331
3.1 Installation and Connections The resulting factor between the secondary windings is 3/√3 = 1.73. For situations where the displacement voltage is measured by the device and other types of voltage transformer connections are utilized, the setting of address 0225A should be modified accordingly. -
Page 332: Hardware Modifications
3 Installation and Commissioning Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, please observe the following: Groups with Binary • If the configuration is performed from the operator panel or using DIGSI ® 4, the Inputs address 0302 CHANGE must be set to the option Binary Input. •…
-
Page 333
3.1 Installation and Connections Nominal Currents The rating of the current input transformers of the device can be changed to 1 A or 5 A with jumper settings that determine the secondary loading of the transformers. When the device is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the different current ratings are described below, Subsection 3.1.3.3 “C-I/O–2 Input/Output Board”… -
Page 334: Disassembling The Device
3 Installation and Commissioning Caution! If the jumpers are set to “current” input, connection of a voltage may destroy the board! For measuring transducer TD 3 (detects e.g. the excitation voltage for the underexcitation protection) an analog low-pass can be activated or deactivated; the choice is made by jumpers.
-
Page 335
3.1 Installation and Connections Caution! Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the device. -
Page 336
3 Installation and Commissioning C-CPU-2 Processor p.c.b. C-I/O-2 Input/Output p.c.b. C-I/O-6 Input/Output p.c.b. Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33 BI1 to BI6 and Binary Inputs (BI) Figure 3-5 7UM621: Front View ( Size Housing) after Removing the Front Cover (Simplified and Reduced) C-CPU-2 Processor p.c.b. -
Page 337: Switching Elements On Printed Circuit Boards
3.1 Installation and Connections 3.1.3.3 Switching Elements on Printed Circuit Boards Processor Printed The layout of the p.c.b for the C–CPU–2 processor module is shown in Figure 3-7. Circuit Board Check the provided nominal voltage of the integrated power supply according to Table C–CPU–2 3-1, the non-energized position of the live status contact (jumper X40 according to Table 3-2), the selected pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI5 according…
-
Page 338
3 Installation and Commissioning Table 3-1 Jumper Settings for the Nominal Voltage of the Integrated Power Supply on the C–CPU–2 Board Jumper Nominal Voltage 60/110/125 VDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 24/48 VDC 115 VAC 1–2 2–3 Jumpers X51, 1–2 and 3-4 2–3 X52, X53 and X55 1–2 2–3… -
Page 339
3.1 Installation and Connections With jumper X111, CTS is activated which is necessary for the communication with the modem. Table 3-5 Jumper setting of CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the processor printed circuit board C-CPU-2 Jumper /CTS of interface RS232 /CTS controlled by /RTS X111 1–2 2–3 *) -
Page 340
3 Installation and Commissioning +5 V 390 Ω A/A´ 220 Ω B/B´ 390 Ω Figure 3-8 Terminating Resistors (External) 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 341
3.1 Installation and Connections C–I/O–1 Input/ The layout of the p.c.b for the C–I/O–1 board is shown in Figure 3-9. Output Board (AD2) (AD1) (AD0) Figure 3-9 Jumpers on the C–I/O–1 Board for the Binary Inputs BI8 to BI15 (Simplified) 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 342
3 Installation and Commissioning In the version 7UM622, the contact type can be changed for one specific relay (BO13) from normally open to normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix). Table 3-7 Jumper Settings for the Contact of Relay R13 (Binary Output BO 13) Jumper Non-Energized Position Open Non-Energized Position Closed Factory Setting… -
Page 343
3.1 Installation and Connections C–I/O–2 Input/ The layout of the p.c.b for the C–I/O–2 board is shown in Figure 3-10. Output Board (AD0) (AD1) (AD2) Figure 3-10 C–I/O–2 board Showing the Jumpers Settings to be Checked For one specific relay (BO 6) the contact type can be changed from normally open to normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix): Table 3-10 Jumper Settings for Choosing the Contact Type of Binary Output BO 6 on the… -
Page 344
3 Installation and Commissioning The rated current settings of the input current transformers are checked on the C–I/O–2 board. All jumpers must be in the same position, i.e. there must be one jumper each (X61 to X64) for each of the input transformers, and the common jumper X60. -
Page 345
3.1 Installation and Connections C–I/O–6 Input/ The layout of the p.c.b for the C–I/O–6 board is shown in Figure 3-11. Output Board (AD2) (AD1) (AD0) Figure 3-11 C–I/O–6 board Showing the Jumpers Settings to be Checked Factory Jumper Settings for the Pickup Voltages of the Binary Inputs Table 3-12 BI 6 and BI 7 on the C–I/O–6 board Binary Input… -
Page 346
3 Installation and Commissioning For two specific relays (BO 11 and BO 12) the contact type can be changed from normally open to normally closed (see overview diagrams in section A.2 of the Appendix): Table 3-13 Jumper Settings for Choosing the Contact Type of Binary Outputs BO 11 and BO 12 on the C–I/O–6 Board Binary Output Jumper… -
Page 347
3.1 Installation and Connections Note: The jumper settings must correspond to the mode set at addresses 0295, 0296 (volt- age or current input) and 0297 (with/without filter). If they do not, the device is blocked and outputs an alarm. After any changes to the jumper settings, you should therefore ®… -
Page 348: Interface Modules
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.1.3.4 Interface Modules Exchanging The interface modules are located on the C–CPU–2 board (Œ in Figure 3-5 and 3-6). Interface Modules Figure 3-12 shows the p.c.b. with the location of the modules. Mounting position (rear of housing) Analog output System interface or analog output…
-
Page 349
3.1 Installation and Connections Table 3-18 Exchange Interface Modules Interface Location Exchange Module RS232 RS485 FO 820 nm Profibus DP RS485 System Interface Profibus DP twin ring Modbus RS485 Modbus 820 nm DNP3.0, RS485 DNP3.0, 820 nm Analog Interface 2 x 0 to 20 mA RS232 Service InterfaceT RS485… -
Page 350
3 Installation and Commissioning Terminating Resistors Jumper Connected Disconnected 2–3 1–2 2–3 1–2 Factory Set C53207- A324-B180 Figure 3-13 Location of the Jumpers for Configuring the Terminating Resistors of the Interface C53207-A322- 2 3 4 B100 B101 Terminating Resistors Jumper Connected Disconnected 1–2… -
Page 351: To Reassemble The Device
3.1 Installation and Connections Analog Output The AN20 analog output board (see Figure 3-15) has 2 floating channels with a current range of 0 to 20 mA (unipolar, max. 350 Ω). The location on the C–CPU–2 board is “B” or/and “D” depending on the variant ordered (see Figure 3-12).
-
Page 352: Checking Connections And System (Plant) Integration
3 Installation and Commissioning Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration 3.2.1 Checking the Data Connections of Serial Interfaces The following tables shows the pin-assignments for the various serial interfaces and for the time synchronization interface of the device. Operator Interface When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between ®…
-
Page 353
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration Table 3-20 Installation of the D-Subminiature Ports Pin No. PC Interface at RS 232 RS 485 Profibus DP Slave, RS 485 DNP3.0, Modbus, RS485 Front Screen (with screen ends electrically connected) – – –… -
Page 354: Checking The Device Connections
3 Installation and Commissioning Time Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the Synchronization connections are made as indicated in Table 3-22 Interface Table 3-22 Pin Assignments for the D-Subminiature Port of the Time Synchronization Interface Pin No.
-
Page 355
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration Note: If a redundant supply is used, there must be a permanent, i.e. uninterruptible connection between the minus polarity connectors of system 1 and system 2 of the d.c. voltage supply (no switching device, no fuse), because otherwise there is a risk of voltage doubling in case of a double earth fault. -
Page 356
3 Installation and Commissioning Secondary Test of A test set with 6 current outputs is recommended for secondary testing. This section the Differential gives you hints how to proceed if less current sources are available. The test current Protection can be injected individually for each winding, thus simulating each time a transformer fault with single-ended infeed. -
Page 357
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration Table 3-23 Correction Factor k Depending on Vector Group and Fault Type Type of Fault Reference Winding Even VG Numeral Odd VG Numeral (High Voltage Side) (0, 2, 4,6, 8, 10) (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11) Three-phase √3/2 = 0.866 Two-Phase… -
Page 358
3 Installation and Commissioning When testing this winding, the pickup value (referred to the rated relay current) will amount to: 1316 A N Transf N Transf ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ —————— — k ——————- — ——————————— k IDIFF> IDIFF> 1500 A N Relay N CT (primary) ⋅… -
Page 359: Checking The Integration In The Plant
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration 3.2.3 Checking the Integration in the Plant 3.2.3.1 General Hints Warning! The following procedures are carried out with dangerous voltages present. Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and precautionary measures shall perform the procedures.
-
Page 360
3 Installation and Commissioning Inventory of the In order to check the protection configuration (masking and setting values) for Technical Plant conformity with the plant requirements, it is necessary to make an inventory of the Data technical data for the individual components of the primary plant. These components include, among others, the generator or motor, the unit transformer (step-up transformer) and the voltage and current transformers. -
Page 361
3.2 Checking Connections and System (Plant) Integration When the voltage on the binary input connected to this auxiliary contact is removed, the message “>FAIL:Feeder VT ON” should appear in the Event Log. When the voltage is restored, the message “>FAIL:Feeder VT OFF” should occur. If one of these messages does not appear, then the connections and the configuration settings should be checked. -
Page 362: Commissioning
3 Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Warning! When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dangerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
-
Page 363: Test Mode And Blocking Data Transmission
3.3 Commissioning 3.3.1 Test Mode and Blocking Data Transmission ® If the SIPROTEC 4 device is connected to a central or master computer system via the system interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced (see Table “Protocol-dependent functions” in the Appendix A.13). If Test mode is set ON, then a message sent by the device to the master system has an additional test bit.
-
Page 364
3 Installation and Commissioning Figure 3-17 Dialog Box: Generate indications Following the first operation of one of the keys in the column Action a prompt for the Changing the Operating State entry of password No. 6 (for hardware test menus) appears. After correct entry of the password, individual messages can be initiated. -
Page 365: Checking The Binary Inputs And Outputs
3.3 Commissioning 3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ® Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually ® and precisely controlled in DIGSI 4. This feature can be used, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during commissioning.
-
Page 366
3 Installation and Commissioning Figure 3-18 Dialog Box for Hardware Test — Example Changing The displays of the intended conditions are shown as switching fields. To change the Hardware condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Schedule column. -
Page 367: Testing The Breaker Failure Scheme
3.3 Commissioning Check the reaction in the Status column of the dialog box. To do so, the dialog box must be updated. This is described below under the side title “Updating the display”. If you want to check the effects of a binary input signal without actually performing switching operations in the plant, you can do so by activating individual binary inputs by means of the Hardware Test function.
-
Page 368: Checking The Analog Outputs
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.3.5 Checking the Analog Outputs 7UM62 can be equipped with up to 2×2 analog outputs. Where analog outputs are provided, and used, their functioning should be tested. Since various types of measured values or events can be output, the test to be performed depends on the type of values for which it will be used.
-
Page 369
3.3 Commissioning X COUPLING = yyy Ω (address 6006) correspond with the above values. Remove earth fault bridge. An earth fault is now fitted as described above via a resistor of the warning resistance, (RE< WARN, address 6002, 10 kΩ when delivered from factory. The earth resistance calculated by the unit can be read out under the Operational Measured Values as Rotor. -
Page 370: Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 To 3 Hz)
3 Installation and Commissioning After the completion of the test, check that all provisional measures for testing have been reversed: − Earthing bridge or resistor has been removed, − Measurement circuit has been closed, − Controller unit connected to its operational supply a.c. voltage (refer also connection diagram in Figure 2-95 in Section 2.25.1).
-
Page 371
3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-20 Test Fault Record After this the fault resistors for the warning and the trip stage are installed, and the op- erational measured value Rearth is read out. The two measured values are the basis for the setting values of the warning stage (address 6102 RE< WARN) and the trip stage (address 6104 RE<<… -
Page 372: Checking The 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning To eliminate interference which might originate from the running machine, in particular from the excitation system, it is recommended to perform an additional operational check as described in Section 3.4.9.2. 3.3.8 Checking the 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection The 100-% stator earth fault protection can be checked with the machine at stand-still, because the measuring principle for the earth resistance calculation is independent of whether the machine is at stand-still, rotating or excited.
-
Page 373
3.3 Commissioning 90° must be determined and set as PHI I SEF = –90° – ϕ SES. If the value displayed is, for example, ϕ SES = –75°, PHI I SEF = –15° must be set at address 5309. This will change the measured value to approx. -
Page 374: Checking The Dc Voltage/Dc Current Circuit
3 Installation and Commissioning sues a pickup indication, and, after T SEF TRIP address 5305 (1 s on delivery), a trip indication. Remove the test resistor. If the indication „20 Hz voltage missing” to be received from the 20 Hz generator is marshalled to one of the binary inputs, and the delivery setting of this input has been changed for this purpose, the binary input can be checked as well.
-
Page 375: Trip/Close Tests For Primary Equipment
3.3 Commissioning 3.3.10 Trip/Close Tests for Primary Equipment Control by Local At the end of commissioning, actual 7UM62 tripping and closing should be verified for Command all the relevant circuit breakers and primary switching devices, unless this has been done already in connection with the Hardware Test described in Section 3.3.3. The feedback of the status of the primary equipment, through the equipment’s auxiliary contacts to the binary inputs of the 7UM62, should be checked during the testing.
-
Page 376: Primary Commissioning Tests With The Generator
3 Installation and Commissioning Commissioning Tests with the Generator Primary 3.4.1 General Hints Warning! When operating an electrical device, certain parts of the device inevitably have dangerous voltages. Severe personal injury or property damage can result if the device is not handled properly. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures.
-
Page 377
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator DANGER! Current transformer secondary circuits must be short-circuited before the current leads to the device are disconnected! If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer circuits, opening these test switches (placing them in the «Test» position) is sufficient provided the short-circuit function has been previously tested. -
Page 378
If you want to use the commissioning tool, please refer to the help files provided on the subject. Instructions on how to install the long-distance data transmission network and work with the browser can be found on an Internet website (www.siemens.sipro- tec.de) in the download area of the “7SD52” protective relay (title: “Commissioning Tool Help”). -
Page 379
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator means that the current connection on side 1 and side 2 is OK. A similar display is avail- able for the voltage and current vectors of side 2. Figure 3-21 Currents Flowing through the Protected Object For a test of the differential protection, the differential and restraint currents are en- tered in the characteristic. -
Page 380: Checking The Current Circuits
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.4.2 Checking the Current Circuits General The checks of the current circuits are performed with the generator to ensure the correct cabling, polarity, phase sequence, CT ratio etc., not in order to verify individual protection functions in the device. Switch unbalanced load protection (address 1701) and overload protection (address Preparation 1601) to Block relay.
-
Page 381
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Set impedance protection (address 3301) to IMPEDANCE PROT. = Block relay: Calibrating the Impedance With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge Protection which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) to the primary side of the unit transformer. -
Page 382: Checking The Differential Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.4.3 Checking the Differential Protection Preparation Before commencing any primary tests, make sure that the configured object is actually the one you want to protect, and that the correct amplitude matching for the current ratings of the protected object and the main primary c.t.s, and the correct vector group matching are set.
-
Page 383
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Symmetrical The operational measured values supplied by the 7UM62 allow a fast commissioning Current Test without external instruments. The indices of the measured currents are defined as follows: The symbol for current I is followed by the phase identifier Lx and by the index of the side of the protected object (e.g. -
Page 384: Checking The Earth Current Differential Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning The polarity of the current connections and the parameterized polarity are taken into consideration when the angles are displayed. Thus, if all three angles differ by 180° from the theoretical value, the polarity of one complete transformer set is wrong. This can be corrected by checking and changing the corresponding plant parameters: Address 0201 STRPNT->OBJ S1 for the primary winding, Address 0210 STRPNT->OBJ S2 for the secondary winding,…
-
Page 385
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Primary tests of power units are performed with the generator itself. On transformers, a low-voltage test source is used. Before the test, the CT connections have to be visually checked for correctness. Note: When performing the short-circuit test (3-phase short-circuit) for the earth current dif- ferential protection, check that the three current transformers (side 1 or side 2 –… -
Page 386
3 Installation and Commissioning If there are deviations, a connection error can be normally assumed. If necessary, modify the wiring, or, in Power System Data 1, the allocation of the CT starpoint for the phase CTs or the earth CT I . -
Page 387
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator ∼ Test source 7UM62 Figure 3-27 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Wye-Delta Transformer ∼ Test source 7UM62 Figure 3-28 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Delta-Delta Transformer with Compensating Winding ∼… -
Page 388
3 Installation and Commissioning ∼ Test source 7UM62 Figure 3-30 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Delta Winding with Artificial Starpoint A zero sequence current of at least 2 % the rated generator current is required per phase, i.e. the test current is at least 6 %. In the protection function, the sensitive pick- up threshold must be set, and the zero voltage release disabled. -
Page 389: Checking The Voltage Circuits
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator F.No. 05841 „REF U0> releas.“ must appear. When performing the test, keep in mind that the zero voltage is calculated from the three phase voltages and converted on the secondary side to the phase-to-phase voltage (equivalent to √3 U0). The value thus obtained is the same as for a broken delta winding.
-
Page 390: Checking The Stator Earth Fault Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning Seq.“ will be output. The allocation of measuring quantities to phases must be checked and corrected, if necessary. If signification deviations are found, check, and if necessary correct, the voltage transformer circuits and repeat the test. It is also possible to use for this check the operational measured value of positive- ≠…
-
Page 391: Unit Connection
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator 3.4.6.1 Unit Connection General In the event of an external (high-voltage side) short-circuit, an interference voltage is transmitted via the coupling capacitance C (Figure 3-31) which induces a neutral displacement voltage on the generator side. To ensure that this voltage is not interpreted by the protection as an earth fault within the generator, it is reduced by a suitable loading resistor to a value which corresponds to approximately one half the pick-up voltage U0>…
-
Page 392
3 Installation and Commissioning Since the reactance of the coupling capacitance is much larger than the referred ≈ U resistance of the loading resistor R ‘, U can be assumed to be U /√3 (compare also vector diagram Figure 3-32), whereby U /√3 is the neutral displacement voltage with a full displacement of the network (upper-voltage) neutral. -
Page 393
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator ERD> Pick–up value Earth fault on machine side Value extrapolated to 100 % U Nmach Earth fault on upper voltage side 10 % 40 % 100 % corresponds to 90 % protected zone N mach Figure 3-33 Neutral displacement voltage during earth faults… -
Page 394: Busbar Connection
3 Installation and Commissioning Check Using With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault bridge Network Earth Fault on the primary side of the unit transformer. DANGER! Primary measurements must only be carried out with the generator at stand– still on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system.
-
Page 395
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Σ ——- — ——— — V ——— — V 7UM62 Figure 3-34 Earth Fault with Busbar Connection The generator circuit breaker must be closed for this test and the generator galvanically connected with the load equipment. If the plant conditions do not allow this, the hints given overleaf under the side title “Directional check without Loading Resistor”… -
Page 396
3 Installation and Commissioning With Directional The earth fault directional determination requires a check of the current and voltage Determination connections for correctness and correct polarity. The machine continues to be excited to a voltage that corresponds to a displacement voltage above the pick-up value. If the polarity is correct, the trip indication “S/E/F TRIP“… -
Page 397
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator 7UM62 Figure 3-35 Directional Check with Toroidal Residual Current Transformers Directional Check If the current is supplied from a set of c.t.’s in Holmgreen connection (Figure 3-36), the with C.T.’s in displacement voltage is obtained in the same manner as in the above circuit. Only the Holmgreen current of that current transformer which is in the same phase as the by-passed Connection… -
Page 398: Testing The 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning If, in an isolated network, the voltage connections for the reactive current measurement should be maintained for testing, then it should be noted that with a power flow with inductive component in forwards direction results in a backwards direction for the earth fault relay (contrary to an earth fault in this direction).
-
Page 399
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator With the earth fault bridge in place, the resistance stages of the 100-% protection (warning and trip stage) must pick up immediately on switching in the supply voltage of the 20 Hz generator. To check the pickup behaviour of the current stage SEF100 I>>, read out the mea- sured value I SEF from the operational measured values at approx. -
Page 400: Checking The Sensitive Earth Fault Protection When Used For Rotor Earth Fault Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.4.8 Checking the Sensitive Earth Fault Protection when Used for Rotor Earth Fault Protection If the sensitive earth fault protection is used for rotor earth fault protection, it must first be set to Block relay under address 5101. Caution! Make sure that the checked rotor circuit is completed isolated from the earth, to avoid that the earthing resistor that is interposed for test purposes causes a…
-
Page 401: Rotor Earth Fault Protection (1 To 3 Hz)
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Start up generator and excite to rated voltage. If applicable place measurement brushes into operation. The rotor earth fault protection initiates pick-up and, after T-TRIP-RE<< (10 s when delivered from factory), trip annunciation (LED 2 and LED 1 as group indications for device pickup and device trip).
-
Page 402: Tests With The Generator Connected To The Network
3 Installation and Commissioning 3.4.10 Tests with the Generator Connected to the Network 3.4.10.1 Checking the Correct Connection Polarity The following test instructions apply to a synchronous generator. Run up generator and synchronize with network. Slowly increase driving power input (up to approximately 5%).
-
Page 403: Calibrating The Reverse Power Protection
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator − Read out the motoring power with polarity (negative sign) in the operational measured values and note it down as P (see table below). − Read out the reactive power with polarity (positive sign) in the operational measured values and note it down as Q (see table below).
-
Page 404: Checking The Underexcitation Protection
3 Installation and Commissioning In order to confirm the correct settings, repeat reverse power test again. For this, the reverse power protection (address 3101) is set to BLOCK relay in order to check its effectiveness (using the annunciations). Start up generator and synchronize with network. Close regulating valves. From the operational measured value for the active power, the motoring power measured with the device can be derived.
-
Page 405: Checking The Directional Function Of The Overcurrent Time Protection
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator Note: If operation with capacitive load is not possible, then load points can also be checked in the inductive (overexcited) range. In this case, the polarity of the current transformer connections must be re-parameterized (address 0223). Thus, the characteristics of the underexcitation protection are mirrored around the origin.
-
Page 406
3 Installation and Commissioning (FNo 00000004). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is energized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker or primary switch may be used to control the binary input for triggering. An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective element pick-up or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages. -
Page 407: Final Preparation Of The Device
3.5 Final Preparation of the Device Final Preparation of the Device Verify all terminal screws are tight and secure. Do not overtighten. Ensure that all pin connectors are properly inserted. Verify the wires to the terminals are tightly connected. Make sure the communication cables are firmly connected; however, do not overtighten the screws.
-
Page 408
3 Installation and Commissioning 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 409: Technical Data
Technical Data ® This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 device and the individual functions of the device, including the limiting values that under no circumstances may be exceeded. The electrical and functional data for devices equipped with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings.
-
Page 410
4 Technical Data 4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %) 4.25 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn, ANSI 64R) 4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) 4.27 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 4.28… -
Page 411: General Device Data
4.1 General Device Data General Device Data 4.1.1 Analog Inputs Nominal Frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable) Current Inputs Nominal Current 1 A or 5 A ≤ 1.6 A Ground Current, SensitiveI Burden per Phase and Ground Path – At I = 1 A Approx.
-
Page 412: Power Supply
4 Technical Data 4.1.2 Power Supply Direct Voltage Voltage Supply Via Integrated Converter Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage V 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC PS nom Permissible Voltage Ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC Nominal Power Supply Direct Voltage V 110/125/220/250 VDC PSnom Permissible Voltage Ranges…
-
Page 413: Communications Interfaces
4.1 General Device Data Binary inputs: 2 ranges ≥ 19 VDC – For Nominal Voltages 24/48/60/ ≤ 14 VDC 110/125 VDC ≥ 88 VDC – For Nominal Voltages 110/125/ ≤ 66 VDC 220/250 VDC Maximum Permissible Voltage 300 VDC Impulse Filter on Input 220 nF Coupling Capacitor at 220 V with recovery time >…
-
Page 414
4 Technical Data – Transmission Speed Min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud Factory Setting: 38400 Baud; Parity: 8E1 – Maximum Distance of Transmission 15 meters / 49 feet Rear Service–/ – Connection Isolated interface for data transfer Modem– Interface ® –… -
Page 415
4.1 General Device Data For Panel Surface- Mounted Case On the case bottom λ = 820 nm – Optical Wavelength – Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fiber 50/125 µm or using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm – Optical Link Signal Attenuation Max. -
Page 416
4 Technical Data λ = 820 nm – Optical Wavelength – Laser Class 1 Under EN 60825–1/ –2 Using glass fiber 50/125 µm or Using glass fiber 62.5/125 µm – Optical Link Signal Attenuation Max. 8 dB, with glass fiber 62.5/125 µm –… -
Page 417: Electrical Tests
4.1 General Device Data – Signal Levels and Burdens: Rated Signal Voltage 12 V 24 V 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V IHigh 1.0 V at I = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at I = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at I = 0.25 mA ILow ILow…
-
Page 418
4 Technical Data – Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 27 MHz to 500 MHz Non-Modulated IEC 60255–22–3 (Report) Class III – Irradiation with HF Field, 10 V/m: 80 MHz to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM: Amplitude Modulated 1 kHz IEC 61000–4–3, Class III –… -
Page 419: Mechanical Stress Tests
4.1 General Device Data 4.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068 Shock Stress – Vibration Sinusoidal During Operation ±0.075 mm amplitude; IEC 60255–21–1, Class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: IEC 60068–2–6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration frequency sweep rate 1 Octave/min 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
-
Page 420: Service Conditions
56 days of the year up to 93% relative humidity. CONDENSATION MUST BE AVOIDED Siemens recommends that all devices be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
-
Page 421: Construction
4.1 General Device Data 4.1.10 Construction Case 7XP20 UL–certification conditions: “For use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure” Dimensions see dimensional drawings, Section 4.35 Weight (Mass) – In Case for Flush Mounting, of 19” 16.5 pounds (7.5 kg) –…
-
Page 422: Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ansi 50, 67)
4 Technical Data Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 67) Pickup and Delay Pickup Current 50–1 0.25 A to 100.00 A ) (Increments 0.05 A) Time Ranges/ Pickup Current 50–2 0.25 A to 100.00 A ) (Increments 0.05 A) Resolutions Delay Times T 50–1, 50–2, 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s)
-
Page 423: Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Ansi 51, 67)
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67) Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67) Pickup and Time Pickup Current 0.50 A to 20.00 A ) (Increments 0.05 A) Multiplier Ranges/ Time Multipliers for 51 0.05 s to 3.20 s (Increments 0.01 s) Resolutions or ∞…
-
Page 424
4 Technical Data t [s] t [s] 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 I/I p I/I p 13 5 0 14 ⋅ ⋅ Very inverse: Normal inverse: ————————— — T ————————————- — T 0 02 ⁄ (Type A) ⁄ (Type B) – –… -
Page 425
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67) Trip Time As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-2 and 4-3) Characteristics As Per ANSI æ ö 3.922 ⋅ VERY INVERSE ç ÷ ————————— — 0.0982 è ø ⁄ – æ ö 8.9341 ⋅… -
Page 426
4 Technical Data t [s] t [s] D [s] D [s] 0.05 0.05 I/I p I/I p æ ö æ ö ç 3 922 ÷ ç 8 9341 ÷ ⋅ ⋅ ————————— — 0 0982 ——————————————— — 0 17966 VERY INVERSE INVERSE ç… -
Page 427
4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51, 67) t [s] t [s] D [s] D [s] 0.05 0.05 I/I p I/I p æ ö æ ö ç 5 64 ÷ ç 0 4797 ÷ ⋅ ⋅ EXTREMELY INVERSE ————————— — 0 02434 DEFINITE INVERSE ——————————————— — 0 21359… -
Page 428: Thermal Overload Protection (Ansi 49)
4 Technical Data Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Setting Ranges/ K-Factor per IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 (Increments 0.01) Resolutions τ Time Constant 30 s to 32000 s (Increments 1 s) Extension K-Factor — Factor 1.0 to 10.0 relative to the time constant for when Machine Stopped the machine running (Increments 0.1) Θ…
-
Page 429
4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) t [min] t [min] Parameter: Setting Value of Time Constant τ [min] 1000 Parameter: Setting Value of Time Constant τ [min] 1000 0.05 0.05 6 7 8 10 12 6 7 8 10 12 ·… -
Page 430: Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (Ansi 46)
4 Technical Data Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Setting Ranges/ Permissible Unbalanced Load I >/I 3.0 % to 30.0 % (Increments 0.1 %) Resolutions (Warn. Stage too) Tripping Stage (Definite Time)I >>/I 10 % to 100 % (Increments 1 %) Delay Times >), T(I >>) 0.00 s to 60.00 s…
-
Page 431
4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Schieflast Negative Sequence t = f (I2/In) 10000 2000 1000 Parameter: Setting value FACTOR K 40 s 30 s 20 s 15 s 10 s 9 10 0.05 0.07 I2/In ——————— — ⁄… -
Page 432: Startup Overcurrent Protection (Ansi 51)
4 Technical Data Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Setting Ranges/ Pickup Current I> 0.10 to 20.00 A (Increments 0.01 A) Resolution Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞ (does not expire) Inherent Operating Pickup Times I> 120 ms or higher (dep.
-
Page 433: Differential Protection For Generators And Motors (Ansi 87G/87M)
4.7 Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M) Differential Protection for Generators and Motors (ANSI 87G/87M) Setting Ranges/ Differential Current >/I 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01) DIFF N Gen Resolutions High-Current Stage >>/I 0.5 to 12.0 (Increments 0.1) DIFF N Gen or ∞…
-
Page 434
4 Technical Data diff Fault characteristic ——— — 2031 I DIFF>> Tripping Blocking SLOPE 2 SLOPE 1 Add-On Stabilization 2021 I DIFF> 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BASE POINT 2 BASE POINT 1 stab ———— — Figure 4-6 Pickup Characteristic for Generator or Motor Differential Protection (settable) >>/I… -
Page 435: Differential Protection For Transformers (Ansi 87T)
4.8 Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T) Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T) Setting Ranges/ Differential Current >/I 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01) DIFF N transf Resolutions High-Current Stage >>/I 0.5 to 12.0 (Increments 0.1) DIFF N Transf or ∞ ( stage ineffective) Pickup see also Figure 4-8 Characteristic…
-
Page 436
4 Technical Data Influencing Power Supply Direct Voltage in Range 0.8 ≤ V ≤ 1.15 Variables for PS nominal Pickup Temperature in Range 23 °F ≤ ϑ ≤ 131 °F 0.3 % / 10 °F –5 °C ≤ ϑ ≤ 55 °C 0.5 % / 10 K Frequency in Range 0.95 ≤… -
Page 437
4.8 Differential Protection for Transformers (ANSI 87T) Can be set to e.g. max n/I N = 4 DIFF Tripping Blocking Can be set to e.g. 5th harmonic = 40 % Can be set to e.g. >/I N = 0.2 DIFF Figure 4-10 Restraining Influence of Higher-Order Harmonics (settable) -
Page 438: Earth Current Differential Protection (Ansi 87Gn/Tn)
4 Technical Data Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN/TN) Setting Ranges/ Differential Current I-REF> I/InO 0.05 to 2.00 (Increments 0.01) Resolution Characteristic: Basepoint I/InO 0.05 to 2.00 Characteristic: Slope 0.00 to 0.95 (Increments 0.01) Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞…
-
Page 439: Underexcitation (Loss-Of-Field) Protection (Ansi 40)
4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Setting Ranges/ Conductance Sections 1/xd CHAR. 0.25 to 3.00 (Increments 0.01) Resolutions α1, α2, α3 Angle of Inclination 50° to 120° (Increments 1°) Delay Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞…
-
Page 440: Reverse Power Protection (Ansi 32R)
4 Technical Data 4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) Setting Ranges/ Reverse Power >/S –0.50 % to –30.0 %(Increments 0.01 %) Resolutions Delay Times 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞ (does not expire) Inherent Operating Pickup Times Times –…
-
Page 441: Forward Power Supervision (Ansi 32F)
4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 4.12 Forward Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) Setting Ranges/ Forward Power </S 0.5 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %) Resolutions Forward Power >/S 1.0 % to 120.0 % (Increments 0.1 %) Delay Times 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞…
-
Page 442: Impedance Protection (Ansi 21)
4 Technical Data 4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Overcurrent Fault Pickup Current IMP I> 0.50 A to 100.00 A ) (Increm. 0.05 A) Detection Drop-Off ratio Approx. 0.95 Measuring Tolerances acc.to 1 % of set value or 50 mA VDE 0435 part 303 Undervoltage Seal-In U<…
-
Page 443: Out-Of-Step Protection (Ansi 78)
4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Pickup Positive Sequence Component I >/I 20.0 % to 400.0 % (Increm. 0.1 %) Negative Sequence ComponentI </I 5.0 % to 100.0 % (Increm. 0.1 %) Dropout/Pickup Ratios – I >…
-
Page 444: Undervoltage Protection (Ansi 27)
4 Technical Data 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Setting Ranges / Measurement Quantities: PositiveSequence Voltages Resolution Pickup Voltage U<, U<<, Up< 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) (27) Dropout Ratio U<, U<< 1.01 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01) (27-1 and 27-2 only) Delay Time T U<, T U<<…
-
Page 445
4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Tripping Time Figure 4-12 Tripping Times of the Inverse Undervoltage Protection for Setting Value Up< = 75 V, Without Additional Trip Delay (T = 0) Up< 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 446: Overvoltage Protection (Ansi 59)
4 Technical Data 4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) Setting Ranges / Measurement Quantities: Maximum of the phase–to–phase voltages, Resolution calculated from the phase–to–earth voltag- Pickup Voltage U>, U>> 30.0 V to 170.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) 59-1, 59-2 Dropout Ratio U>, U>>…
-
Page 447: Frequency Protection (Ansi 81)
4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Setting Ranges/ Number of Frequency Elements 4: each can be 81/O or 81/U Resolutions Pickup Frequency f> or f< 40.00 Hz to 65.00 Hz (Increments 0.01 Hz) (81–1 to 81–4) Delay Time T f1 (81–1) 0.00 s to 600.00 s…
-
Page 448: Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (Ansi 24)
4 Technical Data 4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Setting Ranges/ U / U Resolutions Overexcitation (Ratio 1.00 to 1.20 (Increments 0.01) > f / f (Warning Stage) U / U Overexcitation (Ratio > 1.00 to 1.40 (Increments 0.01) f / f (Stepped Characteristic) Time Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s…
-
Page 449
4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 10000 t [s] 3000 2000 1000 T U/f>> U f ⁄ U/f> U/f>> —————- — (Pickup/warning stage) ⁄ Figure 4-13 Tripping Time Characteristic of Thermal Replica and of Stepped Stage of the Overexcitation Protection (Pre–settings) 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 450: Rate-Of-Frequency-Change Protection (Ansi 81R)
4 Technical Data 4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection (ANSI 81R) Setting Ranges/ Stages, can be +df/dt> or–df/dt Resolution Pickup Values df/dt 0.1 to 10 Hz/s (Increments 0.1 Hz/s) Delay Times T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞ (does not expire) Undervoltage Lock-Out U1>…
-
Page 451: Jump Of Voltage Vector
4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector 4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector Stage ∆ϕ Setting Ranges/ 2° to 30° (Increments 1°) Resolution Delay Time T 0.00 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞ (does not expire) Reset Time T 0.10 to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) Reset or ∞…
-
Page 452: Stator Earth Fault Protection (Ansi 59N, 64G, 67G)
4 Technical Data 4.21 90–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Setting Ranges/ Displacement Voltage U0> 2.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) Resolutions Residual Current > 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA) Inclination of Directional Characteristic 0°…
-
Page 453: Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (Ansi 51Gn, 64R)
4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) Setting Ranges/ Overcurrent pick-up > 2 mA to 1000 mA (Increments 1 mA) Resolutions Delay Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) IEE>…
-
Page 454: Stator Earth Fault Protection With 3Rd Harmonics (Ansi 27/59Tn 3Rd Harm.)
4 Technical Data 4.23 100–%–Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Setting Ranges/ Pick–Up Value for 3rd Harmonic Resolutions in Undervoltage Stage < 0.2 V to 40.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) 0 (3rd HARM) Pick–Up Value for 3rd Harmonic in Overvoltage Stage >…
-
Page 455: Stator Earth Fault Protection With 20 Hz Voltage Injection (Ansi 64G, -100 %)
4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %) 4.24 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G, –100 %) 20 to 700 Ω (Increments 1 Ω) Setting Ranges/ Alarm Stage R <…
-
Page 456: Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, Fn, Ansi 64R)
4 Technical Data 4.25 Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn, ANSI 64R) Setting Ranges/ Alarm Stage 3.0 kΩ to 30.0 kΩ (Increments 0.1 kΩ) E ALARM Resolutions Tripping Stage 1.0 kΩ to 5.0 kΩ (Increments 0.1 kΩ) E TRIP Delay Times 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) RE ALARM…
-
Page 457: Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection With 1 To 3 Hz (Ansi 64R)
4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) 4.26 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz (ANSI 64R) Setting Ranges/ Warning Stage 5 kΩ to 80 kΩ (Increments 1 kΩ) E WARN Resolution Tripping Stage 1 kΩ…
-
Page 458: Motor Starting Time Supervision (Ansi 48)
4 Technical Data 4.27 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) Setting Ranges/ Motor Starting Current 0.50 A to 80.00 A ) (Increments 0.05 A) STARTUP Increments Pickup Threshold 3.00 A to 5.00 A (Increments 0.05 A) MOTOR START Permissible Starting Time T 1.0 s to 180.0 s (Increments 0.1 s) STARTUP…
-
Page 459: Restart Inhibit For Motors
4.28 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49 Rotor 4.28 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49 Rotor Setting Ranges/ Starting CurrentBased 1.5 to 10.0 (Increments 0.1) Start MOTnom Increments on Nominal Motor Current Max. Permissible 3.0 s to 120.0 s (Increments 0.1 s) MOT START Starting Time…
-
Page 460: Breaker Failure Protection (Ansi 50Bf)
4 Technical Data 4.29 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) Pickup and Delay Pickup of 50 Element BF.I> 0.20 A to 10.00 A )(Increments 0.05 A) Time Ranges/ Delay Time TRIP-Timer 0.06 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) Resolutions or ∞ (no trip) Initiating Time Pickup Times (protection initiates) — For Internal Start…
-
Page 461: Inadvertent Energization (Ansi 50/27)
4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27) 4.30 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50/27) Setting Ranges/ Overcurrent Pick-Up 0.5 A to 100.0 A ) (Increments 0.5 A) STAGE or ∞ (does not expire) Resolutions Release < 10.0 V to 125.0 V (Increments 0.1 V) Delay Time PICK UP T U <…
-
Page 462: Dc Voltage/Dc Current Protection (Ansi 59N Dc /51N Dc )
4 Technical Data 4.31 DC Voltage/DC Current Protection (ANSI 59N /51N Setting Ranges/ Voltage Increase > 0.1 V to 8.5 V (Increments 0.1 V) Resolutions Voltage Decrease < 0.1 V to 8.5 V (Increments 0.1 V) Current Increase > 0.2 mA to 17.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA) Current Decrease <…
-
Page 463: Thermoboxes For Temperature Detection
4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection 4.32 Thermoboxes for Temperature Detection Temperature Number of Thermoboxes Possible 1 or 2 Detectors Number of Temperature Detectors per Thermobox max. 6 Pt 100 Ω oder Ni 100 Ω oder Ni 120 Ω Type of Measurement Location Setting “Oil”…
-
Page 464: Additional Functions
4 Technical Data 4.33 Additional Functions Operational Operating Measured Values L1, S1 L2, S1 L3,S1 L1, S2 L2, S2 L3,S2 Measured Values for Currents in A or kA primary; in A secondary, or in % of I — Range 10 % to 200 % I 0.2 % of measured value or 10 mA ±…
-
Page 465
4.33 Additional Functions P, Real power (with sign) in kW (MW or GW) primary, and in % S — Range 0 % to 120 % S 1 % ± 0.25 % S — Tolerance = √3 · U with S ·… -
Page 466
4 Technical Data Charge at Polarity Reversal in mAs — Range 0.00 mAs to 1.00 mAs — Tolerance 0.01 mAs Rotor Earth Resistance in kΩ earth — Range 0.0 kΩ to 9999.9 kΩ — Tolerance < 5 % or 0.5 kΩ <… -
Page 467
4.33 Additional Functions Range 0 mA to 22.5 mA Minimum Threshold (Limit of Validity:) 0.0 mA to 5.0 mA (Increments 0.1 mA) Maximum Threshold 22.0 mA (fixed) Configurable Reference Value 20 mA 10.0 % to 1000.0 %(Increments 0.1 %) Measured Values Current Asymmetry >… -
Page 468
4 Technical Data Waveform Capture Optionally instantaneous values or r.m.s. (Fault Recorder) values – Instantaneous Values − Recording Time Total of 5 s Pre-event and post-event recording and memory time adjustable − Sampling Rate for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms (16 sam/cyc) Sampling Rate for 60 Hz 1 sample/1.04 ms (16 sam/cyc) −… -
Page 469
4.33 Additional Functions Task Level Function Module Description PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_ BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to Internal Single – Point (conversion) BUILD_DI Create Double Point – Annunciation CMD_CHAIN Command chain – – CMD_INF Command information – – – CONNECT Connection –… -
Page 470
4 Technical Data Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) 10000 PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 1900 PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) SFS_BEARB Interlocking) 10000 In the following table, the amount of TICKS required by the individual elements of a CFC chart is shown. -
Page 471: Operating Ranges Of The Protection Functions
4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions 4.34 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions Table 4-1 Operating Ranges of the Protection Functions Operat. cond. 0 Operational condition 1 Operat. cond. 0 f ≤ 10 Hz 11 Hz< f/Hz ≤ 40 40 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 69 f ≥…
-
Page 472
4 Technical Data ) Thermical replica registers cooling-down ) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained ) Pick -up – when already present – is maintained, if the measured voltage is not too small ) 25 Hz < f/Hz ≤ 40 Hz ) Function is only active at rated frequency ±… -
Page 473: Dimensions
4.35 Dimensions 4.35 Dimensions Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 29.5 29.5 29 30 Mounting plate Mounting plate Rear view Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with clamp terminals) 5 or M4 Dimensions in mm ± 0.5 13.2 ±…
-
Page 474
4 Technical Data Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (Size 29.5 29.5 29 30 Mounting plate Monting plate Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with clamp terminals) 5 or M4 5 or M4 5 or M4 5 or M4 13,2 Rear view ±… -
Page 475
4.35 Dimensions Panel Mounting (Housing size 10,5 29,5 Front view Side view Dimensions in mm Figure 4-16 Dimensions 7UM621 for Panel Mounting (size Panel Mounting (Housing size 10,5 29,5 Front view Side view Dimensions in mm Figure 4-17 Dimensions 7UM622 for Panel Mounting (size n n n n 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 476
4 Technical Data 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 477: Appendix
Appendix This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides ordering information for the models of 7UM62. General diagrams indicating the termi- nal connections of the 7UM62 models are included. Connection examples show the proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system con- figurations.
-
Page 478: Ordering Information And Accessories
A Appendix Ordering Information and Accessories 9 10 11 12 Multifunctional Machine Protection 7UM62 Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs Housing 19”, 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 Live Status Contact Housing 19”, 15 BI, 20 BO, 1 Live Status Contact Nominal Current = 1 A, Iee (sensitive) = 5 A, Iee (sensitive)
-
Page 479
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 9 10 11 12 Multifunctional Machine Protection 7UM62 Measuring Functionalities without extended measuring functionality Min/Max values, energy counter Protective Elements Basic Generator Elements, included in all versions Overcurrent protection with undervoltage seal in (I> +U<) ANSI 51 Overcurrent protection, directional (I>>, dir.) -
Page 480: Accessories
A Appendix A.1.1 Accessories Interface Modules Exchange Modules for Interfaces Name Order No. RS232 C53207-A351-D641-1 RS485 C53207-A351-D642-1 FO 820 nm C53207-A351-D643-1 Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1 Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1 Modbus RS485 C53207-A351-D621-1 Modbus 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1 DNP3.0 RS485 C53207-A351-D631-1 DNP3.0 820 nm C53207-A351-D633-1 Analog output AN20…
-
Page 481
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Coupling Unit The sensitive earth fault protection can be used as rotor earth fault protection. The system frequency bias voltage for the rotor circuit is generated and coupled to the rotor circuit via a coupling unit. Coupling unit for rotor earth fault protection (R, fn) Order No. -
Page 482
A Appendix Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the ® operating software DIGSI Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No. -
Page 483: Schematic Diagram Of The Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A.1.1.1 Schematic Diagram of the Accessories ≈ 4 µF ≈ 33 Ω/50 W ≈ 0.75 H 230 V ≈ 60 V ≈ 36 V–49 V 100 to 125 V ∗ Figure A-1 Schematic Diagram of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0 105 Ω…
-
Page 484
A Appendix 500 Ω 500 Ω 9000 Ω Figure A-4 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 10:1; 20:1; 3PP1326-0BZ-012009 Surface mounting housing Flush mounting housing UOutput 7XR60 Auxiliary voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC UMeas 100…115 VAC 120, 125 VAC UControl Factory Set: 100 — 125 VAC ∗… -
Page 485
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Surface mounting case / Flush mounting case 20 Hz EXTERNAL BLOCK DEVICE OPERATIVE ∗ Figure A-7 General Diagram of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 486
A Appendix Surface mounting case / Flush mounting case 10 mF 0R68, 4 x 50 W 600 mH INPUT BANDPASS 47 mF OUTPUT BANDPASS 47 mF 330R, 50 W 330R, 50 W VOLTAGE DIVIDER 330R, 50 W 330R, 50 W 330R, 50 W ∗… -
Page 487: Dimensional Drawing Of The Accessories
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 1.1.1.2 Dimensional Drawing of the Accessories 29.5 Mounting plate Rear view Connector modules Side view ) Current connectors: Screwed terminal for max. 4 mm Twin spring crimp connector in parallel for max. 2.5 mm 5 or M4 max.
-
Page 488
A Appendix Mounting plate 209.5 Connector modules Side view Rear view 5 or M4 ± 0.3 Dimensions on the mounting plate Dimensions in mm Figure A-10 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0BA0 for Panel Surface Mounting 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 489
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Drip–proof roof Drip-proof roof Space required for Space required for the cover removing removing the cover Cover Cover Table A-1 3PP1 Degree of Protection IP 20 (with Drip–Proof Roof IP 23); Dimensions in mm Type 3PP1 32 3 x 16 3PP1 33… -
Page 490
A Appendix recommended space to the next unit 29.5 Current connections (terminals 1 to 6): View A not used in 7XT71 Voltage connections (terminals 7 to 31): isolated ring cable lug: for bolts 4 mm diameter max. major diameter 9 mm type: e.g. -
Page 491
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 29.5 Mounting plate Connec tions for earthing Connections terminals Current connections (terminals 1 to 6): not used in 7XT71 Voltage connections (terminals 7 to 31): isolated ring cable lug: for bolts 4 mm diameter max. major diameter 9 mm type: e.g. -
Page 492
A Appendix 29.5 Mounting plate Side view (with screwed terminals) 5 or M4 ± 0.5 13.2 Rear view ± 0.3 206.5 Dimensions in mm Panel cut-out Figure A-14 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0CA00 for Panel Flash Mounting 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 493
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Mounting plate 209.5 Side view (with screwed terminals) ± 0.3 12.5 Rear view ± 0.3 Fixing points of the Dimensions in mm mounting plate Figure A-15 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 494
A Appendix 29.5 Mounting plate Connector modules Connectors: Screwed terminal for max. 1.5 mm2. Twin spring crimp connector in paral lel for max. 1.5 mm2. 5 or M4 Panel cut-out Dimensions in mm +0.5 13.2 +0.3 206.5 Figure A-16 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0CA00 for Panel Flash Mounting 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 495
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 209,5 Connector modules Connectors: Screwed terminal for max. 1.5 mm2. Twin spring crimp connector in paral lel for max. 1.5 mm2. ø4.5 oder M5 Dimensions in mm 12.5 Figure A-17 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 496
A Appendix 29.5 Mounting plate Set square *) Dimensions in mm 31.8 — 0.3 Ø5.5(4x) — 0.5 *) For panel flush mounting, 2 set squares C73165- A63-C201-1 are necessary since the mounting rails of the device are not sufficient for the high weight of the device. -
Page 497
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Side view 31.8 — 0.3 29,5 31.8 — 0.3 Set square *) 239.5 — 0,3 Distance piece *) Dimensions in mm *) 2 set squares C73165- A63-C201-1 and 4 distance pieces C73165-A63-C203-1 are necessary for panel surface mounting. Fix the set squares to the mounting rails of the device, using 8 standard screws size M4. -
Page 498: General Diagrams (Iec)
A Appendix General Diagrams (IEC) A.2.1 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation 7UM621∗–∗D/E L1S2 L2S2 L3S2 L1S1 L2S1 L3S1 BO10 BO11 BO12 Life status contact Power- supply Analog output or Thermobox Service Port or Thermobox (–) (–) System interface or analog output (–) Time Synchronization…
-
Page 499
A.2 General Diagrams (IEC) 7UM622∗–∗D/E L1S2 L2S2 L3S2 L1S1 L2S1 L3S1 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BI10 BI11 Life status BI12 contact BI13 Power BI14 supply BI15 Analog output or Thermobox Service port (–) or Thermobox (–) System interface… -
Page 500: Housing For Panel Surface Mounting
A Appendix A.2.2 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting 7UM621∗–∗B L1S2 L2S2 L3S2 L1S1 L2S1 L3S1 BO10 BO11 BO12 Life status contact Power supply Earthing terminal (26) IN SYNC IN 12 V COM SYNC (–) Time synchronization COMMON IN 5 V (–) IN 24 V Screen…
-
Page 501
A.2 General Diagrams (IEC) 7UM622∗–∗B L1S2 L2S2 L3S2 L1S1 L2S1 L3S1 BO10 BO11 BO12 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO19 BO20 BI10 Life status BI11 contact BI12 Power BI13 supply Earthing BI14 terminal (51) IN SYNC BI15 IN 12 V COM SYNC Time synchronization COMMON… -
Page 502: General Diagrams (Ansi)
A Appendix General Diagrams (ANSI) 7UM621∗– Surface-mounting housing Flush-mounting housing A,S2 7UM621 B,S2 C,S2 G,sens. (EE2) R 15 R 17 R 10 R 18 R 16 R 11 R 12 R 13 N(E) R 14 A,S1 R 10 B,S1 R 11 C,S1 R 12 G,sens.(EE1)
-
Page 503
A.3 General Diagrams (ANSI) 7UM622∗– Surface-mounting housing Flush-mounting housing A,S2 7UM622 B,S2 C,S2 G,sens. (EE2) R 15 R 17 R 18 R 10 R 16 R 11 R 12 R 13 N(E) R 14 A,S1 B,S1 C,S1 G,sens.(EE1) R 13 K 13 TD 1 (Start-up) -
Page 504: Connection Examples
A Appendix Connection Examples A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) ANSI 7UM62 A(L1)S1 B(L2)S1 C(L3)S1 A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) K17 + Excitation voltage injection Rotor earth current injection A(L1)S2 B(L2)S2 C(L3)S2 Measuring transducer: K13 + -Temperature injection K15 + — or DC voltage injection Figure A-26 Bus–Bar Connection Current and voltage connections to three transformers, core balance neutral current transformers and…
-
Page 505
A.4 Connection Examples A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) ANSI 7UM62 A(L1)S1 B(L2)S1 C(L3)S1 A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) K17 + Excitation voltage injection do not earth here A(L1)S2 B(L2)S2 C(L3)S2 Measuring transducer: K13 + — Temperature injection low resistance — or DC voltage K15 + injection if necessary… -
Page 506
A Appendix A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) ANSI Earthing transformer 7UM62 with measuring winding A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) For 100 % stator earth fault protection A(L1)S1 B(L2)S1 C(L3)S1 Divider 3PP1326 K17 + Excitation Exc. Rotor earth-current injection A(L1)S2 B(L2)S2 C(L3)S2 Measuring transducer: K13 + — Temperature… -
Page 507
A.4 Connection Examples A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) ANSI 7UM62 A(L1)S1 B(L2)S1 C(L3)S1 Yd11 A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) Divider 3PP1326 K17 + Excitation Exc. Rotor earth current injection A(L1)S2 B(L2)S2 C(L3)S2 For 100 % stator max. 10A Neutral earth-fault protection transformer K13 + Measuring transducer:… -
Page 508
A Appendix 7UM62 K15 + K17 + Exc. Exc. + 12 + 31 K13 + 7KG6 — 32 — 11 (Amplifier) connections shall be twisted and screened max. 10 cm Shunt: 10 A/ 150 mV Figure A-30 Startup Earth Fault Protection Connection of DC Voltage Input TD1 with Series-Connected Amplifier 7KG6 for Systems with Startup Converter Connection to the… -
Page 509
A.4 Connection Examples Connection to the phase-to-phase VT 7UM6 voltage 100 V — 125 V AC Ω 3PP1336 Exc. Ω Figure A-32 Rotor Earth Fault Protection – with series device 7XR61for injection of a rated-frequency voltage into the rotor circuit if the sensitive earth current input is used. -
Page 510
A Appendix A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) ANSI 7UM62 A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) A(L1)S1 B(L2)S1 C(L3)S1 K13 + Measuring transducer for injection of any RTD module analog signal K15 + e.g. speed, 7XV5662 vibration, pressure (6 meas. K17 + junctions) To serial interface A(L1)S2… -
Page 511
A.4 Connection Examples 7UM61 7UM62 A(L1) B(L2) C(L3) Figure A-34 Voltage Transformer Connections for Two Voltage Transformers in Open Delta Connection (V Connection) L1 L2 L3 7UM62 7UM6 A(L1) A(L1), B(L2) B(L2) C(L3) C)L3) Figure A-35 Voltage Transformer Connection with L2 Earthed on the Secondary Side Connection to the phase-to-phase VT voltage… -
Page 512
A Appendix 7UM62 K15 + At gas turbines: Injection of cold gas temperature K17 + Excitation Exc. Auxiliary- 20-Hz- voltage 20-Hz- Generator Bandpass A(L1) 7XT33 7XT34 B(L2) C(L3) External Wiring block 400A Neutral shielded transformer Device operative max 200 V + 12 + 31 K13 +… -
Page 513
A.4 Connection Examples A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) 7UM62 C(L3)S2 A(L1)S2 B(L2)S1 B(L2)S2 C(L3)S1 A(L1)S1 Figure A-38 Earth current differential protection (generator) A (L1) B (L2) C (L3) 7UM62 C(L3)S2 B(L2)S2 B(L2)S1 A(L1)S2 C(L3)S1 A(L1)S1 Figure A-39 Earth current differential protection (transformer) 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3… -
Page 514: Connection Examples For Rtd-Box
A Appendix A.4.1 Connection Examples for RTD-Box 7XV566 A’ 7XV5650 RTD-Box Port D FO/RS485 7UM62 Bus number: 00 Converter A’ and B’ jumpers for the terminating resis- B’ tors 7XV566 A’ RTD-Box Port C or D 7UM62 Bus number: 00 A’…
-
Page 515: 100-% Stator Earth Fault Protection With Primary Load Resistor
A.5 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor Some power systems with generators in unit connection have a load resistor installed directly in the generator starpoint to reduce interference. Figure A-43 shows the con- nection of the 20 Hz generator and the band pass in this application, and the integra- tion of the protection device.
-
Page 516: Protection Settings
A Appendix A.5.1 Protection Settings The settings recommended are the same as in Section 2.29. In addition, the correction angle (address 5309 PHI I SEF) and the ohmic contact resistance of the voltage transformer must be determined during the primary tests, and set at address 5310A SEF Rps.
-
Page 517
A.5 100–% Stator Earth Fault Protection with Primary Load Resistor 3. Insert now on the primary side a resistance which corresponds to the tripping val- ue (e.g. 2 kΩ). Check the measured fault resistance (R SEF=). If this resistance differs very much from the value expected, modify SEF Rps accordingly and, if necessary, make a fine adjustment with the correction angle (PHI I SEF). -
Page 518: Definition Of The Active Power Measurement
A Appendix Definition of the Active Power Measurement The 7UM62 used the generator reference-arrow system. The power output is posi- tive. Figure A-44 Definition of Positive Direction of Reference Arrows Table A-2 shows the operating ranges for synchronous and asynchronous machines. Parameter 1108 ACTIVE POWER is set to Generator.
-
Page 519
A.6 Definition of the Active Power Measurement Table A-2 shows that the operating ranges in generator and motor operation are mir- rored around the reactive power axis. The measured power values also result from the above definition. If, for instance, the forward power monitoring or the reverse power protection is to be used in a synchronous motor, parameter 1108 ACTIVE POWER must be set to Motor. -
Page 520: Current Transformer Requirements
A Appendix Current Transformer Requirements The differential protection is of decisive importance for the requirements that the cur- rent transformers must meet. The highspeed trip stage (IDiff >>) uses instantaneous values and can therefore reliably trip high-current internal short-circuits. The other decisive factor for the requirements that the current transformers must meet are external short-circuits with their possible DC component.
-
Page 521
A.7 Current Transformer Requirements Table A-4 Transformer Requirements Transformer Generator Symmetrical short circuit cur- rent I ⋅ ⋅ ≈ ≈ ——— — I ——- — I ″ pN, Tr pN, G Example = 0.1 ’’ = 0.12 n’ > 40 n’… -
Page 522: Overview Of The Masking Features Of The User Defined Information
A Appendix Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information A.8.1 Source: BI, F, C; Destination: BO, LED, C Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level • Annunciation: Single Point – SP Single Point Indication ON/OFF – –…
-
Page 523
A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level Single Controls negated – C_SN ON/OFF – – – – – C_SN Open/Close – – – – Double Controls 1 Trip 1 Close –… -
Page 524
A Appendix Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level • Control Commands with feedback: Single Controls – CF_S Single Point Indication ON/OFF Control – – – – – SP Feedback – – – CF_S Single Point Indication Open/Close Control –… -
Page 525
A.8 Overview of the Masking Features of the User Defined Information Type of Information Source Destination CFC Task level – CF_D4 Double Point Indication (Breaker indication “00” Control – – – – = not valid/transmitted as “3”) – DP Feedback –… -
Page 526: Destination: Indication Buffer, System Interface
A Appendix A.8.2 Destination: Indication Buffer, System Interface Configuring an In- Two indication buffers are available for selection: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (E) and dication Buffer as a Trip Log (T). The indications from protective functions are firmly assigned to these in- Destination dication buffers.
-
Page 527: Default Settings
A.9 Default Settings Default Settings A.9.1 Binary Inputs Binary input Abbreviation Type of Description information >SV tripped 5086 Binary input 1 SP O/O >Stop valve tripped >Uexc fail. 5328 Binary input 2 >Exc. voltage failure recognized >BLOCK f1 5206 Binary input 3 SP O/O >BLOCK U<…
-
Page 528
A Appendix Binary output Abbreviation Type Description I> TRIP 1815 Output relay 8 OUT O/O Marshalled via the tripping matrix: S/E/F TRIP 5193 OUT O/O U>> TRIP 6573 OUT O/O f1 TRIP 5236 OUT O/O f2 TRIP 5237 OUT O/O EXC<3 TRIP 5343 OUT O/O… -
Page 529
FNro 5098 Pr+SV TRIP FNo 1223 FNo 5568 SEF 3H TRIP IEE>> TRIP FNo 5671 FNo 5128 Pf< TRIP FNo 1226 Diff TRIP IEE> TRIP FNo 5129 FNo 1471 FNo 5691 Diff> Trip Pf> TRIP BrkFailure TRIP FNo 5692 FNo 1521 Diff>>… -
Page 530: Led Indicators
A Appendix A.9.3 LED Indicators Abbreviation Type of Description information Relay TRIP 0511 LED 1 OUT O/O Protective relay has tripped Relay PICKUP 0501 LED 2 OUT O/O Protective relay has picked up I> Fault L1 1811 LED 3 OUT O/O Fault L1 I>…
-
Page 531: Establishing A Default Display
A.9 Default Settings A.9.5 Establishing a Default Display I1: 0.50kA cosϕ: Side 1 Side 2 U : 10.93kV f:50.00Hz 122A 1222A 4.64MW 124A 1243A 2.86MVAR 123A 1231A 0.50kA 6.31kV DIFF STAB 0.50kA 6.30kV 0.00A 0.00A 0.50kA 6.29kV 0.00A 0.00A 0.0A 0.00A 0.00A Figure A-46 Basic Displays of 7UM62…
-
Page 532: Pre-Defined Cfc Charts
A Appendix A.9.7 Pre–Defined CFC Charts ® Some CFC Charts are already supplied with the SIPROTEC device: Device and System The single-point indication “>DataStop“ that can be injected by binary inputs is con- UnlockDT Logic verted by means of a NEGATOR block into an indication “ “…
-
Page 533: Interoperability List
A.10 Interoperability List A.10 Interoperability List Physical layer Electrical interface EIA RS-485 Number of loads for one equipment: 32 Optical interface Glass fibre F-SMA type connector Plastic fibre BFOC/2,5 type connector Transmission speed 9600 bit/s 19200 bit/s Link layer There are no choices for the link layer Application layer Transmission mode for application data Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4…
-
Page 534
A Appendix 3.4.3 Generic functions in control direction Read headings of all defined groups Read values of all entries of one group Read directory of a single entry Read value of a single entry General interrogation of generic data Write entry Write entry with confirmation Write entry with execution Write entry abort… -
Page 535: Functions Overview
A.11 Functions Overview A.11 Functions Overview Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option Enabled FAULT VALUE Disabled Instantaneous Fault values Instantaneous values values RMS values DIFF. PROT. Disabled Enabled Differential Protection Enabled PROT.
-
Page 536
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments IMPEDANCE Disabled Enabled Impedance Protection PROT. Enabled OUT-OF-STEP Disabled Enabled Out-of-Step Protection Enabled UNDERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Undervoltage Protection Enabled OVERVOLTAGE Disabled Enabled Overvoltage Protection Enabled FREQUENCY Prot. Disabled Enabled Over / Underfrequency Protec- Enabled tion OVEREXC. -
Page 537
A.11 Functions Overview Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1 (Port B) Positive Sequence Current I1 [%] Negative Sequence Current I2 [%] Positive Sequence Voltage U1 [%] Active Power |P| [%] Reactive Power |Q| [%] Frequency f [%] |Power Factor| [%] p.u. -
Page 538
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTPUT Disabled Disabled Analog Output D2 (Port D) Positive Sequence Current I1 [%] Negative Sequence Current I2 [%] Positive Sequence Voltage U1 [%] Active Power |P| [%] Reactive Power |Q| [%] Frequency f [%] |Power Factor| [%] p.u. -
Page 539: Settings
A.12 Settings A.12 Settings NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. De- pendent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. Addr.
-
Page 540
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments STARPNT SIDE 1 Power System Isolated Isolated Starpoint of Side 1 is Data 1 Solid Earthed UN-PRI SIDE 2 Power System 0.40..800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage side Data 1 STARPNT SIDE 2 Power System… -
Page 541
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments WAVEFORM Oscillographic Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data DATA Fault Records Power System fault MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic 0.30..5.00 sec 1.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Fault Records Capture Record PRE. -
Page 542
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1401 O/C Ip Inverse O/C Inverse O/C Time Protec- Time Protection tion Ip Block relay for trip commands 1402 Inverse O/C 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Ip Pickup Time Protection 0.05..3.20 sec;… -
Page 543
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1612A Kτ-FACTOR Thermal Over- 1.0..10.0 Kt-Factor when Motor load Protection Stops 1615A I MAX THERM. Thermal Over- 0.50..8.00 A 3.30 A Maximum Current for Ther- load Protection mal Replica 1616A T EMERGENCY Thermal Over- 10..15000 sec… -
Page 544
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2021 I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.20 I/InO Pickup Value of Differential tection Curr. 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 2026A T I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.00 sec T I-DIFF> Time Delay tection 0.5..12.0 I/InO;… -
Page 545
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2110 I-REF> Restricted Earth 0.05..2.00 I/InO 0.10 I/InO I-REF> Pickup Fault Protection 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 2112 T I-REF> Restricted Earth 0.00 sec T I-REF> Time Delay Fault Protection 2113A SLOPE Restricted Earth 0.00..0.95 0.25… -
Page 546
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3104 T-SV-CLOSED Reverse Power 1.00 sec Time Delay Short (with Protection Stop Valve) 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 3105A T-HOLD Reverse Power 0.00 sec Pickup Holding Time Protection 3201 FORWARD Forward Power… -
Page 547
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3314 P/SPOL-TPOL Impedance Pro- 0.10..30.00 Ohm 8.00 Ohm Distance betw. Power tection Swing — Trip-Pol. 3315 dZ/dt Impedance Pro- 1.0..600.0 Ohm/s 300.0 Ohm/s Rate of Change of dZ/dt tection 3316A BLOCKING OF Impedance Pro- Zone Z1… -
Page 548
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4006A U< DOUT RATIO Undervoltage 1.01..1.20 1.05 U< Drop Out Ratio Protection 4101 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Overvoltage Protection Protection Block relay for trip commands 4102 U> Overvoltage 30.0..170.0 V 115.0 V U>… -
Page 549
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4213 T f4 Frequency Pro- 0.00..100.00 sec 10.00 sec T f4 Time Delay tection 4214 THRESHOLD f4 Frequency Pro- Freq. prot. stage Freq. prot. stage Handling of Threshold tection automatic automatic Stage f4… -
Page 550
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4403 T MUL Inverse Under- 0.10..5.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec Time Multiplier for Charac- voltage Protec- teristic tion 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 4404 T Up< Inverse Under- 0.00 sec T Up< Time Delay voltage Protec- tion 4501… -
Page 551
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4514 df4/dt >/< Rate-of-fre- -df/dt< negative rate -df/dt< negative rate Mode of Threshold (df4/dt quency-change of freq. change of freq. change >/<) protection +df/dt> positive rate of freq. change 0.1..10.0 Hz/s;… -
Page 552
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5002 U0> Stator Earth 2.0..125.0 V 10.0 V U0> Pickup Fault Protection 5003 3I0> Stator Earth 2..1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup Fault Protection 0..360 ° 15 ° 5004 DIR. -
Page 553
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5301 100% SEF-PROT. 100% Stator- 100% Stator-Earth-Fault Earth-Fault Pro- Protection tection Block relay for trip commands 5302 R< SEF ALARM 100% Stator- 20..700 Ohm 100 Ohm Pickup Value of Alarm Earth-Fault Pro- Stage Rsef<… -
Page 554
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6007 R SERIES Rotor Earth 0..999 Ohm 50 Ohm Series Resistance (e.g. Fault Protection Meas. Brushes) 6008 I RE< Rotor Earth 1.0..50.0 mA; 0 2.0 mA Pickup Value of Failure Fault Protection Detection Ire<… -
Page 555
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6602 IStart/IMOTnom Restart Inhibit 1.5..10.0 I Start / I Motor nominal for Motors 6603 T START MAX Restart Inhibit 3.0..320.0 sec 8.5 sec Maximum Permissible Star- for Motors ting Time 6604 T EQUAL Restart Inhibit… -
Page 556
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7201 DC PROTECTION DC Voltage/ DC Voltage/Current Protec- Current Protec- tion tion Block relay for trip commands 7202 MEAS.METHOD DC Voltage/ Mean Value Mean Value Measurement Method Current Protec- Root Mean Square (MEAN/RMS Values) tion… -
Page 557
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8107 BAL. FACT. I S2 Measurement 0.10..0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Supervision Monitor S2 8108 SUM.thres. U Measurement 10..200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt. Supervision Monitoring 8109 SUM.Fact. -
Page 558
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8505 MEAS. VALUE 3> Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Thres- supervision Active Power P hold MV3> Reactive Power Q Change of Active Power Delta P Positive Sequence Voltage U1 Negative Sequence Voltage U2 Zero Sequence Cur-… -
Page 559
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8511 MEAS. VALUE 6< Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Thres- supervision Active Power P hold MV6< Reactive Power Q Change of Active Power Delta P Positive Sequence Voltage U1 Negative Sequence Voltage U2 Zero Sequence Cur-… -
Page 560
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1 RTD-Box RTD 1: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -50..250 °C;… -
Page 561
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9042A RTD 4 LOCATION RTD-Box Other RTD 4: Location Ambient Winding Bearing Other -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C 9043 RTD 4 STAGE 1 RTD-Box RTD 4: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -58..482 °F;… -
Page 562
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9071A RTD 7 TYPE RTD-Box not connected not connected RTD 7: Type Pt 100 Ohm Ni 120 Ohm Ni 100 Ohm 9072A RTD 7 LOCATION RTD-Box Other RTD 7: Location Ambient Winding Bearing… -
Page 563
A.12 Settings Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments -50..250 °C; ∞ 120 °C 9095 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 248 °F 9096 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9101A RTD10 TYPE RTD-Box… -
Page 564
A Appendix Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments -50..250 °C; ∞ 100 °C 9123 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD-Box RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -58..482 °F; ∞ 212 °F 9124 RTD12 STAGE 1 RTD-Box RTD12: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup -50..250 °C;… -
Page 565: List Of Information
A.13 List of Information A.13 List of Information NOTE: The following table lists all data which are available in the maximum complement of the device. De- pendent on the ordered model, only those data may be present which are valid for the individual version. The symbol ’…
-
Page 566
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 00113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Supervision 00125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device 00140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Supervision Sum Alarm) 00147 Error Power Supply (Error PwrSupply) Supervision 00160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Supervision… -
Page 567
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 00210 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from Supervision settingS1 (Err1A/5AwrongS1) 00211 Err:1A/5Ajumper different from Supervision settingS2 (Err1A/5AwrongS2) 00212 Err: TD1 jumper different from setting Supervision (Err. TD1 jumper) 00213 Err: TD2 jumper different from setting Supervision (Err. -
Page 568
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 00402 >Q MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Q MiMa Min/Max Measure- Reset) ment Setup 00407 >Frq. MIN/MAX Buffer Reset (>Frq Min/Max Measure- MiMa Reset) ment Setup 00409 >BLOCK Op Counter (>BLOCK Op Statistics LED BI Count) -
Page 569
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 01233 Earth current prot. is BLOCKED (IEE Sensitive Earth BLOCKED) Current Protection 01234 Earth current prot. is ACTIVE (IEE Sensitive Earth ACTIVE) Current Protection 01403 >BLOCK breaker failure (>BLOCK Breaker Failure LED BI… -
Page 570
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 01508 >Failure temperature input Thermal Overload LED BI (>Fail.Temp.inp) Protection 01511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload (Th.Overload OFF) Protection 01512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOK- Thermal Overload KED (Th.Overload BLK) Protection 01513 Overload Protection ACTIVE (Over-… -
Page 571
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 01809 O/C I>> TRIP (I>> TRIP) O/C I>> (with direc- tion) 01811 O/C fault detection stage I> phase L1 O/C I> (with under- (I> Fault L1) voltage seal-in) 01812 O/C fault detection stage I>… -
Page 572
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 01966 O/C prot. stage I> is BLOCKED (I> O/C I> (with under- BLOCKED) voltage seal-in) 01967 O/C prot. stage I> is ACTIVE (I> O/C I> (with under- ACTIVE) voltage seal-in) 01970 O/C prot. -
Page 573
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 04526 >Trigger external trip 1 (>Ext trip 1) External Trip LED BI Functions 04531 External trip 1 is switched OFF (Ext 1 External Trip OFF) Functions 04532 External trip 1 is BLOCKED (Ext 1… -
Page 574
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 04576 External trip 3: General picked up (Ext External Trip 3 picked up) Functions 04577 External trip 3: General TRIP (Ext 3 External Trip Gen.TRP) Functions 04583 >BLOCK external trip 4 (>BLOCK Ext External Trip LED BI… -
Page 575
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05002 Suitable measured quantities present Power System Data (Operat. Cond.) 05010 >BLOCK fuse failure monitor (>FFM Supervision LED BI BLOCK) 05011 >FFM extern undervoltage (>FFM U< Supervision LED BI extern) -
Page 576
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05086 >Stop valve tripped (>SV tripped) Reverse Power LED BI Protection 05091 Reverse power prot. is switched OFF Reverse Power (Pr OFF) Protection 05092 Reverse power protection is BLOK- Reverse Power KED (Pr BLOCKED) Protection… -
Page 577
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05145 >Reverse Phase Rotation (>Reverse Power System Data LED BI Rot.) 05146 >Reset memory for thermal replica I2 Unbalance Load LED BI (>RM th.rep. I2) (Negative Sequence) 05147 Phase Rotation L1L2L3 (Rotation… -
Page 578
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05183 Stator earth fault protection is ACTIVE Stator Earth Fault (S/E/F ACTIVE) Protection 05186 Stator earth fault: U0 picked up (U0> Stator Earth Fault picked up) Protection 05187 Stator earth fault: U0 stage TRIP (U0>… -
Page 579
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05233 f2 picked up (f2 picked up) Frequency Protec- tion 05234 f3 picked up (f3 picked up) Frequency Protec- tion 05235 f4 picked up (f4 picked up) Frequency Protec- tion 05236 f1 TRIP (f1 TRIP) -
Page 580
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05331 Underexc. prot. is switched OFF Underexcitation (Excit. OFF) Protection 05332 Underexc. prot. is BLOCKED Underexcitation (Excit.BLOCKED) Protection 05333 Underexc. prot. is ACTIVE Underexcitation (Excit.ACTIVE) Protection 05334 Underexc. -
Page 581
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05372 Overexc. prot.: TRIP of th. stage (U/f> Overexcitation Pro- th.TRIP) tection (U/f) 05373 Overexc. prot.: U/f>> picked up (U/f>> Overexcitation Pro- pick.up) tection (U/f) 05381 >BLOCK rotor earth fault prot. -
Page 582
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05401 Failure REF protection (1-3Hz) (Fail Rotor Earth Fault REF 1-3Hz) Protection (1-3Hz) 05403 REF prot. (1-3Hz): warning stage Rotor Earth Fault (Re<) (REF 1-3Hz Warn) Protection (1-3Hz) 05406 REF prot. -
Page 583
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05504 >BLOCK df1/dt stage (>df1/dt block) Rate-of-frequency- LED BI change protection 05505 >BLOCK df2/dt stage (>df2/dt block) Rate-of-frequency- LED BI change protection 05506 >BLOCK df3/dt stage (>df3/dt block) Rate-of-frequency- LED BI change protection… -
Page 584
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05543 Inadvert. Energ. prot. is ACTIVE (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- ACTIVE) sation 05546 Release of the current stage (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- release) sation 05547 Inadvert. Energ. prot.: picked up (I.En. Inadvertent Energi- picked up) sation… -
Page 585
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05581 >BLOCK Vector Jump (>VEC JUMP Jump of Voltage LED BI block) Vector 05582 Vector Jump is switched OFF (VEC Jump of Voltage JUMP OFF) Vector 05583 Vector Jump is BLOCKED (VEC JMP Jump of Voltage… -
Page 586
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05652 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault L2 (Diff Differential Protec- Bl. exF.L2) tion 05653 Diff. prot.: Blocked by ext. fault.L3 (Diff Differential Protec- Bl. exF.L3) tion 05657 Diff: Crossblock by 2.Harmonic Differential Protec-… -
Page 587
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 05702 Diff. current in phase L2 at trip (Diff Differential Protec- L2:) tion 05703 Diff. current in phase L3 at trip (Diff Differential Protec- L3:) tion 05704 Restr. -
Page 588
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 06506 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U< Undervoltage Pro- LED BI (>BLOCK U<) tection 06508 >BLOCK undervoltage protection U<< Undervoltage Pro- LED BI (>BLOCK U<<) tection 06513 >BLOCK overvoltage protection Overvoltage Protec- LED BI (>BLOCK O/V) -
Page 589
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 06565 Overvoltage protection switched OFF Overvoltage Protec- (Overvolt. OFF) tion 06566 Overvoltage protection is BLOCKED Overvoltage Protec- (Overvolt. BLK) tion 06567 Overvoltage protection is ACTIVE Overvoltage Protec- (Overvolt. -
Page 590
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 06853 >Trip circuit supervision: breaker relay Trip Circuit Supervi- LED BI (>TripC brk rel.) sion 06861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC Trip Circuit Supervi- OFF) sion 06862 Trip circuit supervision is BLOCKED Trip Circuit Supervi- (TripC BLOCKED) -
Page 591
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 14123 RTD 2 Temperature stage 2 picked up RTD-Box (RTD 2 St.2 p.up) 14131 Fail: RTD 3 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box (Fail: RTD 3) 14132 RTD 3 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD-Box (RTD 3 St.1 p.up) 14133 RTD 3 Temperature stage 2 picked up… -
Page 592
A Appendix F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 14181 Fail: RTD 8 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box (Fail: RTD14182 RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 picked up RTD-Box (RTD 8 St.1 p.up) 14183 RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 picked up RTD-Box (RTD 8 St.2 p.up) 14191 Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted)
-
Page 593
A.13 List of Information F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 Infor- matio 30609 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L3 Statistics S1 (ΣIL3 S1:) 30610 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L1 Statistics S2 (ΣIL1 S2:) 30611 Accumulation of interrupted curr. L2 Statistics S2 (ΣIL2 S2:) 30612 Accumulation of interrupted curr. -
Page 594: List Of Measured Values
A Appendix A.14 List of Measured Values F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 00605 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measure- priv ment 00606 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measure- priv ment 00621 U L1-E (UL1E=) Measure- priv ment 00622 U L2-E (UL2E=) Measure-…
-
Page 595
A.14 List of Measured Values F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 00662 DC Current (I DC =) Measure- ment 00693 REF(R,fn): Total Resistance (R total) (Rtot =) Measure- ment 00696 REF(R,fn): Total Reactance (X total) (Xtot =) Measure- ment 00697 REF(R,fn): Phase Angle of Z total (ϕ… -
Page 596
A Appendix F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 00802 Temperature rise for phase L1 (Θ /ΘtripL1=) Thermal Measure- ment 00803 Temperature rise for phase L2 (Θ /ΘtripL2=) Thermal Measure- ment 00804 Temperature rise for phase L3 (Θ /ΘtripL3=) Thermal Measure- ment… -
Page 597
A.14 List of Measured Values F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 00883 Frequency Maximum (fMax=) Min/Max Measure- ment Setup 00888 Pulsed Energy Wp (active) (Wp(puls)) Energy 00889 Pulsed Energy Wq (reactive) (Wq(puls)) Energy 00894 DC voltage (U DC =) Measure- ment 00896… -
Page 598
A Appendix F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 01071 Temperature of RTD 4 (Θ RTD 4 =) Thermal priv Measure- ment 01072 Temperature of RTD 5 (Θ RTD 5 =) Thermal priv Measure- ment 01073 Temperature of RTD 6 (Θ RTD 6 =) Thermal priv Measure-… -
Page 599
A.14 List of Measured Values F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix 07749 Phase angle in phase IL3 side 1 (ϕIL3S1=) Measure- ment 07750 Phase angle in phase IL1 side 2 (ϕIL1S2=) Measure- ment 07759 Phase angle in phase IL2 side 2 (ϕIL2S2=) Measure- ment 07760… -
Page 600: Protocol-Dependent Functions
A Appendix A.15 Protocol-Dependent Functions → IEC 60870–5–103 Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus ASCII/RTU Additional inter- Protocol face ß Function (optional) Operational measured values Metered values Fault recording No. Only via addi- No. Only via additional tional service inter- service interface face Remote relay setting No.
-
Page 601: Index
Corrections From Siemens AG Name: Dept. PTD PA D DM D–13623 Berlin Company/Dept.: Germany Address: Dear reader, printing errors can never be entirely eliminated: therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.: ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to- gether with any comments or suggestions for im- provement that you may have.
-
Page 602
All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of a patent or the registration of a utility model or design. Subject to technical alteration Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-no.: C53000-G1176-C149-3 Available from: LZF Fürth-Bislohe Printed in Germany/Imprimé en Allemagne…
Hide thumbs
Also See for SIPROTEC 7UM62:
- Manual (94 pages)
- Manual (602 pages)
,
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
SIPROTEC
Multifunctional Machine
Protection
7UM62
V4.6
Manual
C53000-G1176-C149-7
Preface
Contents
Introduction
Functions
Mounting and Commissioning
Technical Data
Appendix
Literature
Glossary
Index
1
2
3
4
A
Related Manuals for Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62
Summary of Contents for Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62
-
Page 1
Preface Contents Introduction SIPROTEC Functions Multifunctional Machine Mounting and Commissioning Protection 7UM62 Technical Data Appendix V4.6 Literature Manual Glossary Index C53000-G1176-C149-7… -
Page 2
SIPROTEC, SINAUT, SICAM and DIGSI are registered trademarks Document Version V04.63.00 of Siemens AG. Other designations in this manual might be trade- marks whose use by third parties for their own purposes would in- Release date 03.2010 fringe the rights of the owner. -
Page 3
Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage directive 2006/95 EC). This conformity is proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance with the Council Directives in agreement with the generic standards EN61000-6-2 and EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directive, and with the standard EN 60255-27 for the low-voltage directive. -
Page 4
Additional Support Should further information on the System SIPROTEC 4 be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purpose, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens rep- resentative. Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service. -
Page 5
Preface Safety Information This manual does not constitute a complete index of all required safety measures for operation of the equip- ment (module, device), as special operational conditions may require additional measures. However, it com- prises important information that should be noted for purposes of personal safety as well as avoiding material damage. -
Page 6
The operational equipment (device, module) may only be used for such applications as set out in the catalogue and the technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended or approved by Siemens. The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, storage, installation, opera- tion, and maintenance. -
Page 7
Preface Typographic and Symbol Conventions The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the device appear in the text flow: Parameter Names Designators of configuration or function parameters which may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer (with operation software DIGSI), are marked in bold letters in monospace type style. -
Page 8
Preface Besides these, graphical symbols are used in accordance with IEC 60617-12 and IEC 60617-13 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below: analog input values AND-gate operation of input values OR-gate operation of input values Exclusive OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one of the inputs is active Coincidence gate: output is active, if both inputs are active or inactive at the same time… -
Page 9
Contents Introduction…………….21 Overall Operation. -
Page 10
Contents Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In….65 2.8.1 Function Description …………65 2.8.2 Setting Notes . -
Page 11
Contents 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) ……..128 2.15.1 Function Description . -
Page 12
Contents 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) ……….. . . 181 2.23.1 Functional Description . -
Page 13
Contents 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) … .223 2.31.1 Function Description …………223 2.31.2 Setting Notes . -
Page 14
Contents 2.39 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) ……….268 2.39.1 Functional Description . -
Page 15
Contents 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes……….316 2.46.1 Function Description . -
Page 16
Contents 2.50 Command Processing…………. 349 2.50.1 Control Device. -
Page 17
Contents Commissioning …………..400 3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block . -
Page 18
Contents 4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) ……..482 4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) . -
Page 19
Contents 4.39 Dimensions …………..525 4.39.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size ) . -
Page 20
Contents A.10 Measured Values …………..616 Literature. -
Page 21
Introduction This chapter introduces the SIPROTEC 4 7UM62. It provides an overview of the scopes of application, features and of the functional scope. Overall Operation Application Scope Characteristics SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 22
Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation Overall Operation The digital multifunctional protective relay 7UM62 is equipped with a high performance microprocessor. All tasks such as the acquisition of the measured values and issuing of commands to circuit breakers and other switching equipment are processed digitally. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device. Analog Inputs The measuring inputs (MI) section effect a gavanic isolation. -
Page 23
Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation The device has 8 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are used on each side of the protected object for measuring of the phase currents. 2 current inputs are equipped with sensitive input transformers (I and can measure secondary currents in the mA range. -
Page 24
Introduction 1.1 Overall Operation Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display (LCD) on the front panel provide information on the functional status of the device and report events, states and measured values. The integrated control keys and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD enable local interaction with the device. -
Page 25
Introduction 1.2 Application Scope Application Scope The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 is a numerical machine protection unit from the „7UM6 Numerical Protection“ series. It provides all functions necessary for protection of generators, motors and transformers. As the scope of func- tions of the 7UM62 can be customized, it is suited for small, medium-sized and large generators. The device fulfills the protection requirements for the two typical basic connections: •… -
Page 26
Introduction 1.2 Application Scope Messages and Measured Values; Recording of Event and Fault Data The operational indications provide information about conditions in the power system and the device itself. Measurement quantities and resulting computed values can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces. -
Page 27
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Characteristics General Features • Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system. • Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from sampling and digitalization of measured quantities to tripping circuit breakers or other switchgear devices. • Total galvanic and disturbance-immune separation between the internal processing stages of the device and the measuring, control and supply circuits of the system using measurement transducers, binary input and output modules and and the DC converters. -
Page 28
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Thermal Overload Protection 49 • Temperature image of current heat losses (overload protection with full memory capability, single body thermal model). • Additional adjustable warning levels based on temperature rise and current magnitude. • Consideration of coolant and ambient temperatures possible. Negative Sequence Protection 46-1, 46-2, 46-TOC •… -
Page 29
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Reverse Power Protection • Calculation of power from positive sequence components. • Highly sensitive and precise active power measurement (detection of small motoring powers even with low power factor cos ϕ, angle error compensation). • Insensitive to power fluctuations. •… -
Page 30
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Frequency Protection 81 O/U • Monitoring on undershooting (f<) and/or overshooting (f>) with 4 frequency limits and delay times that are independently adjustable. • Insensitive to harmonics and abrupt phase angle changes. • Settable undervoltage threshold. Overexcitation Protection •… -
Page 31
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics 100 % Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Bias Voltage • Evaluation of the 20 Hz measurement (7XT33 and 7XT34). • Warning and trip stage R< and R<<. • Trip stage with earth current. • High sensitivity also with large stator earth capacitances. Earth Current Protection B •… -
Page 32
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics Restart Inhibit for Motors 66 • Approximate computation of rotor overtemperature. • Startup is permitted only if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete startup • Calculation of waiting time until restarting is enabled. • Different prolongation of cooldown time constants for standstill/operation period is taken into consideration. •… -
Page 33
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics User-defined Functions • Internal and external signals can be logically combined to establish user-defined logic functions. • All common logic functions (AND, OR, NOT, Exclusive OR, etc.). • Time delays and limit value interrogations. • Processing of measured values, including zero suppression, adding a knee characteristic for a transducer input, and live-zero monitoring. -
Page 34
Introduction 1.3 Characteristics SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 35
Functions This chapter describes the individual functions of the SIPROTEC 4 device 7UM62. It shows the setting possi- bilities for each function in maximum configuration. Guidelines for establishing setting values and, where re- quired, formulae are given. Based on the following information, it can also be determined which of the provided functions should be used. Introduction, Reference Power System Device Ethernet EN100 Modul… -
Page 36
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 2.32… -
Page 37
Functions 2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System Introduction, Reference Power System The following section will explain the individual protection and additional functions and provide information about the setting values. 2.1.1 Functional Description Generator The calculation examples are based on two reference power systems with the two typical basic configurations busbar connection and unit connection. -
Page 38
Functions 2.1 Introduction, Reference Power System Technical Data of the Reference Power Systems Generator = 5.27 MVA N, G = 6.3 kV N, G = 483 A N, G cos ϕ = 0.8 Current transformer: = 500 A; = 1 A N,prim N, sec Toroidal c.t.:… -
Page 39
Functions 2.2 Device Device The device can issue a serie of general annunciations about itself and the substation. These annunciations are listed in the following information list. Most annunciations are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below: Reset: Device is reset on each Power ON. Initial Start: Initial start occurs after initialization of the device by DIGSI. -
Page 40
Functions 2.2 Device Note Setting address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD to (Target on TRIP) is only reasonable if address 615 T MIN LED HOLD is set to 0. Figure 2-3 Creation of the resetting command for stored LEDs / relays Default display of a 4-line display After startup of the device featuring a 4-line display, measured values are displayed by default. -
Page 41
Functions 2.2 Device 2.2.3 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation Reset LED IntSP Reset LED Test mode IntSP Test mode DataStop IntSP Stop data transmission UnlockDT IntSP Unlock data transmission via BI >Light on >Back Light on SynchClock IntSP_Ev Clock Synchronization HWTestMod… -
Page 42
Functions 2.3 Ethernet EN100 Modul Ethernet EN100 Modul 2.3.1 Functional Description An Ethernet EN100 Modul allows to integrate the 7UM62 into 100 Mbit Ethernet communication networks used by process control and automation systems and running IEC 61850 protocols. This standard provides consistent inter-relay communication without gateways or protocol converters. -
Page 43
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Functional Scope The 7UM62 device incorporates numerous protection and supplementary functions. The hardware and firm- ware provided is designed for this scope of functions. Nevertheless a few restrictions apply to the use of the earth fault current and earth fault voltage inputs I and U respectively. -
Page 44
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope 2.4.2 Setting Notes Peculiarities Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below. If the setting group change function has to be used, address 103 Grp Chge OPTION must be set to enabled. In this case, it is possible to apply two groups of settings for function parameters (refer also to Section 2.6) al- lowing convenient and fast switch-over between these setting groups. -
Page 45
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Protection function Side 1 Side 2 L1S1 L2S1 L1S2 L2S2 L3S1 L3S2 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Fixed – – – Fixed – – Undervoltage Protection Fixed – – – – – – Overvoltage Protection Fixed – –… -
Page 46
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Figure 2-4 Use as Generator Differential Protection Figure 2-5 Use as Block Differential Protection (Overall Protection) For the following application, the settings of the generator data under P.System Data 1 must be same as for the transformer data of side 2: Figure 2-6 Use as Transformer Differential Protection For the following application, the differential protection of device A must be set to Generator/Motor, in the… -
Page 47
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Figure 2-7 Use as Redundant Overall Protection For earth fault protection, Address 150 S/E/F PROT. presents the options non-dir. U0, non-dir. U0&I0 and directional, unless the whole function is Disabled. The first option evaluates only the displacement voltage (to be used with unit connection). -
Page 48
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope 2.4.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option Enabled FAULT VALUE Disabled Instant. values Fault values Instant. values RMS values O/C PROT. I> Disabled Side 2 Overcurrent Protection I>… -
Page 49
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments INV.UNDERVOLT. Disabled Enabled Inverse Undervoltage Protection Enabled Up< df/dt Protect. Disabled 2 df/dt stages Rate-of-frequency-change protec- 2 df/dt stages tion 4 df/dt stages VECTOR JUMP Disabled Enabled Jump of Voltage Vector Enabled S/E/F PROT. -
Page 50
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTP B1/1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1/1 (Port B) I1 [%] I2 [%] IEE1 [%] IEE2 [%] U1 [%] U0 [%] U03H [%] |P| [%] |Q| [%] |S| [%] f [%] U/f [%] PHI [%]… -
Page 51
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTP D1/1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output D1/1 (Port D) I1 [%] I2 [%] IEE1 [%] IEE2 [%] U1 [%] U0 [%] U03H [%] |P| [%] |Q| [%] |S| [%] f [%] U/f [%] PHI [%]… -
Page 52
Functions 2.4 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input Port C Port D RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec- 6 RTD HDX tion Type 12 RTD HDX ANALOGOUTP B1/2 Disabled Disabled… -
Page 53
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Power System Data 1 The device requires some plant and power system data to adapt its functions to the actual application. These include, for instance, rated power system and transformer data, measured quantity polarities and connection, breaker properties etc. -
Page 54
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Figure 2-9 Current transformer starpoints in transverse differential protection — Example Nominal Values of the Transformers on Side 1 At addresses 202 IN-PRI I-SIDE1 and 203 IN-SEC I-SIDE1 information is entered regarding the primary and secondary nominal currents of the CTs of side 1. -
Page 55
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Connection At address 223 UE CONNECTION, the user specifies to the device which type of voltage is connected to the input. The device establishes from this information the type of processing involved. The U input is used for either the various stator earth fault protection functions or for rotor earth fault protection using the rated frequen- cy measurement method (see Section 2.34). -
Page 56
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 In this context, U is the primary voltage (generally phase-ground voltage) and U is the secondary VT, prim E, sec displacement voltage applied to the device. If a voltage divider is used, its division ratio also influences this factor. -
Page 57
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 For the overcurrent protection functions (Sections 2.8, 2.9, and 2.10) and for the breaker failure protection, sides 1 and 2 can be allocated freely. If the differential protection is set to 120 3 phase transf., the following normalizing factors apply for the primary side protection settings in DIGSI. -
Page 58
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Phase Rotation Address 271 PHASE SEQ. is used to change the default phase sequence (L1 L2 L3 for clockwise rotation), if your power system permanently has an anti-clockwise phase sequence (L1 L3 L2). A temporary reversal of rotation is also possible using binary inputs (see Section 2.47). -
Page 59
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Measuring Transducer 1 Measuring transducer 1 is provided for DC voltage/DC current protection or the rotor earth fault protection with ). Depending on the application, select at address 295 TRANSDUCER 1 one of the alternatives 1 to 3 Hz (U Control 10 V, 4-20 mA or 20 mA. -
Page 60
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 2.5.2 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. -
Page 61
Functions 2.5 Power System Data 1 Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments SN TRANSFORMER 0.20 .. 5000.00 MVA 5.30 MVA Rated Apparent Power of the Transformer UN GEN/MOTOR 0.40 .. 800.00 kV 6.30 kV Rated Primary Voltage Generator/Motor SN GEN/MOTOR 0.20 .. -
Page 62
Functions 2.6 Change Group Change Group Two independent groups of parameters can be set for the device functions. During operation, the user can switch between setting groups locally using the operator panel, binary inputs (if so configured), the operator and service interface from a personal computer or via the system interface. A setting group comprises the setting values for all functions that have been configured as Enabled (see Section 2.4). -
Page 63
Functions 2.7 Power System Data 2 Power System Data 2 The general protection data (P.System Data 2) include settings associated with all functions rather than a specific protection or monitoring function. Parameter settings P.System Data 2 can be switched using the setting group. -
Page 64
Functions 2.7 Power System Data 2 2.7.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP Relay TRIP Relay GENERAL TRIP command IL1 S1: Primary fault current IL1 Side1 IL2 S1: Primary fault current IL2 Side1 IL3 S1: Primary fault current IL3 Side1 IL1 S2: Primary fault current IL1 Side2… -
Page 65
Functions 2.8 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In The time-overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network components if faults there are not discon- nected in time thus endangering the protected object. -
Page 66
Functions 2.8 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In Figure 2-12 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Stage I> with Undervoltage Seal-In 2.8.2 Setting Notes General Overcurrent protection is only effective and available if address 112 O/C PROT. I> is set to Side 1 or Side 2 during configuration. -
Page 67
Functions 2.8 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In Undervoltage Seal-In The 1205 U< undervoltage stage (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage admissible during operation, e.g. 80 V. The seal-in time 1206 T-SEAL-IN limits the pickup seal-in introduced by the overcurrent/undervoltage. It must be set to a value higher than the T I>… -
Page 68
Functions 2.8 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>, ANSI 50/51) with Undervoltage Seal-In 2.8.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. -
Page 69
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection The time-overcurrent protection is used as backup protection for the short-circuit protection of the protected object. It also provides backup protection for downstream network components if faults there are not discon- nected in time thus endangering the protected object. -
Page 70
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Figure 2-14 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination The phase carrying the highest current is selected for the direction decision. With equal current levels, the phase with the smaller number is chosen (I before I before I ). -
Page 71
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Figure 2-15 Logic Diagram of I>> Stage with Direction Element SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 72
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection 2.9.2 Setting Notes General The high-current stage I>> of the overcurrent protection is only effective and accessible if it has been assigned within the framework of configuration at address 113 O/C PROT. I>> to either side 1 or side 2, i.e. if either set = NonDirec. -
Page 73
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Current Trans-former on the Output Side (with direction detection) If at address 113 O/C PROT. I>> was configured as directional, the addresses 1304 Phase Direction and 1305 LINE ANGLE are accessible. The inclination of the direction straight line (see figure 2-16) represent- ing the separating line between the tripping and the blocking zone can be adapted to the network conditions by way of the LINE ANGLE parameter. -
Page 74
Functions 2.9 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (I>>, ANSI 50, 51, 67) with Direction Detection Figure 2-17 I>> Stage as ‘Differential Protection’ 2.9.3 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. -
Page 75
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) The inverse-time overcurrent protection protects extra-low voltage and low-voltage machines against short cir- cuits. For larger machines it is used as back-up protection for the machine short-circuit protection (differential protection and/or impedance protection). -
Page 76
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 2-18 Pick-up Value Voltage Dependency The Ip reference value is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for a constant current I, the I/Ip ratio is increased and the trip time is reduced. Compared with the standard characteristics represent- ed in the „Technical Data“… -
Page 77
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 2-19 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection without Undervoltage Influencing Figure 2-20 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Controlled Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection The changeover to the lower current pickup value on decreasing voltage (loop release) is performed on a phase by phase basis in accordance with Table 2-4. -
Page 78
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 2-21 Logic Diagram of the Voltage Restraint Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection The reduction of the current pick-up threshold in case of a decreasing voltage (control voltage assignment) is performed phase by phase according to table 2-4. SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 79
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) 2.10.2 Setting Notes General The inverse overcurrent time protection is only effective and available if this function was allocated to the input CTs of either side 1 or side 2 during configuration (see Section 2.4), i.e. if address 114 O/C PROT. Ip was set to IEC SIDE 1, ANSI SIDE 1, IEC SIDE 2 or ANSI SIDE 2. -
Page 80
Functions 2.10 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) 2.10.3 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1401 O/C Ip Inverse O/C Time Protec- tion Ip Block relay 1402… -
Page 81
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) The thermal overload protection prevents thermal overloading of the stator windings of the machine being pro- tected. 2.11.1 Functional Description Thermal Profile The device calculates the overtemperature in accordance with a single-body thermal model, based on the fol- lowing differential equation: with Actual operating temperature expressed in percent of the operating temperature correspond-… -
Page 82
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Coolant Temperature (Ambient Temperature) With 7UM62, the thermal model considers an external temperature value. Depending on the application, this temperature can be the coolant or ambient temperature or, in the case of gas turbines, the entry temperature of the cold gas. -
Page 83
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Blocking The thermal memory may be reset via a binary input („>RM th.rep. O/L“). The current-induced excessive temperature value is reset to zero. The same is achieved by entering a blocking („>BLK ThOverload“); in that case the overload protection is blocked completely, including the current alarm stage. -
Page 84
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Figure 2-22 Logic of the Overload Protection Function SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 85
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.11.2 Setting Notes General Overload protection is only effective and accessible if address 116 Therm.Overload is set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required, it is set to Disabled. Transformers and generators are especially prone to damage by extended overloads. These overloads cannot and should not be detected by short-circuit protection. -
Page 86
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Time Constant The overload protection tracks overtemperature progression, employing a thermal differential equation whose steady state solution is an exponential function. The TIME CONSTANT τ (address 1603) is used in the calcu- lation to determine the threshold of excess temperature and thus the tripping temperature. If the overload characteristic of the generator to be protected is pre-determined, the user must select the pro- tection trip characteristic so that it largely corresponds the overload characteristic, at least for small overloads. -
Page 87
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Emergency Start The run-on time to be entered at address 1616 T EMERGENCY must be sufficient to ensure that after an emer- gency startup and dropout of binary input „>Emer.Start O/L“ the trip command is blocked until the thermal replica is again below the dropout threshold. -
Page 88
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) If the temperature input is used, the trip times change if the coolant temperature deviates from the internal ref- erence temperature of 40 °C. The following formula can be used to calculate the trip time: with TIME CONSTANT (address 1603) τ… -
Page 89
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.11.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. -
Page 90
Functions 2.11 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 2.11.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 1503 >BLK ThOverload >BLOCK thermal overload protection 1506 >RM th.rep. O/L >Reset memory for thermal replica O/L 1507 >Emer.Start O/L >Emergency start O/L 1508 >Fail.Temp.inp >Failure temperature input 1511… -
Page 91
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) The unbalanced load protection detects asymmetrical loads of three-phase induction machines. Unbalanced loads create a counter-rotating field which acts on the rotor at double frequency. Eddy currents are induced on the rotor surface, leading to local overheating at the transition between the slot wedges and the winding bun- dles. -
Page 92
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Cool Down A cool-down time with adjustable parmeters starts as soon as the constantly permissible unbalanced load I2> is undershot. The tripping drops out on dropout of the pickup. However, the counter content is reset to zero with the cooling time parameterized at address 1705 T COOL DOWN. -
Page 93
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Logic The following figure shows the logic diagram of the unbalanced load protection. The protection may be blocked via a binary input („>BLOCK I2“). Pickups and time stages are reset and the metered values in the thermal replica are cleared. -
Page 94
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 2.12.2 Setting Notes General Unbalanced load protection is only in effect and accessible if address 117 UNBALANCE LOAD is set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required, it is set to Disabled. The address 1701 UNBALANCE LOAD serves to switch the unbalanced load protection ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 95
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Conversion to Secondary Values The factor K can be derived from the unbalanced load characteristic according to the figure below by reading the time corresponding to the FACTOR K at the point I = 1. -
Page 96
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Cool-down Time The parameter 1705 T COOL DOWN establishes the time required by the protection object to cool down under admissible unbalanced load I2> to the initial value. If the machine manufacturer does not provide this informa- tion, the setting value can be calculated by assuming an equal value for cool-down time and heatup time of the object to be protected. -
Page 97
Functions 2.12 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) 2.12.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1701 UNBALANCE LOAD Unbalance Load Protection Block relay 1702 I2> 3.0 .. 30.0 % 10.6 % Continously Permissible Current 1703 T WARN 0.00 .. -
Page 98
Functions 2.13 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) 2.13 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Gas turbines can be started by means of a startup converter. A controlled converter feeds a current into the generator creating a rotating field of gradually increasing frequency. This causes the rotor to turn and thus drive the turbine. -
Page 99
Functions 2.13 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) The startup overcurrent protection is a short-circuit protection function that operates below 10 Hz. Its operating range is designed for 2 Hz to approx. 10 Hz (change to operational condition 1). Beyond this range the above short-circuit protection functions are active. -
Page 100
Functions 2.13 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Figure 2-28 Short-circuit currents in the generator during startup (generator: 300 MVA, 15.75 kV, 50 Hz) Delay Since the generator circuit breaker is open during startup, there is no need to coordinate the delay time with the network. -
Page 101
Functions 2.13 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Figure 2-29 Operating range and possible pickup threshold of short-circuit protection functions 2.13.3 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. -
Page 102
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The numerical current differential protection of the 7UM62 is a high speed selective short-circuit protection for generators, motors and transformers. The individual application can be configured, which ensures optimum matching to the protected object. -
Page 103
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Current Stabilization When an external fault causes heavy currents to flow through the protected zone, differences in the magnetic characteristics of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 under conditions of saturation may cause a significant current to flow through the element M, which can cause a tripping. -
Page 104
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-32 Tripping Characteristic of the Differential Protection with Fault Characteristic Quantitative Matching of Measured values The rated CT currents are matched to the rated current of the protected object, regardless of what that object is. -
Page 105
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The currents II and I are compared by the differential protection with the operating characteristic according diff stab to the following figure. If these values result result in a point within the tripping area, a trip signal is issued. If the current conditions I appear near the fault characteristic (≥… -
Page 106
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Add-On Stabilization During Current Transformer Saturation During an external fault which produces a high through-flowing short-circuit current causing current transformer saturation, a considerable differential current can be simulated, especially when the degree of saturation is dif- ferent at the two measuring points. -
Page 107
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-35 Add-on Stabilization During Current Transformer Saturation Identification of DC Components A further stabilization (restraint) comes into effect when differential secondary currents are simulated by differ- ent transient behaviour of the current transformer sets. This differential current is caused by different DC time constants in the secondary circuits during through-current conditions, i.e. -
Page 108
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Besides the second harmonic, another harmonic can be selected in the 7UM62 to cause stabilization. A choice can be made between the third and fifth harmonic for harmonic stabilization. Steady-state overexcitation is characterized by odd harmonics. The 3rd or 5th harmonic is suitable to detect overexcitation. -
Page 109
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-37 Increase of pickup value for stage I on startup DIFF> Fault Detection, Dropout The differential protection does not normally use a «pickup», since the detection of a fault is identical with the tripping condition. -
Page 110
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects For special cases, the trip command can be delayed. The following figure shows a simplified diagram of the tripping logic. A dropout is detected when, during 2 cycles, pick-up is no longer recognized in the differential value, i.e. the differential current has fallen below 70 % of the set value, and the other pickup conditions are no longer fulfilled either. -
Page 111
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-39 Logic Diagram of the Tripping Logic in Differential Protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 112
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14.1.2 Setting Notes General Differential protection is only effective and available if the type of protected object for this function was set during protective function configuration (Section 2.4, address 120, DIFF. PROT. = Generator/Motor or 3 phase transf.). -
Page 113
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2042A BASE POINT 1 0.00 .. 2.00 I/InO 0.00 I/InO Base Point for Slope 1 of Charac. 2043A SLOPE 2 0.25 .. 0.95 0.50 Slope 2 of Tripping Characteristic 2044A BASE POINT 2 0.00 .. -
Page 114
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Information Type of In- Comments formation 5663 Block Iflt.L2 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L2 5664 Block Iflt.L3 Diff. prot.: Blocked by CT fault L3 5666 Diff in.char.L1 Diff: Increase of char. phase L1 5667 Diff in.char.L2 Diff: Increase of char. -
Page 115
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14.2 Protected Object Generator or Motor The following section describes the special features of the generator and motor as the protection objects. 2.14.2.1 Functional Description Definition and Matching of Measured Quantities The differential protection function of the 7UM62 can be used as longitudinal or as transverse differential pro- tection. -
Page 116
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The CTs also determine the limits of sensitivity in the case of motors. In asynchronous motors, the startup op- eration may be modelled in different ways by the CTs, so that major differential currents occur (see also side title «Increase of Pickup Value on Startup»). -
Page 117
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The second branch produces a higher stabilization in the range of high currents which may lead to current transformer saturation. Its base point is set at address 2044 BASE POINT 2. The gradient is set at address 2043 SLOPE 2. -
Page 118
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14.3 Protected Object Transformer Transformers are subject to a number of influences that induce differential currents even during normal opera- tion: 2.14.3.1 Functional Description Mismatching of CTs Differences in the matching of CTs to the transformer rated current are not uncommon. These differences result in an error that leads to a differential current. -
Page 119
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Quantitative matching of Measured values The input currents are converted in relation to the power transformer rated current. The nominal values of the transformer, i.e. rated apparent power, rated voltages and primary rated CT currents, are entered in the protec- tive device, and a correction factor k is calculated according to the following formula: with… -
Page 120
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-43 Vector group matching for a Yd5 transformer (isolated starpoint) Deducting on side 2 the currents I – I , results in the current I , which has the same direction as I on side 1. -
Page 121
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Figure 2-44 Vector group matching for Y(N) d5 (with earthed starpoint) In the following figure on the left-hand side, a zero sequence current will occur in case of e.g. an external fault; on the right-hand side, it will not. -
Page 122
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14.3.2 Setting Notes Requirement A precondition for the transformer differential protection function is that on configuration address 120 DIFF. PROT. was set to 3 phase transf.. To ensure the correct polarity for the formation of the differential current, the polarity of the sets of CTs must be specified. -
Page 123
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Zero Sequence Current Treatment The treatment of the winding starpoints is of no concern if the zero sequence current is eliminated from the phase currents. By this means fault currents which flow through the CTs during earth faults in the network if there is an earthing point in the protected zone (transformer starpoint or starpoint earthing transformer) are neu- tralized without any special external measures. -
Page 124
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The harmonic restraint operates individually per phase. However, it is also possible – as it is for the inrush re- straint – to set the protection such that not only the phase with harmonics content in excess of the permissible value is stabilized but also the other phases of the differential stage IDIFF>… -
Page 125
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects The second branch produces a higher restraint in the range of high currents which may lead to current trans- former saturation. Its base point is set at address 2044 BASE POINT 2 and is referred to the rated power transformer current. -
Page 126
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects 2.14.4 Current Transformer Requirements The differential protection is of decisive importance for the requirements that the current transformers must meet. The high-speed trip stage (IDiff >>) uses instantaneous values and can therefore reliably trip high-current internal short-circuits. -
Page 127
Functions 2.14 Differential Protection and Its Protected Objects Table 2-6 Transformer Requirements Transformer Generator Transient dimensioning factor K ≥ 4 > (4 to 5), with τ > 100 ms with τ ≤ 100 ms Symmetrical short circuit current I pSSC Example = 0.1 ’’… -
Page 128
Another application would be transformer windings in wye connection. For applications such as auto-transformers, starpoint earthing transformers and shunt reactors, Siemens rec- ommends that the 7UT612 protective device be used instead. -
Page 129
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Measuring Principle The 2 possible implementations of the earth fault differential protection differ only in their method of determining the zero sequence current. This is shown in the following picture. This figure also shows the definition of the current direction. -
Page 130
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Figure 2-49 Example of an external fault When an external non-earthed fault causes heavy currents to flow through the protected zone, differences in the magnetic characteristics of the phase current transformers under conditions of saturation may cause a sig- nificant summation current which resembles an earth current flowing into the protected zone. -
Page 131
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Figure 2-50 Tripping and restraint characteristic In applications with direct measurement of the starpoint current (e.g. earth current differential protection for transformers), the starpoint current is queried in addition to evaluation of the characteristic. This provides ad- ditional restraint against CT problems such as wrong zero sequence current modeling of the phase current transformers on side 1. -
Page 132
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Figure 2-51 Operating ranges of the direction criterion • Phase current monitoring To exclude spurious tripping due to CT saturation in the presence of external faults, the protection function is blocked as soon as a maximum phase current is reached. For this purpose, the phase currents of side 1 are monitored. -
Page 133
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Figure 2-52 Logic Diagram of the Earth Current Differential Protection with 1) Use of generator: always side 1 LxSm Use of transformer: I according to allocation of sides LxSm 2.15.2 Setting Notes General A precondition for the operation of the earth current differential protection is that during the configuration of the scope of functions (Section 2.4) the correct selection for the application in hand was made at address 121 REF… -
Page 134
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Note When using the I input, it must be kept in mind that this is a sensitive current input. The current amplitude is limited to approx. √2 1.6 A. A secondary rated current of 1 A is to be used for the starpoint CT. If a 5-A trans- former is used, the appropriate transformation ratio has to be set. -
Page 135
Functions 2.15 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) 2.15.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2101 REF PROT. Restricted Earth Fault Protection Block relay 2102 REF I>… -
Page 136
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) The underexcitation protection protects a synchronous machine from asynchronous operation in the event of faulty excitation or regulation and from local overheating of the rotor. Furthermore, it prevents that the network stability is endangered by underexcitation of large synchronous machines. -
Page 137
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Figure 2-54 Stator circuit criterion: Pick–Up Characteristic in Admittance Diagram A further characteristic (1/xd CHAR.3 /α can be matched to the dynamic stability characteristic of the synchro- nous machine. Since stable operation is impossible if this characteristic is exceeded, immediate tripping is then required (time stage T CHAR 3). -
Page 138
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Undervoltage Blocking The admittance calculation requires a minimum measurement voltage. During a severe collapse (short-circuit) or failure of stator voltages, the protection is blocked by an integrated AC voltage monitor whose pickup thresh- old 3014 Umin is set on delivery to 25 V. -
Page 139
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 2.16.2 Setting Notes General The underexcitation protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function configuration (Section 2.4), address 130, UNDEREXCIT. is set to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 140
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Figure 2-57 Capability Curve of a Salient-Pole Generator, Indicated per Unit Example: = 6300 V 5270 kVA 50.0 Hz 1500 RPM cos ϕ = 0,800 2,470 1,400 The primary setting values can be read out directly from the diagram. The related values must be converted for the protection setting. -
Page 141
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Instead of 1/x the approximate value I can be used (with I = short-circuit current at no-load excita- d Mach tion). Setting example: Machine = 6.3 kV N Mach /√3 U = 5270 kVA/√3 · 6.3 kV = 483 A N Mach = 2.47 d Mach… -
Page 142
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Delay Times If the static limit curve consisting of the characteristics 1 and 2 is exceeded, the voltage regulator must first have the opportunity of increasing the excitation. For this reason, a warning message due to this criterion is «long- time»… -
Page 143
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 2.16.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3001 UNDEREXCIT. Underexcitation Protection Block relay 3002 1/xd CHAR. 1 0.20 .. -
Page 144
Functions 2.16 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 2.16.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 5323 >Exc. BLOCK >BLOCK underexcitation protection 5327 >Char. 3 BLK. >BLOCK underexc. prot. char. 3 5328 >Uexc fail. >Exc. voltage failure recognized 5329 >Char. 1 BLK. >BLOCK underexc. -
Page 145
Functions 2.17 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 2.17 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) Reverse power protection is used to protect a turbo-generator unit on failure of energy to the prime mover when the synchronous generator runs as a motor and drives the turbine taking motoring energy from the network. This condition leads to overheating of the turbine blades and must be interrupted within a short time by tripping the network circuit-breaker. -
Page 146
Functions 2.17 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) Figure 2-59 Logic Diagram of the Reverse Power Protection 2.17.2 Setting Notes General Reverse power protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function con- figuration (Section 2.4), address 131, REVERSE POWER is set to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 147
Functions 2.17 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) The pickup value 3102 P> REVERSE is set in percent of the secondary apparent power rating S = √3 · U Nsek Nsec · I . If the primary motoring energy is known, it must be converted to secondary quantities using the following Nsec formula: with… -
Page 148
Functions 2.17 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 2.17.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3101 REVERSE POWER Reverse Power Protection Block relay 3102 P>… -
Page 149
Functions 2.18 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 2.18 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) The machine protection 7UM62 includes an active power supervision which monitors whether the active power falls below one settable value as well as whether a separate second settable value is exceeded. Each of these functions can initiate different control functions. -
Page 150
Functions 2.18 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 2.18.2 Setting Notes General Forward active power protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function configuration (Section 2.4, address 132, FORWARD POWER is set to Enabled). If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 151
Functions 2.18 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 2.18.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3201 FORWARD POWER Forward Power Supervision Block relay 3202 Pf<… -
Page 152
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Machine impedance protection is used as a selective time graded protection to provide the shortest possible tripping times for short-circuits in the synchronous machine, on the terminal leads as well as in the unit trans- former. -
Page 153
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Loop Selection The corresponding phase-earth loop is used for a 1-pole pickup With a 2-pole pickup, the phase-phase loop with the corresponding phase-to-phase voltage is used for impedance calculation. With a 3-pole pickup, the phase-earth loop with the highest current value is used and with equal current amplitudes, the procedure described in the last row of the following table is applied. -
Page 154
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Figure 2-61 Logic Diagram of the Pickup Stage of the Impedance Protection Tripping Characteristic The tripping characteristic of the impedance protection is a polygon (see also Figure 2-62). It is symmetrical even though a fault in reverse direction (negative R and/or X values) is physically impossible provided the usual connection to the current transformers at the star-point side of the generator is used. -
Page 155
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Figure 2-62 Tripping Characteristics of the Impedance Protection Tripping Logic The T END time delay is started subsequent to the protection pickup, establishing the fault loop. The loop im- pedance components are compared with the limit values of the zones previously set. The tripping is executed if the impedance is within its zone during the course of the corresponding time stage. -
Page 156
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Figure 2-63 Logic Diagram of the Impedance Protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 157
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 2.19.2 Power Swing Blocking General Dynamic occurrences such as sudden load changes, short circuits, automatic reclosure or switching operations within the power system may cause power swings. Therefore impedance protection is complemented by a power swing blocking function to avoid spurious tripping. -
Page 158
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Figure 2-64 Logic Diagram for the Power Swing Blocking of the Impedance Protection Z(Tent) First value inside the power swing polygon (at the moment of Tent) Z(Tent-Δt) Last value outside the power swing polygon P/SPOL Power swing polygon TPOL… -
Page 159
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Impedance Stages The protection has the following characteristics which may be set independently: 1. Zone (fast tripping zone Z1 ) with parameters ZONE Z1 Reactance = reach, T-Z1 = 0 or short delay, if required. Overreach zone Z1B, externally controlled via binary input, with parameters ZONE Z1B Reactance = reach,… -
Page 160
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Example: Transformer data: = 7 % = 5.3 MVA = 6.3 kV Transformation ratios: Current transformer ratio = 500 A / 1 A This results for a 70 % reach for zone 1 in: The following secondary side setting value of zone 1 results at address 3306 ZONE Z1: Note: The following ratio would result from the connection of a 5 A device to a 5 A transformer: Likewise the following primary reactance results for a 100 % reach for zone 2:… -
Page 161
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Figure 2-65 Time Grading for Machine Impedance Protection – Example Z1B Overreach Zone The Z1B overreach zone (address 3308 ZONE Z1B) is an externally controlled stage. It does not influence the Z1 zone normal stage. Consequently there is no changeover, but the overreach zone is enabled or disabled depending on the position of the high-voltage side circuit breaker. -
Page 162
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) The following relation allows estimation of the rate of change: Definitions: Reactance between the sources of the power swing Swing frequency Swing angle δ Figure 2-66 shows an example of how the rate of change evolves as a function of the power swing angle. For an angle of 180°… -
Page 163
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) If safety factor 4 is chosen, dZ/dt should never be set higher than 500 Ω/s (or 100 Ω/s for 5 A transformers). The default setting for dZ/dt is 300 Ω/s, which should be adequate for most applications. This is also the basis for the minimum distance P/SPOL — TPOL, assuming that for detection of a power swing there must be one impedance value between P/SPOL and TPOL. -
Page 164
Functions 2.19 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3307 T-Z1 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.10 sec Impedance Zone Z1 Time Delay 3308 ZONE Z1B 0.01 .. 13.00 Ω 0.99 Ω Impedance Zone Z1B 0.05 .. 65.00 Ω 4.95 Ω… -
Page 165
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Depending on power network conditions and feeding generators, dynamic occurrences such as load jumps, short-circuits not disconnected quickly enough, auto-reclosure or switching actions, may cause system swings. Such power swings endanger power network stability. Stability problems often result from active power swings which can lead to pole-slipping and generator overloading. -
Page 166
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Thus, this results in: where δ is the phase shift angle between the generator voltage and the network equivalent voltage. Under normal conditions, this angle depends on the load situation and is largely constant. In the event of an out-of- step condition, however the angle fluctuates continually and can vary between 0°… -
Page 167
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Figure 2-68 Impedance Trajectory at Measurement Location m 2.20.2 Out-of-Step Protection Logic The following figure shows the power swing polygon in greater detail. For transparency purposes the inclination angle ϕ is assumed to be 90°. The setting parameters of impedances Z and (Z –Z ) determine the… -
Page 168
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Figure 2-69 Polygonal Out-of-Step Characteristic with Typical Power Swings Detection of an out-of-step condition requires, additionally, that the impedance vector enters a power swing characteristic at one side, passes through the imaginary axis or characteristic dividing line, and exits the polygon at the opposite side (loss of synchronism, cases (1) and (2)). -
Page 169
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Figure 2-70 Logic Diagram of the Out-of-Step Protection 2.20.3 Setting Notes General Out-of-step protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function configu- ration (Section 2.4, address 135, OUT-OF-STEP is set to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 170
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Impedance Values The measured impedances perceived by the protection device are decisive for the settings. For the direction to the machine (as viewed from the location of the voltage transformers), the power swing reactance of the machine must be considered, which is approximately the transient reactance X ‘ of the machine. -
Page 171
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Table 2-11 Transient Machine Reactances (Referred to Secondary Side) Generator Type = 100 V/ I = 1 A = 120 V/ I = 1 A = 100 V/ I = 5 A = 120 V/ I = 5 A Non-salient pole 0,13…0,35 7.5 Ω…20.2 Ω… -
Page 172
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Figure 2-72 Power swing polygon and impedance vectors with angle δ Maximum power swing frequency The polygon width Z determines also the maximum detectable power swing frequency. Considering that even with rapid power swings, at least two impedance values must have been established within the power swing polygon (which in a limit case differ by the width of the polygon), the following approximative formula can be used for the maximum detectable power swing frequency f At a rated frequency of 50 Hz (i.e. -
Page 173
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Transformation ratios: Current Transformer = 500 A/1 A Ratio This gives the secondary transient reactance of the generator: ≈ X ‘ thus determines the setting of address 3505 Zb. The secondary short circuit reactance of the unit transformer is derived by considering the transformation ratios: If characteristic 1 covers 85 % of the transformer reactance, this results in the setting of Z ≈… -
Page 174
Functions 2.20 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 2.20.4 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3501 OUT-OF-STEP Out-of-Step Protection Block relay 3502 I1>… -
Page 175
Functions 2.21 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 2.21 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) The undervoltage protection function detects voltage dips on electrical machines and prevents inadmissible op- erating states and a possible loss of stability. Two-pole short circuits or ground faults cause a dip in asymmet- rical voltages. -
Page 176
Functions 2.21 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Figure 2-73 Logic diagram of the undervoltage protection 2.21.2 Setting Notes General The undervoltage protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function configuration (Section 2.4, address 140, UNDERVOLTAGE is set to Enabled). If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 177
Functions 2.21 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 2.21.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4001 UNDERVOLTAGE Undervoltage Protection Block relay 4002 U< 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V U<… -
Page 178
Functions 2.22 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 2.22 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) Overvoltage protection serves to protect the electrical machine and connected electrical plant components from the effects of inadmissible voltage increases. Overvoltages can be caused by incorrect manual operation of the excitation system, faulty operation of the automatic voltage regulator, (full) load shedding of a generator, separation of the generator from the system or during island operation. -
Page 179
Functions 2.22 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 2.22.2 Setting Notes General Overvoltage protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function config- uration (Section 2.4, address 141, OVERVOLTAGE is set to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 180
Functions 2.22 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 2.22.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4101 OVERVOLTAGE Overvoltage Protection Block relay 4102 U> 30.0 .. 170.0 V 115.0 V U>… -
Page 181
Functions 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) The frequency protection function detects abnormally high and low frequencies in the generator. If the frequen- cy lies outside the permissible range, appropriate switching actions are initiated, e.g. separating the generator from the system. -
Page 182
Functions 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Figure 2-75 Logic diagram of the frequency protection 2.23.2 Setting Notes General Frequency protection is only in effect and accessible if address 142 FREQUENCY Prot. is set to Enabled during configuration of protective functions. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 4201 O/U FREQUENCY serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 183
Functions 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Further application examples are covered under power stations. The frequency values to be set mainly depend, also in these cases, on power system/power station operator specifications. In this context, frequency decrease protection ensures the power station’s own demand by disconnecting it from the power system on time. The turbo regulator regulates the machine set to the nominal speed. -
Page 184
Functions 2.23 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4209 f3 PICKUP 40.00 .. 66.00 Hz 59.50 Hz f3 Pickup 4210 T f3 0.00 .. 100.00 sec 20.00 sec T f3 Time Delay 4211 f4 PICKUP 40.00 .. -
Page 185
Functions 2.24 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 2.24 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Overexcitation protection is used to detect inadmissibly high induction in generators and transformers, espe- cially in power station unit transformers. The protection must intervene when the limit value for the protected object (e.g. -
Page 186
Functions 2.24 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Figure 2-76 Tripping Range of the Overexcitation Protection The characteristic resulting from the device default settings is shown in the Technical Data Section Overexci- tation Protection. Figure 2-76 illustrates the behaviour of the protection on the assumption that within the frame- work of configuration the setting for the pickup threshold (parameter4302 U/f >) was chosen higher or lower than the first setting value of the thermal characteristic. -
Page 187
Functions 2.24 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Figure 2-77 Logic Diagram of the Overexcitation Protection 2.24.2 Setting Notes General Overexcitation protection is only effective and available if address 143 OVEREXC. PROT. is set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required, it is set to Disabled. Address 4301 OVEREXC. PROT. serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 188
Thermal tripping time characteristic (with default settings) The characteristic of a Siemens standard transformer was selected as a default setting for the parameters 4306 to 4313. If the protection object manufacturer did not provide any information, the preset standard char- acteristic should be used. -
Page 189
Functions 2.24 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 2.24.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4301 OVEREXC. PROT. Overexcitation Protection (U/f) Block relay 4302 U/f > 1.00 .. 1.20 1.10 U/f > Pickup 4303 T U/f > 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec T U/f >… -
Page 190
Functions 2.25 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 2.25 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) The inverse undervoltage protection mainly protects consumers (induction machines) from the consequences of dangerous voltage drops in island networks thus avoiding inadmissible operating conditions and possible loss of stability. It can also be used as a criterion for load shedding in interconnected networks. Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause asymmetrical voltage collapse. -
Page 191
Functions 2.25 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Figure 2-79 Logic Diagram of the Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection 2.25.2 Setting Notes General The inverse-time undervoltage protection is only effective and available if this function was set during protective function configuration (Section 2.4, address 144, INV.UNDERVOLT. is set to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. -
Page 192
Functions 2.25 Inverse-Time Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 2.25.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4401 INV. UNDERVOLT. Inverse Undervoltage Protection Up< Block relay 4402 Up< PICKUP 10.0 .. 125.0 V 75.0 V Up< Pickup 4403 T MUL 0.10 .. 5.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec Time Multiplier for Characteristic 4404… -
Page 193
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) With the rate-of-frequency-change protection, frequency changes can be quickly detected. This allows a prompt response to frequency dips or frequency rises. A trip command can be issued even before the pickup threshold of the frequency protection (see Section 2.23) is reached. -
Page 194
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) Figure 2-80 Logic Diagram of the Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 195
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.26.2 Setting Notes General The rate-of-frequency-change protection is only effective and accessible if during the configuration address 145 df/dt Protect. has been set accordingly. The user can select between 2 or 4 stages. The default setting is 2 df/dt stages. -
Page 196
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) Time Delays The delay time should be set to zero wherever the protection function is supposed to respond very quickly. This will be the case with high setting values. For the monitoring of small changes (< 1Hz/s), on the other hand, a small delay time can be useful to avoid overfunctioning. -
Page 197
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.26.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4501 df/dt Protect. Rate-of-frequency-change pro- tection Block relay 4502 df1/dt >/<… -
Page 198
Functions 2.26 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 2.26.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 5503 >df/dt block >BLOCK Rate-of-frequency-change prot. 5504 >df1/dt block >BLOCK df1/dt stage 5505 >df2/dt block >BLOCK df2/dt stage 5506 >df3/dt block >BLOCK df3/dt stage 5507 >df4/dt block >BLOCK df4/dt stage… -
Page 199
Functions 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector Consumers with their own generating plant, for example, feed power directly into a network. The incoming feeder line is usually the technical and legal ownership boundary between the network operator and these con- sumers/producers. -
Page 200
Functions 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector Measuring Principle The vector of the positive sequence system voltage is calculated from the phase-to-earth voltages, and the phase angle change of the voltage vector is determined over a delta interval of 2 cycles. The presence of a phase angle jump indicates an abrupt change of current flow. -
Page 201
Functions 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector Figure 2-83 Logic diagram of the vector jump detection 2.27.2 Setting Notes General The vector jump protection is only effective and available if address 146 VECTOR JUMP is set to Enabled during configuration. Address 4601 VECTOR JUMP serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 202
Functions 2.27 Jump of Voltage Vector Time Delays The time delay T DELTA PHI (address 4603) should be left at zero, unless you wish to transmit the trip indi- cation with a delay to a logic (CFC), or to leave enough time for an external blocking to take effect. After expiry of the timer T RESET (address 4604), the protection function is automatically reset. -
Page 203
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) The stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of three-phase machines. The machine can be operated in busbar connection (directly connected to the network) or in unit connection (via unit transformer). -
Page 204
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Figure 2-84 Unit Connection with Neutral Transformer Loading resistance Voltage divider Displacement Voltage Generator earth capacitance Line earth capacitance Unit transformer earth capacitance Unit transformer coupling capacitance coup Figure 2-85 Unit Connection with Earthing Transformer Loading resistance Voltage divider… -
Page 205
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Earth Current Direction Detection For machines in busbar connection, it is not possible to differentiate between network earth faults and machine earth faults using the displacement voltage alone. In this case the earth fault current is used as a further crite- rion, and the displacement voltage as a necessary enabling condition. -
Page 206
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) The protection then detects a machine earth fault if the following three criteria are fulfilled: • Displacement voltage larger than set value U0>, • Earth fault current across the measurement location larger than set value 3I0>, •… -
Page 207
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Earth Current Detection (Earth Differential Protection with Displacment Voltage as the Pickup Criterion) In the industrial sector, busbar systems are designed with high or low resistance, switchable starpoint resis- tances. For earth-fault detection, the starpoint current and the total current are detected via toroidal current transformers and transmitted to the protective device as current difference. -
Page 208
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Figure 2-89 Logic Diagram of 90 % Stator Earth Fault Protection 2.28.2 Setting Notes General 90 % stator earth fault protection is only effective and available if address 150 S/E/F PROT. is set to directional;… -
Page 209
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Delay The stator earth fault trip is delayed by the time set under address 5005 T S/E/F. For the delay time, the overload capacity of the load equipment must be considered. All set times are additional delay times and do not include operating times (measurement time, reset time) of the protection function itself. -
Page 210
Functions 2.28 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) For a protected zone of 90 %, the protection should already operate at 1/10 of the full displacement voltage, whereby only 1/10 of the earth fault current is generated: In this example 3I0> is set to 11 mA. For the displacement voltage setting, 1/10 of the full displacement voltage is used (because of the 90% protected zone). -
Page 211
Functions 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) The sensitive earth current protection detects earth faults in systems with isolated or high-impedance earthed starpoint. This stage operates with the magnitudes of the earth current. It is therefore useful in applications where the magnitude of the earth current is an indicator of the earth fault. -
Page 212
Functions 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) Figure 2-90 Application example as rotor earth fault protection Note 3PP13 is only necessary if more than 0.2 A are flowing permanently; (rule: Uerr load > 150 V). In this case the internal resistors Rpre inside the 7XR61 must be shorted. Figure 2-91 Logic Diagram of the Sensitive Earth Fault Detection Parameters and indications are only visible if Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn… -
Page 213
Functions 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.29.2 Setting Notes General The sensitive earth fault protection is only effective and available if address 151 O/C PROT. IEE> = with IEE1 or with IEE2 is assigned. If when configuring the 90 % stator earth fault protection (150 S/E/F PROT., see subsection 2.4) one of the options with current value is chosen, the sensitive current measuring inpu of the device 7UM62 is thus occupied. -
Page 214
Functions 2.29 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 2.29.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5101 O/C PROT. IEE Sensitive Earth Current Protec- tion Block relay 5102 IEE> 2 .. 1000 mA 10 mA IEE> Pickup 5103 T IEE>… -
Page 215
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) The measurement method described in section 2.28 is based on the fundamental wave of the displacement voltage and allows protecting up to 90 % to 95 % of the stator winding. -
Page 216
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Measuring Principle The content of the 3rd harmonic in the measurement value is the pickup criterion. The 3rd harmonic is deter- mined from the displacement voltage measured over two cycles by means of digital filtering. Different measuring procedures are applied, depending on how the displacement voltage is detected (config- uration parameter 223 UE CONNECTION): neutr. -
Page 217
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Automatic Lowering of Pickup Value U0 3.HARM> Figure 2-93 The trip characteristic is released as soon as the settable minimum active power is reached. As an additional security feature, the following limitation is provided: If due to the power-dependent correction factor the correct- ed pickup value U drops below the minimum possible setting value (0,2 V), the pickup value will be… -
Page 218
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Figure 2-94 Logic diagram of the 100% stator earth fault protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 219
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 2.30.2 Setting Notes General The 100 % stator earth fault protection is only effective and available if address 152 SEF 3rd HARM. = Enabled is set during configuration. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 5201 SEF 3rd HARM. -
Page 220
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Figure 2-95 3rd harmonic secondary voltage as a function of the active power (reactive power as parame- ter) As Figure 2-95 shows, the rise is almost equal in both cases. The most unfavourable case is operation in un- derexcitation conditions. -
Page 221
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Figure 2-96 3. harmonic secondary voltage as a function of the active power referred to S (extrapo- N device lation of this voltage and final characteristic) With 100 % active power the extrapolated value is (U ) 12.7 V. -
Page 222
Functions 2.30 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Operating Range Due to the strong dependency of the measurable 3rd harmonic from the corresponding working point of the generator, the working area of the 100–%–stator earth fault protection is only tripped above the active-power threshold set via 5205 P min >… -
Page 223
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) The 100 % stator earth fault protection detects earth faults in the stator windings of generators which are con- nected with the network via a unit transformer. -
Page 224
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) To prevent the secondary load resistance from becoming too small (it should be greater than 0.5 Ω where pos- sible), a high secondary rated voltage should be chosen for the earthing or neutral transformer. 500 V has proven to be a practical value. -
Page 225
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) Logic The following figure shows the logic diagram. It comprises: • Monitoring of the 20 Hz connection • Resistance calculation and threshold value decision • Independent current measurement stage The protection function has an alarm stage and a tripping stage. -
Page 226
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 2.31.2 Setting Notes General The 100 % stator earth fault protection is only effective and available if address 153 100% SEF-PROT. is set to Enabled during configuration. In addition, the function requires the following settings to be made in Power System Data 1: •… -
Page 227
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) This formula applies only for almost ideal earthing or neutral transformers. If necessary, the measuring result from the primary tests must be set as FACTOR R SEF. For this the inserted fault resistance (trip stage) is related to the measured secondary fault resistance. -
Page 228
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) Correction Angle, Transfer Resistance The parameter PHI I SEF (default setting 0 °) at address 5309 is used to compensate the angle errors of the CTs and angle distortions caused by a nonideal earthing or neutral transformer. -
Page 229
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) A two pole isolated voltage transformer must be used with low primary/secondary impedance. This applies for the 20 Hz frequency. Primary voltage: / √3 N,Generator (non-saturated up to U N,Generator Secondary voltage:… -
Page 230
Functions 2.31 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) Trip stage: primary 2 kΩ, secondary 66 Ω Alarm stage: primary 5 kΩ, secondary 165 Ω 2.31.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. -
Page 231
Functions 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) The IEE-B sensitive earth current protection feature of 7UM62 provides greater flexibility and can be used for the following applications. Applications • Earth current monitoring to detect earth faults (generator stator, terminal lead, transformer). •… -
Page 232
Functions 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) Figure 2-101 Connection of the shaft current transformer (possible current flow in the event of a fault) The shaft current transformer has to be purchased separately from a transformer manufacturer, or the existing shaft current transformer can be used when replacing the protection. -
Page 233
Functions 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) Measurement Method In order to preserve the flexibility of the application, there are different measurement methods available for pro- cessing the sensitive earth current. The protection setting determines the measurement method to be used. In algorithmic terms, this means that the FIR filter parameters have to be modified. -
Page 234
Functions 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) 2.32.2 Setting Notes General The sensitive earth fault protection IEE-B is only effective and available if configured to with IEE1 or with IEE2 at address 154. If the sensitive earth fault detection IEE-B is not required, Disabled is set. Address 5401serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 235
Functions 2.32 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) 2.32.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5401 O/C PROT IEE-B Sensitive O/C Protection B Block relay Alarm Only 5402… -
Page 236
Functions 2.33 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) 2.33 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) The interturn fault protection detects faults between turns within a generator winding (phase). This situation may involve relatively high circulating currents that flow in the short-circuited turns and damage the winding and the stator. -
Page 237
Functions 2.33 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) Figure 2-105 Alternative connection of the interturn fault protection The wide setting range allows the protective function to be used also as single-stage, single-phase overvoltage protection. Measurement Method The U input of the protection is connected as shown in Figure 2-104 or 2-105. An FIR filter determines the fundamental component of the voltage based on the scanned displacement voltage. -
Page 238
Functions 2.33 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) 2.33.2 Setting Notes General The interturn fault protection is only in effect and accessible if address 155 INTERTURN PROT is set to during configuration of protective functions. Also it has to be specified in the Power System Data 1 that the input U is used for the interturn fault protection. -
Page 239
Functions 2.33 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) 2.33.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5501 INTERTURN PROT Interturn Protection Block relay 5502 U Interturn > 0.3 .. 130.0 V 2.0 V Pick up Value U Interturn> 5503 T-U Interturn > 0.00 .. -
Page 240
Functions 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) Rotor earth fault protection is used to detect earth faults in the excitation circuit of synchronous machines. An earth fault in the rotor winding does not cause immediate damage; however, if a second earth fault occurs it constitutes a winding short-circuit of the excitation circuit. -
Page 241
Functions 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) The rotor earth fault protection calculates the complex earth impedance from the auxiliary AC voltage U the current I . The earth resistance R of the excitation circuit is then calculated from the earth impedance. The coupling capacitance of the coupling unit C , the series resistance R including the brush resistance,… -
Page 242
Functions 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 2.34.2 Setting Notes General Rotor earth fault protection protection is only effective and accessible if address 160 ROTOR E/F has been set = to Enabled. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 6001 ROTOR E/F serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 243
Functions 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) The series resistors R for the protection of the coupling capacitors can be considered with the total series re- sistance (address 6007) since the brush resistance and the series resistance are connected in series in the measurement circuit. -
Page 244
Functions 2.34 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 2.34.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6001 ROTOR E/F Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, Block relay 6002 RE< WARN 3.0 .. 30.0 kΩ 10.0 kΩ Pickup Value of Warning Stage Re<… -
Page 245
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) The rotor earth fault protection detects high and low resistance earth faults in the excitation circuit of synchro- nous generators. -
Page 246
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) Measurement Method From the control voltage U , the function determines the timing for the polarity reversals and triggers the mea- Ctrl surement. -
Page 247
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) Monitoring Functions On each polarity reversal, the charging current of the earth capacitance is determined. If this is undershot, errors in the measuring circuit such as wire break, poor brush contacts etc. -
Page 248
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) Logic The logic diagram shows the parts: • Monitoring of the series device • Supervision of the measurement circuit •… -
Page 249
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 2.35.2 Setting Notes General Sensitive rotor earth fault protection is only effective and available if configured at address 161 REF 1-3Hz to Enabled. -
Page 250
Functions 2.35 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 2.35.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. -
Page 251
Functions 2.36 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 2.36 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) When using the 7UM62 to protect motors, the motor starting protection supplements the overload protection described in Section 2.11 by protecting the motor against too long starting procedures. In particular, rotor-criti- cal high-voltage motors can quickly be heated above their thermal limits when multiple starting attempts occur in a short period of time. -
Page 252
Functions 2.36 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) Therefore, if the starting current I actually measured is smaller (or larger) than the nominal starting current I Start- entered at address 6502 (parameter START. CURRENT), the actual tripping time t is lengthened (or Curr TRIP shortened) accordingly (see also Figure 2-114). -
Page 253
Functions 2.36 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 2.36.2 Setting Notes General Startup Time Monitoring is only active and available if address 165 STARTUP MOTOR was set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required, it is set to Disabled. Address 6501 STARTUP MOTOR serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 254
Functions 2.36 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) Under nominal conditions, the tripping time is the maximum starting time t . For ratios deviating from Start max nominal conditions, the motor tripping time changes. At 80% of nominal voltage (which corresponds to 80% of nominal starting current), the tripping time is for example: After the delay time LOCK ROTOR TIME has expired, the binary input becomes effective and initiates a tripping signal. -
Page 255
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) The rotor temperature of a motor generally remains well below its admissible limit temperature during normal operation and also under increased load conditions. However, with startups and resulting high startup currents caused by small thermal time constants of the rotor it may suffer more thermal damage than the stator. -
Page 256
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) Although the heat distribution at the rotor cage bars can range widely during motor startup, the different maximum temperatures in the rotor do not necessarily affect the motor restart inhibit (see Figure 2-116). It is much more important to establish a thermal profile, after a complete motor startup, that is appropriate for pro- tection of the motor’s thermal state. -
Page 257
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) Prolonging the Cooling Time Constant In order to properly account for the reduced heat removal when a self-ventilated motor is stopped, the cooldown time constant can be increased relative to the time constants for a running machine with the factor Kτ at STOP (address 6608). -
Page 258
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) Logic The thermal profile can also be reset via a binary input. This may be useful for testing and commissioning, and after power supply voltage restoration. The following figure shows the logic diagram for the restart inhibit. Figure 2-117 Logic diagram of the Restart Inhibit SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual… -
Page 259
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 2.37.2 Setting Notes General Restart inhibit is only effective and available if address 166 RESTART INHIBIT was set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 6601RESTART INHIBIT serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 260
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) The following settings are made: IStart/IMOTnom . = 4.9 T START MAX . = 8.5 sec MAX.WARM STARTS . #COLD-#WARM . For the rotor temperature equilibrium time, a setting of approx. T EQUAL = 1.0 min has proven to be a practical value. -
Page 261
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) In Figure 2-119, the motor is also restarted twice in warm condition, but the pause between the restart attempts is longer than in the first example. After the second restart attempt, the motor is operated at 90 % nominal cur- rent. -
Page 262
Functions 2.37 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 2.37.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6601 RESTART INHIBIT Restart Inhibit for Motors Block relay 6602 IStart/IMOTnom 1.5 .. 10.0 I Start / I Motor nominal 6603 T START MAX 3.0 .. -
Page 263
Functions 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) The breaker failure protection can be assigned to the current inputs of side 1 or side 2 during configuration of the protective functions (see Section 2.4). The breaker failure protection monitors whether the associated circuit breaker is opened correctly. -
Page 264
Functions 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) Criteria The two pickup criteria (current criterion, circuit breaker auxiliary contact) are OR-combined. In case of a trip- ping without short circuit current, e.g. for voltage protection on light load, the current is not a safe criterion for circuit breaker response. -
Page 265
Functions 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) Figure 2-121 Logic Diagram of the Breaker Failure Protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 266
Functions 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.38.2 Setting Notes General Breaker failure protection is only effective and available if address 170 BREAKER FAILURE is set to Side 1 or Side 2 during configuration. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 7001 BREAKER FAILURE serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 267
Functions 2.38 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 2.38.3 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7001 BREAKER FAILURE Breaker Failure Protection Block relay 7002 TRIP INTERN… -
Page 268
Functions 2.39 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 2.39 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) The inadvertent energization protection has the task to limit damage caused by the accidental energization of the stationary or already started, but not yet synchronized generator by quickly actuating the generator circuit breaker. -
Page 269
Functions 2.39 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 2.39.2 Setting Notes General Inadvertent energizing protection is only effective and available if address 171 INADVERT. EN. is set to Enabled during configuration. If the function is not required Disabled is set. Address 7101 INADVERT. EN. serves to switch the function ON or OFF or to block only the trip command (Block relay). -
Page 270
Functions 2.39 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 2.39.3 Settings The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7101 INADVERT. EN. Inadvertent Energisation Block relay 7102 I STAGE… -
Page 271
Functions 2.40 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) 2.40 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) To detect DC voltages, DC currents and small AC quantities, the 7UM62 is equipped with a measuring trans- ducer input (TD1) that can be used either for voltages (± 10V) or currents (± 20mA). Higher DC voltages are connected via an external voltage divider. -
Page 272
Functions 2.40 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) Earth Fault Detection in the Startup Converter If an earth fault occurs in the startup converter circuit, a current flows through all earthed parts of the system because of the DC voltage. As earthing and neutral transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than voltage transformers, the thermal load is the highest on them. -
Page 273
Functions 2.40 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) 2.40.2 Setting Notes General The DC voltage protection is only effective and available if set to Enabled at address 172 DC PROTECTION. If the function is not required, Disabled is set. For the associated measuring transducer 1, address 295 TRANSDUCER 1 was set to one of the alternatives 10 V, 4-20 mA or 20 mA (see section 2.5). -
Page 274
Functions 2.40 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) If we assume that the earthing transformer has an ohmic winding resistance of R ≈ 150 Ω, a DC current of I 945 V/150 Ω = 6.3 A will flow through its starpoint. Note: The ohmic winding resistances of earthing and neutral transformers can differ widely depending on the type. -
Page 275
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs 2.41 Analog Outputs Depending on the variant ordered, the 7UM62 machine protection can have up to four analog outputs (plug-in modules on ports B and D). Starting from firmware version 4.62, the device features a universal analog output (type 2) for additional select- ed measured values. -
Page 276
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs For measured values that can also be negative (power, power factor), absolute values are formed and output in the type-1 analog output. The analog output type 2 (additionally available starting from firmware version V4.62) allows the negative values to be output as well (see 2.41.2, example 2). Analog values are output as injected currents. -
Page 277
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs 2.41.2 Setting Notes General You have specified during configuration of the analog outputs (Section 2.4.2, addresses173 to 176) for analog output type 1 and addresses 200 to 203 for analog output type 2 which of the analog inputs in the device will be used for which measured value. -
Page 278
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs Example 1: The positive sequence components of the currents are to be output as analog output B1 at location «B». 10 mA is to be the value at nominal operational current, consequently 20 mA corresponds to 200 %. Values below 1 mA are invalid. -
Page 279
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs The following diagram illustrates the relationships. Figure 2-129 Definition of output range display for type 2 Example 2: The reactive power Q is to be output over analog output D1 with a sign and between 4 to 20 mA. A reactive power Q = 0 % is to be equivalent to a current value of 12 mA. -
Page 280
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs Figure 2-130 Example of a reactive power Q output If the machine is run with cos j = 0.8, the resulting active power is 80 % referring to the apparent power. The reactive power is correspondingly 60 % of the apparent power. This measured reactive power value results in an output value of 18 mA. -
Page 281
Functions 2.41 Analog Outputs 2.41.3 Settings Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7301 20 mA (B1/1) = 10.0 .. 1000.0 % 200.0 % 20 mA (B1/1) correspond to 7302 MIN VALUE(B1/1) 0.0 .. 5.0 mA 1.0 mA Output value (B1/1) valid from 7303 20 mA (B2/1) = 10.0 .. -
Page 282
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions The device is equipped with extensive monitoring capabilities — both for hardware and software. In addition, the measured values are also constantly monitored for plausibility, therefore, the current transformer and voltage transformer circuits are largely integrated into the monitoring. 2.42.1 Measurement Supervision 2.42.1.1 Hardware Monitoring… -
Page 283
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Measurement Value Acquisition – Currents In the current paths there are three input transformers each on side 1 and side 2; the digitized sum of the trans- former currents of one side must be almost zero for generators with isolated starpoint during earth-fault-free operation. -
Page 284
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Note Voltage sum monitoring is only effective if an external displacement voltage is connected at the displacement voltage measuring input and this is also notified via the parameter 223 UE CONNECTION to the device. Voltage sum monitoring can operate properly only if the adaptation factor Uph / Udelta at address 225 has been correctly configured (see Subsection 2.5.1). -
Page 285
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42.1.3 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits Interruptions or short circuits in the secondary circuits of the current and voltage transformers, as well as faults in the connections (important for commissioning!), are detected and reported by the device. The measured values are cyclically checked in background routines for this purpose, as long as no system fault is present. -
Page 286
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions This malfunction is reported as „Fail U balance“. If the 90% stator earth fault protection functions are active, a zero voltage results on voltage asymmetry. If this causes protection pickup, monitoring is relegated to the background and issues no indication. Figure 2-134 Voltage symmetry monitoring Phase Sequences of Current and Voltage… -
Page 287
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42.1.4 Setting Notes Measured Value Monitoring Measured value monitoring can be turned ON or OFF at address 8101 MEASURE. SUPERV. In addition, the sensitivity of measured value monitoring can be modified. Experiential values set ex works are sufficient in most cases. -
Page 288
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8107 BAL. FACT. I S2 0.10 .. 0.90 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Monitor S2 8108 SUM.thres. U 10 .. 200 V 10 V Summation Thres. for Volt. Monitoring 8109 SUM.Fact. -
Page 289
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42.2 Supervision 2.42.2.1 Fuse Failure Monitor In the event of a measured voltage failure due to a short circuit fault or a broken conductor in the voltage trans- former secondary circuit, certain measuring loops may mistakenly see a voltage of zero. The measuring results of the undervoltage protection, the impedance protection and other voltage-dependent protective functions may be falsified in this way, possibly causing an unwanted operation. -
Page 290
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Additional Criteria In addition to this, the function can either be blocked via a binary input or deactivated by an undervoltage pro- tection at a separate voltage transformer set. If an undervoltage is also detected at a separate transformer set, this is most probably not due to a transformer error and the monitoring switching can be blocked. -
Page 291
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42.2.2 Malfunction Responses of the Monitoring Functions Depending on the type of malfunction detected, an indication is sent, a restart of the processor system initiated, or the device is taken out of service. After three unsuccessful restart attempts, the device is also taken out of service. -
Page 292
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Table 2-14 Summary of Malfunction Responses by the Protection Relay Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output Response Auxiliary Supply Voltage External (aux. voltage) in- Device nonoperational all LEDs dark drops out Loss ternal (converter) Internal Supply Voltages Internal (converter) or refer- Device shutdown LED ”ERROR»… -
Page 293
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions Monitoring Possible Causes Malfunction Message (No.) Output Response Current Phase Sequence External Indication „FailPh.Seq I S2“ as allocated Side 2 (power system or connec- (No. 266) tion) Fuse Failure Monitor External Indication „VT Fuse Failure“ as allocated (voltage transformer) (No. -
Page 294
Functions 2.42 Monitoring Functions 2.42.2.5 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation Clock SyncError Clock Synchronization Error Event Lost OUT_Ev Event lost Flag Lost Flag Lost Error Sum Alarm Error with a summary alarm Error PwrSupply Error Power Supply Alarm Sum Event Alarm Summary Event Fail Battery… -
Page 295
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision The 7UM62 multifunctional protection features an integrated trip circuit supervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs (connected or not connected to a common potential), monitoring with one or two binary inputs can be selected. -
Page 296
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision The state where both binary inputs are not energized („L“) is only present during a short transition phase (trip relay contact is closed, but the circuit breaker has not yet opened) if the trip circuit is healthy. A continuous state of this condition is only possible when the trip circuit has been interrupted, a short-circuit exists in the trip circuit, battery voltage failure occurs, or malfunctions occur with the circuit breaker mechanism. -
Page 297
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision Figure 2-138 Principle of trip circuit monitor with two binary inputs (connected to common potential) Depending on the switching state of the trip relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are initiated (logic state „H“ in the table below) or short circuited (logic state „L“). Table 2-16 Condition Table for Binary Inputs, depending on RTC and CB Position Trip contact… -
Page 298
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision Monitoring with One Binary Input The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of the protection device ac- cording to the following figure. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is bridged with a high-ohmic equivalent re- sistor R. -
Page 299
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision Figure 2-140 Logic diagram for Trip Circuit Monitoring with one binary input The following figure shows the logic diagram for the message that can be generated by the trip circuit monitor, depending on the control settings and binary inputs. Figure 2-141 Message Logic of the Trip Circuit Supervision 2.43.2… -
Page 300
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision Monitoring with One Binary Input Note: When using only one binary input (BI) for the trip circuit monitor, some malfunctions, such as interruption of the trip circuit or loss of battery voltage, can indeed be detected, but malfunctions with closed trip contacts cannot. -
Page 301
Functions 2.43 Trip Circuit Supervision Example: 1.8 mA (SIPROTEC 4 7UM62) BI (HIGH) 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V (from 7UM62), 88 V for delivery BI min setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V) (from 7UM62) 110 V (system / trip circuit) 500 Ω… -
Page 302
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision 2.44 Threshold supervision This function monitors the thresholds of selected measured values (for overshoot or undershoot). The process- ing speed of this function is so high that it can be used for protection applications. The necessary logical com- binations can be implemented by means of CFC. -
Page 303
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Measured Value Scaling Explanation /√3) · 100 % The voltage connected to the U input is processed directly, and UL3E L3prim N,G,M (phase-earth volt- (normalized via addr. 251/√3) converted into the primary phase-earth voltage. The calculation is age) performed once per cycle. -
Page 304
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Measured Value Scaling Explanation /0.5 A · 100 % The fundamental frequency component is determined from the IEE2 (Sensitive earth current connected to the I input. The calculation is performed current) once per cycle. Note: Unlike the scaling of the operational measured values, scaling is not to primary values. -
Page 305
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision The following figure shows an overview of the logic. Figure 2-142 Logic of the Threshold Supervision The figure shows that the measured values can be freely allocated to the threshold supervision blocks. The dropout ratio for the MVx> stage is 0.95 or 1 %. Accordingly, it is 1.05 or 1 % for the MVx< stage. SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 306
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision 2.44.2 Setting Notes General The threshold supervision function is only effective and accessible if address 185 THRESHOLD has been set to Enabled during the configuration of the protection functions. Pickup Values The pickup values are set as percentages. Note the scaling factors listed in the Measured values table. The measured values for power P, Q, ΔP and cosϕ… -
Page 307
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8501 MEAS. VALUE 1> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV1> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8502 THRESHOLD MV1> -200 .. 200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV1>… -
Page 308
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8505 MEAS. VALUE 3> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV3> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8506 THRESHOLD MV3> -200 .. 200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV3>… -
Page 309
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8509 MEAS. VALUE 5> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV5> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8510 THRESHOLD MV5> -200 .. 200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV5>… -
Page 310
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8513 MEAS. VALUE 7> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV7> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8514 THRESHOLD MV7> -200 .. 200 % 100 % Threshold of Measured Value MV7>… -
Page 311
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8517 MEAS. VALUE 9> Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV9> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8518 THRESHOLD MV9> -200 .. 200 % 100 % Threshold of Measured Value MV9>… -
Page 312
Functions 2.44 Threshold supervision 2.44.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 7960 Meas. Value1> Measured Value MV1> picked up 7961 Meas. Value2< Measured Value MV2< picked up 7962 Meas. Value3> Measured Value MV3> picked up 7963 Meas. Value4< Measured Value MV4<… -
Page 313
Functions 2.45 External Trip Functions 2.45 External Trip Functions Any signals from external protection or supervision units can be incorporated and processed in the digital machine protection 7UM62 via binary inputs. Like the internal signals, they can be signaled, time delayed, transmitted to the trip matrix, and also individually blocked. -
Page 314
Functions 2.45 External Trip Functions Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8601 EXTERN TRIP 1 External Trip Function 1 Block relay 8602 T DELAY 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 1.00 sec Ext. Trip 1 Time Delay 8701 EXTERN TRIP 2 External Trip Function 2 Block relay 8702… -
Page 315
Functions 2.45 External Trip Functions 2.45.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 4523 >BLOCK Ext 1 >Block external trip 1 4526 >Ext trip 1 >Trigger external trip 1 4531 Ext 1 OFF External trip 1 is switched OFF 4532 Ext 1 BLOCKED External trip 1 is BLOCKED… -
Page 316
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Up to two RTD boxes with a total of 12 measuring points can be used for temperature detection and evaluated by the protection device. In particular they enable the thermal status of motors, generators and transformers to be monitored. -
Page 317
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Figure 2-144 Logic Diagram for Temperature Processing 2.46.2 Setting Notes General The temperature detection is only active and accessible if it has been assigned to a port during configuration of the protection functions (Section 2.4). At address 190 RTD-BOX INPUT the RTD box(es) is allocated to the port at which it will be operated (e.g. -
Page 318
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Furthermore, you can set an alarm temperature and a tripping temperature. Depending on the temperature unit selected in the Power System Data (Section 2.4.2 in address 276 TEMP. UNIT), the alarm temperature can be expressed in Celsius (°C) (address 9013 RTD 1 STAGE 1) or Fahrenheit (°F) (address 9014 RTD 1 STAGE 1). -
Page 319
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 2.46.3 Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9011A RTD 1 TYPE Not connected Pt 100 Ω RTD 1: Type Pt 100 Ω… -
Page 320
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9034 RTD 3 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 3: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9035 RTD 3 STAGE 2 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 120 °C RTD 3: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup… -
Page 321
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9063 RTD 6 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9064 RTD 6 STAGE 1 -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 212 °F RTD 6: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup… -
Page 322
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9092A RTD 9 LOCATION Other RTD 9: Location Ambient Winding Bearing Other 9093 RTD 9 STAGE 1 -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 100 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 1 Pickup 9094 RTD 9 STAGE 1… -
Page 323
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9121A RTD12 TYPE Not connected Not connected RTD12: Type Pt 100 Ω Ni 120 Ω Ni 100 Ω 9122A RTD12 LOCATION Other RTD12: Location Ambient Winding Bearing Other 9123 RTD12 STAGE 1… -
Page 324
Functions 2.46 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 2.46.4 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation 14101 Fail: RTD Fail: RTD (broken wire/shorted) 14111 Fail: RTD 1 Fail: RTD 1 (broken wire/shorted) 14112 RTD 1 St.1 p.up RTD 1 Temperature stage 1 picked up 14113 RTD 1 St.2 p.up RTD 1 Temperature stage 2 picked up… -
Page 325
Functions 2.47 Phase Rotation 2.47 Phase Rotation A phase sequence reversal feature via binary input and parameter is implemented in the 7UM62. This permits all protection and monitoring functions to operate correctly even with phase rotation reversal, without the need for two phases to be reversed. -
Page 326
Functions 2.47 Phase Rotation 2.47.2 Setting Notes Programming Settings The normal phase sequence is set at 271 (see Subsection 2.5). If, on the system side, phase rotation is tem- porarily changed, then this is communicated to the protective device using the binary input „>Reverse Rot.“ (5145). -
Page 327
Functions 2.48 Protection Function Control 2.48 Protection Function Control The function logic coordinates the sequence of both the protective and ancillary functions, processes the func- tional decisions, and data received from the system. 2.48.1 Pickup Logic for the Entire Device This section describes the general pickup and spontaneous messages in the device display. -
Page 328
Functions 2.48 Protection Function Control 2.48.2 Tripping Logic for the Entire Device This section comprises a description regarding the general trip and termination of the trip command. 2.48.2.1 Functional Description General Trip The tripping signals for all protective functions are connected by ”OR” and generate a message „Relay TRIP“. -
Page 329
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions The general functions of the device are described in chapter «Additional Functions». 2.49.1 Processing of Annunciation After occurrence of a system fault, data on the device response and the measured quantities are significant for analysis purposes. -
Page 330
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Classification of Messages The indications are categorized as follows: • Operational indications; indications generated while the device is operating: Information regarding the status of device functions, measured data, power system data, control command logs etc. • Fault indications: indications from the last 8 network faults that were processed by the device. •… -
Page 331
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Statistics The annunciations in statistics are counters for breaker switching operations instigated by the 7UM62 as well as for accumulation of short-circuit currents involved in disconnections caused by the device protection func- tions. The interrupted currents are in primary terms. Statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running DIGSI, and connected to the operator or service interface. -
Page 332
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Accumulated Shutdown Currents The shutdown currents for each phase, which are indicated at every trip command individually for side 1 and side 2, are accumulated and stored. The counter and memory levels are secured against loss of auxiliary voltage. Setting / Resetting Setting or resetting of these statistical counters takes place under the menu item ANNUNCIATION →… -
Page 333
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.3 Measurement (Secondary/Primary/Percentage Values) A series of measured values and the values derived from them are constantly available for call up on site, or for data transfer (see table 2-19, as well as the following list). Measured values can be retrieved by a central control system (SCADA). -
Page 334
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Measured second- primary Values EE1 sec EE2 sec L-E sec. L1-L2 LL sec. L2-L3 L3-L1 measured: measured: FACTOR UE · U E sec. E sec. calculated: calculated: = U0 E sec. ·√3 FACTOR UE · U I/T sec I/T sec P, Q, S… -
Page 335
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Measured second- primary Values in V- no primary values (measur- ing trans- ducer 1) in mA- (mea- no primary value suring transducer With the following parameters from the Power System Data 1: Parameter Address Parameter Address Unom PRIMARY FACTOR IEE1 Unom SECONDARY… -
Page 336
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions The following table shows the operating ranges for synchronous and asynchronous machines. For this, param- eter 1108 ACTIVE POWER is set to Generator. „Normal condition“ shows the active power under normal op- erating conditions: + means that a positive power is displayed on the protective device, – means that the power is negative. -
Page 337
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.3.2 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation I1 = I1 (positive sequence) I2 = I2 (negative sequence) UL1E= U L1-E UL2E= U L2-E UL3E= U L3-E UL12= U L12 UL23= U L23 UL31= U L31 UE = Displacement voltage UE U1 =… -
Page 338
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions Information Type of In- Comments formation U0 = U0 (zero sequence) U DC = DC voltage U RE = REF(R,fn): Injected Voltage (U RE) I RE = REF(R,fn): Curr. in the Circuit (I RE) PF = Power Factor PHI= Power angle… -
Page 339
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.4.2 Information List Information Type of In- Comments formation T Rem.= Remaining Time for Switch ON Θ REST. = Threshold of Restart Inhibit U/f th. = Calculated temperature (U/f) Θ/Θtrip = Temperat. rise for warning and trip Temperature rise for phase L1 Θ/ΘtripL1= Temperature rise for phase L2… -
Page 340
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.5 Diff- and Rest. Measurement Differential and restraint currents (stabilized currents) I , I0 , I0 , 3I0- diff L1 diff L2 diff L3 stab L1 stab L2 stab L3 diff stab 1, 3I0-2 in percent of the nominal values of the protected object. 2.49.5.1 Information List Information Type of In-… -
Page 341
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.6 Min/Max Measurement Setup Minimum and maximum values for the positive-sequence components I and U , the active power P, reactive power Q, in primary values, of the frequency and of the 3rd harmonic content in the displacement voltage, in secondary values U . -
Page 342
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.7 Energy , metered values of the active and reactive energy in kilowatt, megawatt or gigawatt hours primary or in kVARh, MVARh or GVARh primary, separately according to the input and output, or capacitive and inductive. The calculation of the operational measured values is also performed during a fault. -
Page 343
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.8 Set Points (Measured Values) The SIPROTEC 4 device 7UM62 allows to set warning levels for important measured and metered values. If one of these limit values is reached or exceeded positively or negatively during operation, the device generates an alarm which is displayed as an operational indication. -
Page 344
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.10 Oscillographic Fault Records The multi-functional 7UM62 is equipped with a fault memory which optionally scans either the instantaneous values or the rms values of various measured quantities for storage in a ring buffer. 2.49.10.1Functional Description Mode of Operation The instantaneous values of the measured quantities and u… -
Page 345
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions The actual storage time begins at the pre-fault time PRE. TRIG. TIME (address 404) ahead of the reference instant, and ends at the post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 405) after the storage criterion has reset. The maximum recording duration for each fault (MAX. -
Page 346
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.11 Date and Time Stamping The integrated date/clock management enables the exact timely assignment of events e.g., those in the oper- ational messages and fault messages or in the lists of the minimum/maximum values. 2.49.11.1Functional Description Mode of Operation The time can be influenced by •… -
Page 347
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.12 Commissioning Aids Device data sent to a central or master computer system during test mode or commissioning can be influenced. There are tools for testing the system interface and the binary inputs and outputs of the device. Applications •… -
Page 348
Functions 2.49 Auxiliary Functions 2.49.12.3Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually controlled. This feature can be, for example, to verify control wiring from the device to substation equipment (operational checks), during commissioning. -
Page 349
Functions 2.50 Command Processing 2.50 Command Processing The SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 includes a command processing function for initiating switching operations in the system. Control can originate from four command sources: • Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device •… -
Page 350
Functions 2.50 Command Processing 2.50.2 Types of Commands In conjunction with the power system control the following command types can be distinguished for the device: 2.50.2.1 Description Commands to the System These are all commands that are directly output to the switchgear to change their process state: •… -
Page 351
Functions 2.50 Command Processing 2.50.3 Command Processing Security mechanisms in the command path ensure that a switch command can be carried out only if the test of previously established criteria has been successfully completed. In addition to general fixed prescribed tests, further interlocks can be configured for each resource separately. -
Page 352
Functions 2.50 Command Processing 2.50.4 Interlocking Interlocking is implemented via the user-definable logic (CFC). 2.50.4.1 Description Switchgear interlocking checks in a SICAM/SIPROTEC 4 system are normally divided in the following groups: • System interlocking, using the system database in the central control system •… -
Page 353
Functions 2.50 Command Processing Figure 2-148 Example of an operational indication for switching circuit breaker (Q0) Standard Interlocking (hard-coded) The following is a list of Standard Interlocking Conditions that can be selected for each controllable device. All of these are enabled as a default. •… -
Page 354
Functions 2.50 Command Processing Figure 2-149 Standard interlockings SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 355
Functions 2.50 Command Processing The following figure shows the configuration of the interlocking conditions using DIGSI. Figure 2-150 DIGSI-Dialog Box for Setting the Interlocking Conditions The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. They are marked by letters explained in the following table. -
Page 356
Functions 2.50 Command Processing Enabling Logic via CFC For bay interlocking, an enable logic can be created using CFC. Via specific release conditions the information „released“ or „bay interlocked“ are available, e.g. object „52 Close“ and „52 Open“ with the data values: ON / OFF). -
Page 357
Functions 2.50 Command Processing SC = Auto: Commands that are derived internally (command processing in the CFC) are not subject to switching authority and are therefore always «enabled». Switching Mode The switching mode determines whether selected interlocking conditions will be activated or deactivated at the time of the switching operation. -
Page 358
Functions 2.50 Command Processing Blocking by Protection With this function, switching operations are blocked by the pickup of protective elements. Blocking is config- urable separately for both closing and tripping commands. When configured, «Block CLOSE commands» blocks CLOSE commands, whereas «Block TRIP commands» blocks TRIP signals. -
Page 359
Functions 2.50 Command Processing 2.50.5 Command Logging During the processing of the commands, independent of the further message routing and processing, command and process feedback information are sent to the message processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. With the corresponding allocation (configuration) these messages are entered in the event list, thus serving as a report. -
Page 360
Functions 2.50 Command Processing SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 361
Mounting and Commissioning This chapter is intended for experienced commissioning staff. They should be familiar with the commissioning of protection and control equipment, with operation of the power system network and with the safety rules and regulations. Certain adaptations of the hardware to the power system specifications may be necessary. For primary testing, the object to be protected (generator, motor, transformer) must be started up and in put into service. -
Page 362
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Mounting and Connections WARNING! Warning of improper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Trouble free and safe use of this device depends on proper transport, storage, installation, and application of the device according to the warnings in this instruction manual. -
Page 363
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Example: Summation current transformer 60 A / 1 A Matching factor for sensitive earth fault current detection: FACTOR IEE2 = 60 (if the input on side 2 is used) If the sensitive current input of side 1 is used for rotor earth fault current detection (see Appendix A.3), FACTOR IEE1 = 1 is selected. -
Page 364
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure „Asynchronous Motor“ in Appendix A.3 shows a typical connection of the protection relay to a large asynchronous motor. The voltages for voltage and zero voltage monitoring are usually taken at the busbar. Where several motors are connected to the busbar, the directional earth fault protection detects single-pole earth faults and can thus open breakers selectively. -
Page 365
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2 Hardware Modifications 3.1.2.1 General General A subsequent adaptation of the hardware to the power system conditions can, for example, become necessary with regard to the control voltage for binary inputs or the termination of bus-capable interfaces. Follow the pro- cedure described in this section, whenever hardware modifications are done. -
Page 366
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Note If binary inputs are used for trip circuit monitoring, note that two binary inputs (or one binary input and an equiv- alent resistor) are connected in series. The switching threshold must be significantly less than one half of the rated control voltage. -
Page 367
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Spare Parts Spare parts may be the backup battery that maintains the data in the battery-buffered RAM when the voltage supply fails, and the miniature fuse of the internal power supply. Their physical location is shown in Figure 3-3. The ratings of the fuse are printed on the board next to the fuse itself. -
Page 368
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Work on the Plug Connectors Caution! Mind electrostatic discharges Non–observance can result in minor personal injury or material damage. Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, printed conductors and connector pins must be avoided by touching earthed metal parts beforehand. Do not plug or withdraw interface connections under power! The following must be observed: •… -
Page 369
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure 3-2 Front view of a 7UM622 (housing size 1/1) after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 370
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.3 Switching Elements on the Printed Circuit Boards Processor Board C-CPU-2 The PCB layout of the processor board C-CPU-2 is illustrated in the following Figure. The set nominal voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table 3-1, the quiescent state of the life contact accord- ing to Table 3-2, the selected operating voltages of binary inputs BI1 to BI5 according to Table 3-3 and the in- tegrated interface RS232 / RS485 according to Tables 3-4 to 3-6. -
Page 371
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-1 Jumper setting of the rated voltage of the integrated Power Supply on the C-CPU-2 processor board Jumper Nominal Voltage 24 to 48 VDC 60 to 125 VDC 110 to 250 VDC 115/230 VAC not used not used… -
Page 372
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections With interface RS232 jumper X111 is needed to activate CTS which enables the communication with the modem. Table 3-5 Jumper setting for CTS (flow control) on the C–CPU-2 processor board Jumper /CTS from interface RS232 /CTS triggered by /RTS X111 Default setting of releases 7UM62../CC and higher… -
Page 373
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the connection module). In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module or directly on the PCB of the pro- cessor board C-CPU-2 must be de-energized. -
Page 374
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Input/Output Board C-I/O-1 Figure 3-5 Input/output board C-I/O-1 with representation of the jumper settings required for the board configuration In the version 7UM622, binary output BO 13 on the input/output board C–I/O-1 can be configured as normally open or normally closed (see also overview diagrams in Appendix A.2). -
Page 375
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-7 Jumper setting for the Contact Type of the relay for BO13 Jumper Open in quiescent state (NO) Closed in quiescent state (NC) Presetting Table 3-8 Jumper setting of Control Voltages of binary inputs BI8 to BI15 on input/output board C–… -
Page 376
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Input/Output Board C-I/O-2 Two different releases of the input output board C-I/O-2 are available. For devices up to release 7UM62…/DD the layout of the printed circuit board is shown in Figure 3-6, for devices of release 7UM62…/EE and higher it is shown in Figure 3-7. -
Page 377
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-10 Jumper setting for the Contact Type of binary output BO6 Jumper Open in quiescent state (NO) Closed in quiescent state (NC) Presetting The set nominal currents of the current input transformers are to be checked on the input/output board C-I/O- 2. -
Page 378
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Input/Output Module C-I/O-2 ( from release 7) Figure 3-7 C-I/O-2 input/output board release 7UM62* …/EE or higher, with representation of jumper settings required for checking configuration settings SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 379
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-12 Jumper setting for Nominal Current or Measuring Range Jumper Nominal current 1 A Nominal current 5 A Measuring range 20 A Measuring range 100 A Not for version with sensitive earth fault detection Contacts of relays for binary outputs BO6, BO7 and BO8 can be configured as normally open or normally closed (see also General Diagrams in the Appendix). -
Page 380
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Input/Output Board C-I/O-6 PCB layout for the Input/Output C-I/O-6 board is shown in the following Figure. Figure 3-8 C-I/O-6 input/output board with representation of jumper settings required for checking config- uration settings SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 381
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-16 Jumper setting for Control Voltages of binary inputs BI6 and BI7 on the C–I/O-6 input/output board Binary Inputs Jumper 19 VDC Pickup 88 VDC Pickup 176 V Threshold Factory settings for devices with rated power supply voltages of 24 VDC to 125 VDC Factory settings for devices with power supply voltages of 110 VDC to 250 VDC and 115/230 VAC Use only with pickup voltages 220 or 250 VDC Contacts of relays for binary outputs BO11 and BO12 can be configured as normally open or normally closed… -
Page 382
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-20 Jumper setting for activating/deactivating the f ≈ 10 Hz low-pass filter of measuring transducer Jumper Low-Pass Filter Inactive Low-Pass Filter Active Presetting Note The jumper settings must correspond to the mode set at addresses 295, 296 (voltage or current input) and 297 (with/without filter). -
Page 383
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.4 Interface Modules Replacing Interface Modules The interface modules are located on the C–CPU-2 board ((1) in Figure 3-1 and 3-2). The following figure shows the PCB with location of the modules. Figure 3-9 C-CPU-2 board with interface modules Please note the following: •… -
Page 384
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Table 3-22 Replacing interface modules Interface Mounting Location / Interface Replacement module Only interface modules that can be ordered System interface in our facilities via the order key (see Appen- dix, Section A.1). Analog Output 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA Analog Output… -
Page 385
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure 3-11 Position of the plug-in jumpers for the configuration of the terminating resistors at the Profibus (FMS and DP), DNP 3.0 and Modbus interfaces The terminating resistors can also be connected externally (e.g. to the terminal block), see Figure 3-4. In this case, the terminating resistors located on the RS485 or PROFIBUS interface module or directly on the PCB of the C-CPU-2 board of must be disabled. -
Page 386
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.2.5 Reassembly The device is assembled in the following steps: • Insert the boards carefully in the housing. The mounting locations are shown in Figures 3-1 to 3-2. For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to insert the C-CPU-2 board. The installation is easier with the lever. -
Page 387
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure 3-13 Panel flush mounting of a device (housing size Figure 3-14 Panel flush mounting of a device (housing size SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 388
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections 3.1.3.2 Rack and Cubicle Mounting For the housing size (Figure 3-15), there are four covers and four holes. For the housing size (Figure 3- 16) there are six covers and six holes. To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The ordering codes are stated in Appendix, Section A.1. -
Page 389
Mounting and Commissioning 3.1 Mounting and Connections Figure 3-16 Rack or cubicle mounting of a device (housing size 3.1.3.3 Panel Surface Mounting For panel surface mounting of the device proceed as follows: • Secure the device to the panel with four screws. For dimensions refer to Section 4.39. •… -
Page 390
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections Checking Connections 3.2.1 Checking Data Connections of Interfaces The tables in the following sections list the pin assignments for the different serial interfaces, the time synchro- nization interface and the Ethernet interface of the device. The position of the connectors is depicted in the fol- lowing figures. -
Page 391
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.2 System Interface For versions equipped with a serial interface to a control center, the user must check the data connection. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and reception channels is of particular importance. With RS232 and fibre optic interfaces, each connection is dedicated to one transmission direction. -
Page 392
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.4 Analog Output The two analog values are output as currents on a 9-pin DSUB socket. The outputs are isolated. Table 3-25 Pin assignment of DSUB socket for analog output Pin No. Code Channel 1 positive –… -
Page 393
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.6 Optical Fibres WARNING! Laser Radiation! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements! The transmission via fibre optics is particularly insensitive to electromagnetic interference and thus ensures gal- vanic isolation of the connection. Transmit and receive connections are shown with the symbols for transmit and for receive. -
Page 394
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections The accuracy which can be achieved during testing depends on the accuracy of the testing equipment. The accuracy values specified in the Technical Data can only be reproduced under the reference conditions set down in IEC 60 255 resp. VDE 0435/part 303 and with the use of precision measuring instruments. Tests can be performed using the currently set values or the default values. -
Page 395
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections In order to obtain the pickup value, the setting value I-DIFF> (parameter address 2021) must be multiplied by the factor Table 3-27 Correction factor k depending on vector group and fault type Type of Fault Reference winding Even VG Numeral Odd VG Numeral… -
Page 396
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections Because of the odd vector group numeral, the following pickup values apply Wiring It is particularly important to check the correct wiring and allocation of all device interfaces. The margin heading titled„Test function for checking the binary inputs and outputs“ provides additional information to this end. For checking the analog inputs a plausibility check can be conducted as described above under the margin title „Secondary Testing“… -
Page 397
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections 3.2.8 Checking System Incorporation General Information WARNING! Warning of dangerous voltages Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Therefore, only qualified people who are familiar with and adhere to the safety procedures and precautionary measures shall perform the inspection steps. -
Page 398
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections Acquisition of Technical Power System Data For checking protection parameterization (allocation and settings) in accordance with power system require- ments, it is necessary to record the technical data of the individual components in the primary system. This includes, among others, the data of generator or motor, unit transformer and voltage and current transformers. -
Page 399
Mounting and Commissioning 3.2 Checking Connections Voltage Transformer-Protective Switch Since it is very important for the undervoltage protection, impedance protection and voltage-dependent definite time and inverse time overcurrent protection that these functions are blocked automatically if the circuit breaker for the voltage transformers has tripped, the blocking should be checked along with the voltage circuits. Switch off the voltage transformer protection switches. -
Page 400
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Commissioning WARNING! Warning of dangerous voltages when operating an electrical device Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Only qualified people shall work on and around this device. They must be thoroughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices in this instruction manual as well as with the applicable safety steps, safety regulations, and precautionary measures. -
Page 401
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.1 Test Mode / Transmission Block If the device is connected to a central or main computer system via the SCADA interface, then the information that is transmitted can be influenced. This is only possible with some of the protocols available (see Table „Pro- tocol-dependent functions“… -
Page 402
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Structure of the Test Dialogue Box In the column Indication the display texts of all indications are displayed which were allocated to the system interface in the matrix. In the column Status SCHEDULED the user has to define the value for the messages to be tested. -
Page 403
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.3 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs Prefacing Remarks The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC 4 device can be individually and precisely controlled in DIGSI. This feature is used to verify control wiring from the device to plant equipment (operational checks) during commissioning. -
Page 404
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-20 Test of the Binary Inputs and Outputs — Example Changing the Operating State To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching field in the Scheduled column. Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first hardware modification is allowed. -
Page 405
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Test of the Binary Inputs To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7UM62, the condition in the system which ini- tiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the device checked. To do this, the dialog box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the physical state of the binary inputs. -
Page 406
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.4 Tests for Circuit Breaker Failure Protection General If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used, its interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested in practice. Especially important for checking the system is the correct distribution of the trip commands to the adjacent circuit breakers in the event of breaker failure. -
Page 407
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.7 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection at Standstill Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn) The rotor earth fault protection can be checked with the machine at standstill. For this purpose, the coupling device must be fed an external AC voltage. This may be 100 V to 125 V or 230 V (see also connection example in Section 2.34). -
Page 408
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-21 Types of excitation Lift measurement brushes or interrupt measurement circuit. After a delay of approx. 5 s, the indication „Fail. REF IEE<“ is issued (not allocated on delivery). Reclose the measuring circuit. If the indication „Fail. REF IEE<“ is present even with closed measuring circuit, the rotor-earth capacity is less than 0.15 µF. -
Page 409
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Table 3-28 Operational measured values of the rotor earth fault protection Measured Value Explanation fgen = xx.x Hz Shows the frequency of the injected square-wave voltage. The frequency can be set by a jumper in the 7XT71. The default setting is approx. 1.5 Hz (tolerance approx. -
Page 410
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-22 Test fault recording After this the fault resistors for the warning and the trip stage are installed, and the operational measured value is read out. The two measured values are the basis for the setting values of the warning stage (address earth 6102 RE<… -
Page 411
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Finally switch the AC voltage source of the 7XT71 off. After about 5 s the protection device issues the indication „Fail REF 1-3Hz“ (not allocated on delivery). To eliminate interference which might originate from the running machine, in particular from the excitation system, it is recommended to perform an additional operational check. -
Page 412
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning DANGER! In the generator, voltage hazardous to the stator winding can be caused by external 20 Hz bias voltage, even at standstill. Non-observance of the following procedures will result in death, serious injury or substantial property damage, since 1% to 3% of the primary rated voltage of the generator being protected may be present. -
Page 413
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Note For the settings, only secondary values should be used. If you find during the conversion from secondary to primary values that the theoretical conversion factor is not quite correct, FACTOR R SEF should be modified to match the measuring results (for conversion formulae refer to Section 2.31.2). -
Page 414
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.9 Checking the DC Voltage / DC Current Circuit Preparation Set the DC voltage/DC current protection (address 7201 DC PROTECTION) to Block relay. You can now modify the plant voltage to match the conditions of the intended application, and verify the re- sponse of the 7UM62. -
Page 415
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning WARNING! Warning of dangers evolving from improper primary tests Non-observance of the following measures can result in death, personal injury or substantial property damage. Primary test may only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the commissioning of protec- tion systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.). -
Page 416
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Testing Sequence Primary testing is usually performed in the following order: • Short circuit tests • Voltage tests • Earth fault tests • Synchronization • Load measurements at the network The following instructions are arranged in this sequence. All protection functions should be initially switched off (condition as delivered from factory) so that they do not influence one another. -
Page 417
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Operating Range of the Protection Functions For commissioning tests with the generator, care should be taken that the operating range of the protection functions as specified in section 4 is not exceeded and that the measuring quantities applied are high enough. Where tests are performed with reduced pickup values, the pickup value may appear to deviate from the setting value (e.g. -
Page 418
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-23 Phasor diagram of the secondary measured values — Example For a test of the differential protection, the differential and restraint currents are entered in the characteristic. The characteristic shown is a result of the settings for the differential protection. In Figure 3-24, a load current has been simulated. -
Page 419
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.12 Checking the Current Circuits General The checks of the current circuits are performed with the generator to ensure correct CT circuit connections with regard to cabling, polarity, phase sequence, CT ratio etc., not in order to verify individual protection func- tions in the device. -
Page 420
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Calibrating the Impedance Protection Switch impedance protection (address 3301) to IMPEDANCE PROT. = Block relay. With the primary system voltage-free and earthed, install a three-pole short-circuit bridge which is capable of carrying rated current (e.g. earthing isolator) to the primary side of the unit transformer. DANGER! Primary measurements may only be carried out with the generator at stand–still on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system. -
Page 421
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.13 Checking the Differential Protection Preparation Before commencing any primary tests, make sure that the configured object is actually the one you want to protect, and that the amplitude matching for the current ratings of the protected object and the main primary CTs, and the vector group matching are correctly set. -
Page 422
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Symmetrical Current Test The operational measured values supplied by the 7UM62 device allow a fast commissioning without external instruments. The indices of the measured currents are as follows: The symbol for current I is followed by the phase identifier Lx and by the index of the side of the protected object (e.g. -
Page 423
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning The theoretical angles depend on the protected object and – in the case of transformers – on the vector group. They are listed in Table 3-29 for clockwise phase rotation. The polarity of the CT connections and the parameterized polarity are taken into consideration for the angles displayed. -
Page 424
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.14 Checking the Earth Current Differential Protection Preparation The primary test checks correct integration into the system, especially the CT connection. Before commencing any primary tests, make sure that the configured object is actually the one you want to protect. To do so, verify the settings used in the configuration of the protection function, Power System Data 1 and in the protection function itself. -
Page 425
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning For the external fault, the percentages of the operational measured values are (on the device: Measurement → I-Diff, I-Rest) to be read out: 3I0-1 Calculated zero sequence current of side 1 3I0-2 calculated zero sequence current of side 2 or measured earth current I (depending on configuration) I0-Diff… -
Page 426
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Test with Secondary Test Equipment Measurements are always performed from the side with the earthed starpoint. In transformers, there must be a delta winding (d-winding or compensating winding). The side which is not included in the tests remains open as the delta winding ensures low-ohmic termination of the current path. -
Page 427
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-31 Zero sequence current measurement on a zig-zag-winding Figure 3-32 Zero sequence current measurement on a delta winding with artificial starpoint A zero sequence current of at least 2 % the rated generator current is required for tests per phase, i.e. the test current is at least 6 %. -
Page 428
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning If there are deviations, connection errors are normally assumed (see margin title „Primary test with generator“) • Disconnect test source and protected object • Check and correct connections and test setup • Repeat measurement Checking the Zero Voltage Release If the zero voltage release is used, it must be checked during the test of the stator earth fault protection. -
Page 429
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Amplitudes Read out voltages in all three phases in the operational measured values and compare with the actual voltages. The voltage of the positive sequence system U must be approximately the same as the voltage values indi- cated for the phase-earth voltages. -
Page 430
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.16 Checking the Stator Earth Fault Protection General The procedure for checking the stator earth fault protection depends mainly on whether the generator is con- nected to the network in unit connection or in busbar connection. In both cases correct functioning and protect- ed zone must be checked. -
Page 431
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Since the reactance of the coupling capacitance is much larger than the referred resistance of the loading re- sistor R ‘, U can be assumed to be U /√3 (compare also vector diagram Figure 3-34), where U /√3 is the neutral displacement voltage with a full displacement of the network (upper-voltage) neutral. -
Page 432
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-35 Displacement voltage during earth faults Checking for Generator Earth Fault Switch rotor earth fault protection S/E/F PROT. (address 5001) to Block relay. If the sensitive earth fault detection is used for stator earth fault protection, switch it to Block relay also under address 5101 as well. With the primary equipment disconnected and earthed, insert a single-pole earth fault bridge in the generator terminal circuit. -
Page 433
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Check Using Network Earth Fault With the primary plant voltage-free and earthed, install a single-pole earth fault bridge on the high voltage side of the unit transformer. DANGER! Primary measurements may only be carried out with the generator at stand–still on disconnected and grounded equipment of the power system. -
Page 434
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-36 Earth fault with busbar connection For this test, connections must be such that the generator is galvanically connected with the load equipment. If the plant conditions do not allow this, the hints given overleaf under the side title „Directional check without Loading Resistor“… -
Page 435
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Example: Machine voltage at pick-up 0.1 x U Measured value = 10 V Setting value U0> = 10 V Protection range = 90 % With Direction Determination The earth fault directional determination requires a check of the current and voltage connections for correct- ness and correct polarity. -
Page 436
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-37 Directional check with toroidal transformers Directional Check in Holmgreen Connection If the current is supplied from a Holmgreen connection, the displacement voltage is obtained in the same manner as in the above circuit. Only the current of that current transformer which is in the same phase as the by-passed voltage transformer in the delta connection is fed via the current path. -
Page 437
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-38 Directional check with holmgreen connection If in an isolated network the voltage connections for the reactive current measurement should be kept for test- ing, then it should be noted that for a power flow with inductive component in forwards direction a backwards direction results (contrary to an earth fault in this direction). -
Page 438
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.17 Checking the 100 % Stator Earth Fault Protection General The 100% stator earth fault connection is tested together with the 90% stator earth fault protection. Set the 100% stator earth fault protection (address 5301 100% SEF-PROT.) to Block relay (if not done so already). -
Page 439
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Caution! Possible starpoint earthing at transformer with simultaneous earthing on high voltage side during test! Nonobservance of the following procedures can result in minor injury or material damage. The starpoints of the unit transformer must be disconnected from earth during this test! Start up the generator and slowly excite it to 30 % of rated machine voltage (max. -
Page 440
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning The sensitive earth fault detection used for rotor earth fault protection is then activated: O/C PROT. IEE = ON in address 5101. 3.3.19 Checking the Rotor Earth Fault Protection during Operation Rotor Earth Fault Protection (R, fn) In Section 3.3, the rotor earth fault protection with earth resistance measurement was checked with the machine at standstill. -
Page 441
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Check the operational measured value Rearth and the pickup indication („REF 1-3Hz Fault“) and, after T- TRIP-RE<< (10 s on delivery) has expired, check the trip indication („REF 1-3Hz Trip“). Set the resistance to approx. 90 % of the warning stage (address 6102 RE< WARN), read out the operational measured value „Re =“, and check the warning message („REF 1-3Hz Warn“). -
Page 442
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Shut down the generator. Remove short-circuit bridge. The measured displacement voltage has to be extrapolated to the nominal excitation current to make sure that the function does not pick up erroneously on external short-circuits. The function is then set to at least twice the fault value at nominal excitation. -
Page 443
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning 3.3.21 Checks with the Network Note Since the protective function adjusts the scanning frequency, the test requires that a nominal-frequency phase- to-earth voltage (e.g. U ) is injected at least at one voltage input. Checking the Correct Connection Polarity The following test instructions apply to a synchronous generator. -
Page 444
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Caution! Under-excitation may cause the generator to fall out of step! Nonobservance of the following procedures can result in minor injury or material damage. Operation with underexcitation is admissible only for a short period Proceed as follows: Adjust excitation until the reactive power amounts to approximately Q = 0. -
Page 445
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Calibrating the Reverse Power Protection If a generator is connected with the network, reverse power can be caused by • closing of the regulating valves, • closing of the stop valve Because of possible leakages in the valves, the reverse power test should – if possible – be performed for both cases. -
Page 446
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Note If operation with capacitive load is not possible, then load points in the underexcited range can be achieved by changing the polarity of the current transformer connections (address 210). Thereby the characteristics of the underexcitation protection are mirrored around the zero point. -
Page 447
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning • Make sure that the protective function does not pick up on this current. It may be necessary to use different excitation states. • With the generator running, connect a test resistor (0 — 30 Ω) between generator shaft and earth using a slip- ring in the vicinity of the bearing. -
Page 448
Mounting and Commissioning 3.3 Commissioning Figure 3-40 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI — Example A test measurement record is immediately started. During recording, an indication is given in the left part of the status bar. Bar segments additionally indicate the progress of the procedure. For display and evaluation of the recording, you require one of the programs SIGRA or ComtradeViewer. -
Page 449
Mounting and Commissioning 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device Final Preparation of the Device Firmly tighten all screws. Tighten all terminal screws, including those that are not used. Caution! Inadmissable tightening torques Non–observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or property damage. The tightening torques must not be exceeded as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be dam- aged! In case service settings were changed, check if they are correct. -
Page 450
Mounting and Commissioning 3.4 Final Preparation of the Device SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 451
Technical Data This chapter presents the technical data of the SIPROTEC 4 7UM62 device and its individual functions, includ- ing the limit values that must not be exceeded under any circumstances. The electrical and functional data for devices equipped with all options are followed by the mechanical data with dimensional drawings. General Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67) Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) -
Page 452
Technical Data 4.27 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 4.28 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 4.29 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 4.30 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 4.31… -
Page 453
Technical Data 4.1 General General 4.1.1 Analog Inputs/Outputs Current Inputs Rated system frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable) Rated current 1 A or 5 A Earth Current, Sensitive Linear range ≤ 1.6 A Burden per Phase and Earth Path — at I = 1 A Approx. -
Page 454
Technical Data 4.1 General Analog output (for operational measured values) Nominal Range 0 mA to 20 mA or 4 mA to 20 mA Operating Range 0 mA to 22.5 mA or 4 mA to 22.5 mA Connection for flush-mounted case Rear panel, mounting location «B»… -
Page 455
Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs Binary inputs Variant Number 7UM621*- 7 (configurable) 7UM623*- 7UM622*- 15 (configurable) Rated Voltage Range DC24 V to 250 V, bipolar Current Consumption, Energized Approx. 1.8 mA, independent of the control voltage Switching Thresholds adjustable with jumpers For rated voltages… -
Page 456
Technical Data 4.1 General Binary Outputs Signalling/trip relays (see also terminal assignments in Appendix A.2)) Number: According to the order variant (allocatable) 7UM621*- 12 (1 NO contact each, 3 optionally as NC contacts) 7UM623*- 7UM622*- 20 (1 NO contact each, 4 optionally as NC contacts) 1 Life contact (NC contact or NO contact, selectable) Make/break capacity CLOSE… -
Page 457
Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.4 Communication Interfaces Operating Interface Connection Front side, non-isolated, RS232, 9-pin DSUB port for connection of a PC Operation With DIGSI Transmission Speed min. 4 800 Bd to 115 200 Bd Factory setting: 38 400 Bd; Parity: 8E1 bridgeable distance 15 m… -
Page 458
Technical Data 4.1 General RS485 Connection for flush mounted Rear panel, mounting location «B» case 9-pin DSUB port For panel surface-mounted in console housing at case bottom side case Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz Transmission speed min. 4,800 Bd, max. -
Page 459
Technical Data 4.1 General Profibus FO (DP) FO connector type ST-connector: single ring / double ring ac- cording to the order for FMS; for DP only double ring available Connection for flush mounted Rear panel, mounting location «B» case For panel surface-mounted Please use version with Profibus RS485 in case the console housing as well as separate… -
Page 460
Technical Data 4.1 General Analog output module 2 ports with 0 mA to 20 mA (electrical) Connection for flush mounted Rear panel, mounting location «B» and «D» case 9-pin DSUB port For panel surface-mounted in console housing at case bottom side case Test voltage 500 V;… -
Page 461
Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.5 Electrical Tests Regulations Standards: IEC 60255 (product standards) IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2 UL 508 VDE 0435 See also standards for individual tests Insulation Test Standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1 High voltage test (routine test) current inputs, 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz voltage inputs, output relays High voltage test (routine test) -
Page 462
Technical Data 4.1 General Auxiliary voltage Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF Diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF Measuring Inputs, Binary Inputs, Relay Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Outputs Diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Line conducted HF, amplitude modulated 10 V;… -
Page 463
On 56 days of the year up to 93% relative humidity. Con- densation must be avoided in operation! Siemens recommends that all devices be installed so that they are not exposed to direct sunlight nor subject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur. -
Page 464
Technical Data 4.1 General 4.1.8 Service Conditions The protection device is designed for installation in normal relay rooms and plants, so that electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured if installation is done properly. In addition the following is recommended: • Contactors and relays operating within the same cubicle or on the same relay board with digital protection equipment should always be provided with suitable quenching equipment. -
Page 465
Technical Data 4.2 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67) Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 50, 51, 67) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup current I> for I = 1 A 0.05 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.25 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A Pickup current I>>… -
Page 466
Technical Data 4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup current I (phases) for I = 1 A 0.10 A to 4.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.50 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A Time Multipliers T for I 0.05 s to 3.20 s… -
Page 467
Technical Data 4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 4-1 Trip Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, acc. to IEC SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 468
Technical Data 4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Trip Time Characteristics according to ANSI As per ANSI/IEEE (see also Figures 4-2 and 4-3) The tripping times for I/I ≥ 20 are identical with those for I/I = 20. Pickup Threshold approx. -
Page 469
Technical Data 4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 4-2 Trip Time Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 470
Technical Data 4.3 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51V) Figure 4-3 Trip Time Characteristics of the Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection, acc. to ANSI/IEEE SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 471
Technical Data 4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Setting Ranges / Increments Factor k according to IEC 60255-8 0.10 to 4.00 Increments 0.01 Time constant τ 30 s to 32000 s Increments 1 s Extension of Time Constant at Standstill 1.0 to 10.0 Increments 0.1 Thermal alarm Θ… -
Page 472
Technical Data 4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) Influencing Variables referring to k · I Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ U ≤ 1.15 ≤ 1 % AusN Temperature in range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θ ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) ≤… -
Page 473
Technical Data 4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Setting Ranges / Increments Admissible unbalanced load I 3.0 % to 30.0 % Increments 0.1 % 2 perm. (also alarm stage) Unbalanced load tripping stage I >>/I 10 % to 200 % Increments 1 %… -
Page 474
Technical Data 4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Figure 4-5 Trip times of the Thermal Characteristic for Unbalanced Load Protection SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 475
Technical Data 4.6 Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Startup Overcurrent Protection (ANSI 51) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup current I> for I = 1 A 0.10 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.50 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.01 A Delay times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s… -
Page 476
Technical Data 4.7 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M) for Generators and Motors Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M) for Generators and Motors Setting Ranges / Increments Differential current I >/I 0.05 to 2.00 Increments 0.01 DIFF N Gen High-current stage I >>/I 0.5 to 12.0 Increments 0.1 DIFF N Gen… -
Page 477
Technical Data 4.7 Differential Protection (ANSI 87G/87M) for Generators and Motors Influencing Variables for Pickup Values Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ U ≤ 1.15 ≤ 1 % AuxN Temperature in range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θ ≤… -
Page 478
Technical Data 4.8 Differential Protection (ANSI 87T) for Transformers Differential Protection (ANSI 87T) for Transformers Setting Ranges / Increments Differential current I >/I 0.05 to 2.00 Increments 0.01 DIFF N Transf High-current stage I >>/I 0.5 to 12.0 Increments 0.1 DIFF N Transf or ∞… -
Page 479
Technical Data 4.8 Differential Protection (ANSI 87T) for Transformers Tolerances With Preset Transformer Parameters — Pickup Characteristic ± 3 % of setpoint (for I < 5 · I — Inrush Restraint ± 3 % of setting value (for I ≥ 15 %) — Additional Delay Times ±… -
Page 480
Technical Data 4.8 Differential Protection (ANSI 87T) for Transformers Figure 4-10 Restraining Influence of Higher-Order Harmonics Figure 4-11 Influence of Frequency in Transformer Differential Protection where: Differential current = |I DIFF Current at nominal frequency Current at any frequency within specified range SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 481
Technical Data 4.9 Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Earth Current Differential Protection (ANSI 87GN,TN) Setting Ranges / Increments Differential current I-REF> I/I 0.05 to 2.00 Increments 0.01 N Obj Characteristic: base point I/I 0.00 to 2.00 Increments 0.01 N Obj. Characteristic: Slope 0.00 to 0.95 Increments 0.01… -
Page 482
Technical Data 4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) 4.10 Underexcitation (Loss-of-Field) Protection (ANSI 40) Setting Ranges / Increments Conductance Sections 1/xd Char. 0.20 to 3.00 Increments 0.01 Slope angle α1, α2, α3 50° to 120° Increments 1° Delay times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s or ∞… -
Page 483
Technical Data 4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) 4.11 Reverse Power Protection (ANSI 32R) Setting Ranges / Increments Reverse power P >/S –0.50 % to –30.00 % Increments 0.01 % reverse Delay times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s or ∞… -
Page 484
Technical Data 4.12 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) 4.12 Forward Active Power Supervision (ANSI 32F) Setting Ranges / Increments Forward power P </S 0.5 % to 120.0 % Increments 0.1 % Forward Nenn Forward power P >/S 1.0 % to 120.0 % Increments 0.1 % Forward Delay times T… -
Page 485
Technical Data 4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) 4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Pickup Pickup current IMP I> for I = 1 A 0.10 A to 20.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.50 A to 100.00 A Increments 0.05 A Dropout Ratio approx. -
Page 486
Technical Data 4.13 Impedance Protection (ANSI 21) Influencing Variables for Pickup Values Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ U ≤ 1 % ≤ AuxN 1.15 Temperature in range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θ ≤ 131.00 °F ≤ 0.5 % / 10 K (55 °C) Frequency in range 0.95 ≤… -
Page 487
Technical Data 4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) 4.14 Out-of-Step Protection (ANSI 78) Pickup Positive sequence current I >/I 20.0 % to 400.0 % Increments 0.1 % Negative sequence current I </I 5.0 % to 100.0 % Increments 0.1 % Dropout ratios >… -
Page 488
Technical Data 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Setting Ranges / Increments Measured Quantity Positive Sequence phase-to-earth voltages as phase-to-phase Values Pickup voltages U<, U<<, Up< 10.0 V to 125.0 V Increments 0.1 V Rückfallverhältnis RV U< (nur Stufen U<, U<<) 1.01 to 1.20 Increments 0.01 Time delays T U<, T U<<… -
Page 489
Technical Data 4.15 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) Influencing Variables Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ U ≤ 1.15 ≤ 1 % AuxN Temperature in range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θ ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) ≤ 0.5 % / 10 K Frequency in range 0.95 ≤… -
Page 490
Technical Data 4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) 4.16 Overvoltage Protection (ANSI 59) Setting Ranges / Increments Measured Quantity Maximum of the phase-to-phase voltages, calculat- ed from the phase-to-earth voltages Pickup thresholds U>, U>> 30.0 V to 170.0 V Increments 0.1V Rückfallverhältnis RV U>… -
Page 491
Technical Data 4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) 4.17 Frequency Protection (ANSI 81) Setting Ranges / Increments Number of Frequency Elements 4; can be set to f> or f< Pickup Frequency f> or f< 40 Hz to 66.00 Hz Increments 0.01 Hz Delay Times T f1 0.00 s to 600.00 s… -
Page 492
Technical Data 4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) 4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup threshold (Alarm Stage) 1.00 to 1.20 Increments 0.01 Pickup threshold of stage characteristic 1.00 to 1.40 Increments 0.01 Time delays T U/f>, T U/f>> 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s (Alarm and stage characteristic) -
Page 493
Technical Data 4.18 Overexcitation (Volt/Hertz) Protection (ANSI 24) Influencing Variables Power supply direct voltage in range 0.8 ≤ U ≤ 1.15 ≤ 1 % AuxN Temperature in range 23.00 °F (–5 °C) ≤ Θ ≤ 131.00 °F (55 °C) ≤ 0.5 % / 10 K Harmonics –… -
Page 494
Technical Data 4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 4.19 Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) Setting Ranges / Increments Stages, can be +df/dt> or –df/dt Pickup values df/dt 0.1 Hz/s to 10.0 Hz/s Increments 0.1 Hz/s Delay times T 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s or ∞… -
Page 495
Technical Data 4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector 4.20 Jump of Voltage Vector Setting Ranges / Increments Stufe Δϕ 2° to 30° Increments 1° Delay Time T 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s or ∞ (ineffective) Reset Time T 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments 0.00 s Reset or ∞… -
Page 496
Technical Data 4.21 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) 4.21 90-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) Setting Ranges / Increments Displacement voltage U0> 2.0 V to 125.0 V Increments 0.1 V Earth current 3I0> 2 mA to 1000 mA Increments 1 mA Earth current angle criterion 0°… -
Page 497
Technical Data 4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) 4.22 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ANSI 51GN, 64R) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup current I > 2 mA to 1000 mA Increments 1 mA Delay Time T > 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s or ∞… -
Page 498
Technical Data 4.23 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) 4.23 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 3rd Harmonics (ANSI 27/59TN 3rd Harm.) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup value for 3rd harmonic in undervoltage stage 0.2 V to 40.0 V Increments 0.1 V <… -
Page 499
Technical Data 4.24 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) 4.24 100-%-Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz Voltage Injection (ANSI 64G — 100%) Setting Ranges / Increments Alarm Stage R < 20 Ω to 700 Ω Increments 1 Ω… -
Page 500
Technical Data 4.25 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) 4.25 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection B (ANSI 51GN) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup Current I > 0.3 mA to 1000.0 mA Increments 0.1 mA EE-B Delay Time T > 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s IEE-B or ∞… -
Page 501
Technical Data 4.26 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) 4.26 Interturn Protection (ANSI 59N (IT)) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup thresholds of displacement voltage Uw> 0.3 V to 130.0 V Increments 0.1 V > 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments 0.01 s Interturn or ∞… -
Page 502
Technical Data 4.27 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) 4.27 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) Setting Ranges / Increments Alarm Stage R 3.0 kΩ to 30.0 kΩ Increments 0.1 kΩ E ALARM Tripping Stage R 1.0 kΩ… -
Page 503
Technical Data 4.27 Rotor Earth Fault Protection R, fn (ANSI 64R) Tolerances Alarm Stage, Tripping Stage 5 % for R ≤ 5 kΩ and 0.15 ≤ C /µF≤ 3 10 % for R ≤ 10 kΩ and 0.15 ≤ C /µF≤… -
Page 504
Technical Data 4.28 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) 4.28 Sensitive Rotor Earth Fault Protection with 1 to 3 Hz Square Wave Voltage Injection (ANSI 64R — 1 to 3 Hz) Setting Ranges / Increments Alarm Stage R 5 kΩ… -
Page 505
Technical Data 4.29 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) 4.29 Motor Starting Time Supervision (ANSI 48) Setting Ranges / Increments Anlaufstrom des Motors I for I = 1 A 0.10 A to 16.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.50 A to 80.00 A Increments 0.01 A Pickup Threshold for Startup Detection… -
Page 506
Technical Data 4.30 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) 4.30 Restart Inhibit for Motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor) Setting Ranges / Increments Motor starting current relative to the Nominal Motor Current 1.5 to 10.0 Increments 0.1 StartCurr Mot.Nenn Max. admissable Startup Timen t 3.0 s to 120.0 s Increments 0.1 s Start Max. -
Page 507
Technical Data 4.31 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) 4.31 Breaker Failure Protection (ANSI 50BF) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup thresholds B/F I> for I = 1 A 0.04 A to 2.00 A Increments 0.01 A for I = 5 A 0.20 A to 10.00 A Increments 0.01 A Delay Time BF-T… -
Page 508
Technical Data 4.32 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) 4.32 Inadvertent Energization (ANSI 50, 27) Setting Ranges / Increments Pickup current I >>> for I = 1 A 0.1 A to 20.0 A Increments 0.1 A or ∞ (ineffective) for I = 5 A 0.5 A to 100.0 A Increments 0.1 A… -
Page 509
Technical Data 4.33 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) 4.33 DC Voltage/Current Protection (ANSI 59NDC/51NDC) Setting Ranges / Increments Voltage increase U≥ 0.1 V to 8.5 V Increments 0.1V Voltage Decrease U≤ 0.1 V to 8.5 V Increments 0.1V Current Increase I≥ 0.2 mA to 17.0 mA Increments 0.1 mA Current Decrease I≤… -
Page 510
Technical Data 4.34 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes 4.34 Temperature Detection by Thermoboxes Temperature Detectors connectable thermoboxes 1 or 2 Number of temperature detectors per thermobox Max. 6 Measuring Method Pt 100 Ω or Ni 100 Ω or Ni 120 Ω Mounting Identification „Oil“… -
Page 511
Technical Data 4.35 Threshold supervision 4.35 Threshold supervision Setting Ranges / Increments Threshold MV1> to MV10< –200 % to +200 % Increments 1 % Assignable Measured Values P, Active Power Q, Reactive Power Change of active power ΔP Voltage U Voltage U Voltage U Voltage U… -
Page 512
Technical Data 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) Function Modules and Possible Assignments to Task Levels Function Module Explanation Task Level PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_ BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB ABSVALUE Magnitude Calculation — — — Addition ALARM Alarm clock AND — Gate FLASH Blink block… -
Page 513
Technical Data 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) Function Module Explanation Task Level PLC1_ PLC_ SFS_ BEARB BEARB BEARB BEARB Multiplication MV_GET_STATUS Decode status of a value MV_SET_STATUS Set status of a value NAND NAND — Gate Negator NOR — Gate OR — Gate REAL_TO_DINT Adaptor REAL_TO_INT… -
Page 514
Technical Data 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) Device-specific Limits Description Limit Comments Maximum number of synchronous When the limit is exceeded, an error message is output by changes of chart inputs per task level the device. Consequently, the device starts monitoring. The red ERROR-LED lights up. -
Page 515
Technical Data 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) Processing Times in TICKS Required by the Individual Elements Individual Element Number of TICKS Block, basic requirement Each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules Connection to an input signal Connection to an output signal Additional for each chart Arithmetic ABS_VALUE… -
Page 516
Technical Data 4.36 User-defined Functiones (CFC) Individual Element Number of TICKS Type converter BOOL_TO_DI BUILD_DI DI_TO_BOOL DM_DECODE DINT_TO_REAL DIST_DECODE UINT_TO_REAL REAL_TO_DINT REAL_TO_UINT Comparison COMPARE LOWER_SETPOINT UPPER_SETPOINT LIVE_ZERO ZERO_POINT Metered value COUNTER Time and clock pulse TIMER TIMER_LONG TIMER_SHORT ALARM FLASH Configurable in Matrix In addition to the defined preassignments, indications and measured values can be freely configured to buff- ers, preconfigurations can be removed. -
Page 517
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions 4.37 Additional Functions Operational Measured Values Operational Measured Values for L1, S1 L2, S1 L3, S1 L1, S2 L2, S2 L3, S2 Currents in A (kA) primary and in A secondary or in % I Range 10 % to 200 % I Tolerance… -
Page 518
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions Operational Measurement S, apparent power Values for Power in kVAr (MVAr or GVAr) primary and in % S Range 0 % to 120 % S Tolerance 1 % ±0,25 % S , with SN = √3 · U ·… -
Page 519
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions Amplitude of Rotor Voltage Injec- in V tion Range 0.0 V to 60.0 V Tolerance 0.5 V Rotor Circuit Current in mA N, Gen Range 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA Tolerance 0.05 mA Charge at Polarity Reversal in mAs Range 0.00 mAs to 1.00 mAs… -
Page 520
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions Min / Max Report Report of Measured Values with date and time Reset manual using binary input using keypad using communication Min/Max Values for Current Positive Sequence Components Min/Max Values for Voltage Positive Sequence Components Min/Max Values for 3rd Harmonics in Displacement Voltage Min/Max Values for Power P, Q… -
Page 521
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions Fault Recording Maximum 8 fault records saved by buffer battery also through auxiliary voltage failure Instantaneous Values: Recording Time total 5 s Pre-event and post-event recording and memory time ad- justable Sampling grid for 50 Hz 1 sample/1.25 ms Sampling grid for 60 Hz 1 sample/1.04 ms… -
Page 522
Technical Data 4.37 Additional Functions Clock Time synchronization DCF 77 / IRIG B Signal (telegram format IRIG-B000) Binary Input Communication Group Switchover of the Function Parameters Number of Available Setting Groups 2 (parameter group A and B) Switchover can be performed using the keypad DIGSI using the operating interface with protocol via system interface… -
Page 523
Technical Data 4.38 Operating Range of the Protection Functions 4.38 Operating Range of the Protection Functions Table 4-1 Operating ranges of the protection functions Operational state Operational state 1 Operational state f ≤ 10 Hz 11 Hz < f/Hz ≤ 40 40 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 69 f ≥… -
Page 524
Technical Data 4.38 Operating Range of the Protection Functions Operational state Operational state 1 Operational state f ≤ 10 Hz 11 Hz < f/Hz ≤ 40 40 Hz ≤ f/Hz ≤ 69 f ≥ 70 Hz Protective Elements Motor Starting Time Supervision inactive inactive active… -
Page 525
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.1 Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size Figure 4-14 Dimensions of a 7UM621 or a 7UM623 for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (size 1/2) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 526
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.2 Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting (Size Figure 4-15 Dimensions of a 7UM622 for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation (size 1/1) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 527
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.3 Panel Flush Mounting (Housing Size Figure 4-16 Dimensions of a 7UM621 for Panel Surface Mounting (housing size 1/2) 4.39.4 Housing for Panel Surface Mounting (Size Figure 4-17 Dimensions of a 7UM622 for Panel Surface Mounting (housing size 1/1) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 528
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.5 Dimensional Drawing of Coupling Device 7XR6100-0CA0 for Panel Flush Mounting Figure 4-18 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0CA0 for Panel Flush Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 529
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.6 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0BA0 for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-19 Dimensions of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0BA0 for Panel Surface Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 530
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.7 Dimensional Drawing of 3PP13 Figure 4-20 Dimension Diagrams 3PP13: 3PP132 for voltage divider 3PP1326-0BZ-012009 (20 : 10 : 1) 3PP133 for voltage divider 3PP1336-1CZ-013001 (5 : 2 : 1) for series resistor 3PP1336-0DZ-013002 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 531
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.8 Dimensional Drawing of Series Device 7XT7100-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-21 Dimensions of Series Device 7XT7100-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting where: Current connections (terminals 1 to 6) not used in 7XT71 Control connections (terminals 7 to 31) insulated ring-type cable lug: for bolts of 4 mm, max. -
Page 532
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.9 Dimensions of Series Unit 7XT7100-0EA00 for Panel Flash Mounting Figure 4-22 Dimensions of Series Unit 7XT7100-0EA00 for Panel Flash Mounting where: Current connections (terminals 1 to 6) not used in 7XT71 Control connections (terminals 7 to 31) Screw terminals (ring-type cable lug): for bolts of 4 mm, max. -
Page 533
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.10 Dimensional Drawing of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0CA00 for Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Flush Mounting Figure 4-23 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0CA00 for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 534
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.11 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-24 Dimensions of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 535
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.12 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz Generator 7XT3300-0CA00 for Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Flush Mounting Figure 4-25 Dimensions of 20 Hz Generator 7XT3300-0CA00 for Panel Flash or Cubicle Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 536
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.13 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0CA00/DD for Panel Surface Mounting oe Cubicle Flush Mounting Figure 4-26 Dimensions of a 20-Hz Generator 7XT3300-0CA00/DD for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 537
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.14 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz Generator 7XT3300-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-27 Dimensions of 20 Hz Generator 7XT3300-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 538
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.15 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0BA00/DD for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-28 Dimensions of a 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0BA00/DD for Panel Surface Mounting SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 539
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.16 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz Bandpass 7XT3400-0CA00 for Panel Surface Mounting or Cubicle Flush Mounting Figure 4-29 Dimensions of 20-Hz-Band-Pass Filter 7XT3400-0CA00 for Panel Flush or Cubicle Mounting For panel flush mounting, 2 set squares C73165- A63-C201-1 are necessary since the mounting rails of the device housing are not sufficient for the high weight of the 7XT34 device. -
Page 540
Technical Data 4.39 Dimensions 4.39.17 Dimensional Drawing of 20 Hz Bandpass 7XT3400-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting Figure 4-30 Dimensions of 20 Hz Bandpass Filter 7XT3400-0BA00 for Panel Surface Mounting Two set squares C73165-A63-C201-1 and 4 distance pieces C73165-A63-C203-1 are necessary for panel surface mounting. -
Page 541
Appendix This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This section provides ordering information for the models of this device. Connection diagrams for indicating the terminal connections of the models of this device are included. Following the general diagrams are diagrams that show the proper connections of the devices to primary equipment in many typical power system configurations. -
Page 542
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Ordering Information and Accessories A.1.1 Ordering Information A.1.1.1 Order Key 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 — — Multi-Functional Pro- tective Relay with Local Control Housing, Number of Binary Inputs and Outputs Pos. -
Page 543
Additional device/module for surface-mounted housing Protocol Converter Order No. Remark Module Profibus DP 6GK1502-2CB10 For single ring SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3CB10 For double ring Modbus RS485/FO 7XV5651-0BA00 – DNP 3.0 820 nm RS485/FO The OLM converter requires an operating voltage of 24 VDC. If the operating voltage is > 24 VDC the additional power supply 7XV5810-0BA00 is required. -
Page 544
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Measuring functions Pos. 13 without extended measuring functionality Min/Max Values, Energy Metering Functionality Pos. 14 Generator Basis, comprising: ANSI No. Overcurrent protection with Undervoltage Seal-In I> +U< Overcurrent protection, directed I>>, dir. 50/51/67 Inverse Time Overcurrent Protection t=f(I) +U<… -
Page 545
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Functionality Pos. 14 Asynchronous Motor, comprising: ANSI No. Basic Generator but without underexcitation protection, overexcitation protection and rotor earth fault protection (fn, R measurement) Transformer, comprising: ANSI No. Basic generator but without underexcitation protection, unbalanced load protection, motor starting time supervision and rotor earth fault protection (fn, R measurement) Functionality/Additional Functions ANSI No. -
Page 546
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A.1.2 Accessories Replacement modules for interfaces Name Order No. RS232 C73207-A351-D641-1 RS 485 C73207-A351-D642-1 FO 820 nm C73207-A351-D643-1 Profibus DP RS485 C53207-A351-D611-1 Profibus DP double ring C53207-A351-D613-1 Modbus RS 485 C53207-A351-D621-1 Modbus opt. 820 nm C53207-A351-D623-1 DNP3.0 RS485 C53207-A351-D631-3… -
Page 547
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories Battery Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No. VARTA 6127 101 501 Coupling unit Coupling unit for rotor earth fault protection (R, f Order No. Coupling device for panel surface mounting 7XR6100-0CA00 Coupling device for panel flush mounting 7XR6100-0BA00… -
Page 548
Appendix A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories 20 Hz Bandpass Filter 20 Hz Bandpass Filter Order No. Surface-mounted housing with screw terminals 7XT3400-0BA00 In housing with screw terminals 7XT3400-0CA00 Interface Cable Interface cable between PC and SIPROTEC device Order Number Cable with 9-pole male / female connector 7XV5100-4 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 549
Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments Terminal Assignments A.2.1 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting 7UM621/623*-*D/E Figure A-1 General Diagram for 7UM621/623*-*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 550
Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 7UM622*-*D/E Figure A-2 General Diagram for 7UM622*–*D/E (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 551
Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments A.2.2 Panel Surface Mounting 7UM621/623*-*B Figure A-3 General Diagram for 7UM621/623*-*B (panel surface mounting) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 552
Appendix A.2 Terminal Assignments 7UM622*-*B Figure A-4 General Diagram for 7UM622*-*B (panel surface mounting) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 553
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Connection Examples A.3.1 7UM62 — Connection Examples Figure A-5 Busbar Connection Current and voltage connections to three transformers (phase-to-ground voltages), and in each case three CTs, earth current from an additional summation current transformer for sensitive earth fault detection;… -
Page 554
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-6 Busbar System with Low-resistance Earthing Transformer connections to three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages) and in each case three CTs — earth fault detection as differential current measuring by two CT sets; detection of displacement voltage at broken delta winding (da–dn) as additional criterion. SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 555
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-7 Unit Connection with Isolated Starpoint Transformer connections to three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages) and in each case three current transformers, differential protection function used only for the generator; Detection of displacement voltage at a broken delta winding (da–dn). SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 556
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-8 Unit Connection with Neutral Transformer Connections to three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages) and in each case three current transformers, differential protection function connected via generator and unit transformer; Loading resistor connected either directly to starpoint circuit or via matching transformers. SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 557
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-9 Startup Earth Fault Protection Connection of DC Voltage Input TD1 with Series-Connected Amplifier 7KG6 for Systems with Startup Converter Figure A-10 Rotor Earth Fault Protection with additional unit 7XR61 for injecting nominal-frequency voltage in the rotor circuit using series resistor 3PP1336 Note 3PP13 is only necessary if more than 0.2 A are flowing permanently;… -
Page 558
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-12 Asynchronous Motor Connection to three voltage transformers (phase-to-earth voltages, usually from the busbar); Displacement voltage detection at broken delta winding, and three current transformers on each side; Earth fault direction detection using toroidal CT(s) SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 559
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-13 Voltage Transformer Connections for Two Voltage Transformers in Open Delta Connection (V Connection) Figure A-14 Voltage Transformer Connection with L2 Earthed on the Secondary Side Figure A-15 Rotor Earth Fault Protection 1-3 Hz – with 1- 3-Hz-Generator 7XT71 and resistor device 7XR6004. Note For further examples see manual 7XR6004 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 560
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-16 100 % Stator Earth Fault Protection with 20 Hz generator 7XT33, bandpass 7XT34 and startup earth fault protection – with shunt 10 A/150 mV and measuring transducer 7KG6. The voltage divider is only requred for secondary-side voltages > 200 V. The voltage divider must be connected directly to the load resistor R via two lines. -
Page 561
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-18 Earth Current Differential Protection (Transformer) A.3.2 Connection Examples for RTD Box Figure A-19 Simplex Operation with one RTD Box above: optical design (1 FOs) below: design with RS485 Figure A-20 Semiduplex Operation with one RTD Box above: optical design (2 FOs) below: design with RS485 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual… -
Page 562
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-21 Semiduplex Operation with two RTD Boxes above: optical design (2 FOs) below: design with RS485 A.3.3 Schematic Diagram of Accessories Figure A-22 Schematic Diagram of Coupling Unit 7XR6100-0*A00 for Rotor Earth Fault Protection Figure A-23 Schematic Diagram of Series Resistor 3PP1336-0DZ-K2Y SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 563
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-24 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 5:1; 5:2; 3PP1336-1CZ-K2Y Figure A-25 Schematic Diagram of Voltage Divider 10:1; 20:1; 3PP1326-0BZ-K2Y Figure A-26 General Diagram of Series Device 7XT7100-0*A00 Figure A-27 General Diagram of Resistor Unit 7XR6004-0*A00 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 564
Appendix A.3 Connection Examples Figure A-28 General Diagram of 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0*A00 Figure A-29 General Diagram of the 20-Hz-Generator 7XT3300-0*A00/DD Figure A-30 General Diagram of 20-Hz Bandpass Filter 7XT3400-0*A00 SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 565
Appendix A.4 Default Settings Default Settings When the device leaves the factory, a large number of LED indicators, binary inputs and outputs as well as function keys are already preset. They are summarized in the following table. A.4.1 LEDs Table A-2 LED Indication Presettings LEDs Allocated Function… -
Page 566
Appendix A.4 Default Settings A.4.2 Binary Input Table A-3 Binary input presettings for all devices and ordering variants Binary Input Allocated Function Function No. Description >SV tripped 5086 >Stop valve tripped >Uexc fail. 5328 >Exc. voltage failure recognized >BLOCK f1 5206 >BLOCK stage f1 >BLOCK U<… -
Page 567
Appendix A.4 Default Settings Binary Output Allocated Function Function No. Description I> TRIP 1815 O/C I> TRIP S/E/F TRIP 5193 Stator earth fault protection TRIP U>> TRIP 6573 Overvoltage U>> TRIP f1 TRIP 5236 f1 TRIP f2 TRIP 5237 f2 TRIP Exc<3 TRIP 5343 Underexc. -
Page 568
Appendix A.4 Default Settings A.4.5 Default Display 4-line Display Table A-6 This selection is available as start page which may be configured. Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Graphic Display Figure A-31 Default displays of a graphical display SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 569
Appendix A.4 Default Settings Spontaneous Fault Message Display The spontaneous display messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pick-up of the 7UM62. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device front in the sequence shown in Figure A-32. Figure A-32 Display of spontaneous messages in the device display Spontaneous Fault Indication of the Graphic Display… -
Page 570
Appendix A.5 Protocol-dependent Functions Protocol-dependent Functions Protocol → IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850 Profibus DP DNP3.0 Modbus Additional Ethernet ASCII/RTU Service Inter- Function ↓ (EN-100) face (optional) Operational mea- Yes (fixed values) Yes sured values Metered values Fault Recording No. Only via No. -
Page 571
Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option Enabled FAULT VALUE Disabled Instant. values Fault values Instant. values RMS values O/C PROT. I> Disabled Side 2 Overcurrent Protection I>… -
Page 572
Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments OVEREXC. PROT. Disabled Enabled Overexcitation Protection (U/f) Enabled INV.UNDERVOLT. Disabled Enabled Inverse Undervoltage Protection Enabled Up< df/dt Protect. Disabled 2 df/dt stages Rate-of-frequency-change protec- 2 df/dt stages tion 4 df/dt stages VECTOR JUMP Disabled Enabled… -
Page 573
Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTP B1/1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output B1/1 (Port B) I1 [%] I2 [%] IEE1 [%] IEE2 [%] U1 [%] U0 [%] U03H [%] |P| [%] |Q| [%] |S| [%] f [%] U/f [%] PHI [%]… -
Page 574
Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments ANALOGOUTP D1/1 Disabled Disabled Analog Output D1/1 (Port D) I1 [%] I2 [%] IEE1 [%] IEE2 [%] U1 [%] U0 [%] U03H [%] |P| [%] |Q| [%] |S| [%] f [%] U/f [%] PHI [%]… -
Page 575
Appendix A.6 Functional Scope Addr. Parameter Setting Options Default Setting Comments RTD-BOX INPUT Disabled Disabled External Temperature Input Port C Port D RTD CONNECTION 6 RTD simplex 6 RTD simplex Ext. Temperature Input Connec- 6 RTD HDX tion Type 12 RTD HDX ANALOGOUTP B1/2 Disabled Disabled… -
Page 576
Appendix A.7 Settings Settings Addresses which have an appended «A» can only be changed with DIGSI, under Additional Settings. The table indicates region-specific presettings. Column C (configuration) indicates the corresponding second- ary nominal current of the current transformer. Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting… -
Page 577
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments BkrClosed I MIN P.System Data 1 0.20 .. 5.00 A 0.20 A Closed Breaker Min. Current Threshold 0.04 .. 1.00 A 0.04 A TRANSDUCER 1 P.System Data 1 10 V 10 V Transducer 1 4-20 mA… -
Page 578
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 1405 IEC CURVE O/C Prot. Ip Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve Very Inverse Extremely Inv. 1406 ANSI CURVE O/C Prot. Ip Very Inverse Very Inverse ANSI Curve Inverse Moderately Inv. -
Page 579
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 2031 I-DIFF>> Diff. Prot 0.5 .. 12.0 I/InO; ∞ 7.5 I/InO Pickup Value of High Set Trip 2036A T I-DIFF>> Diff. Prot 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T I-DIFF>>… -
Page 580
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3101 REVERSE POWER Reverse Power Reverse Power Protection Block relay 3102 P> REVERSE Reverse Power -30.00 .. -0.50 % -1.93 % P> Reverse Pickup 3103 T-SV-OPEN Reverse Power 0.00 .. 60.00 sec; ∞ 10.00 sec Time Delay Long (without Stop Valve) -
Page 581
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 3507 Zd — Zc Out-of-Step 0.00 .. 26.00 Ω 1.28 Ω Reactance Dif. Char.1 — Char.2 (forward) 0.00 .. 130.00 Ω 6.40 Ω 3508 PHI POLYGON Out-of-Step 60.0 .. 90.0 ° 90.0 °… -
Page 582
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 4310 t(U/f=1.25) Overexcitation 0 .. 20000 sec 30 sec U/f = 1.25 Time Delay 4311 t(U/f=1.30) Overexcitation 0 .. 20000 sec 19 sec U/f = 1.30 Time Delay 4312 t(U/f=1.35) Overexcitation 0 .. -
Page 583
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 5003 3I0> Stator E Fault 2 .. 1000 mA 5 mA 3I0> Pickup 5004 DIR. ANGLE Stator E Fault 0 .. 360 ° 15 ° Angle for Direction Determination 5005 T S/E/F Stator E Fault… -
Page 584
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 6002 RE< WARN Rotor E/F 3.0 .. 30.0 kΩ 10.0 kΩ Pickup Value of Warning Stage Re< 6003 RE<< TRIP Rotor E/F 1.0 .. 5.0 kΩ 2.0 kΩ Pickup Value of Tripping Stage Re<<… -
Page 585
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7101 INADVERT. EN. Inadvert. En. Inadvertent Energisation Block relay 7102 I STAGE Inadvert. En. 0.5 .. 100.0 A; ∞ 1.5 A I Stage Pickup 0.1 .. 20.0 A; ∞ 0.3 A 7103 RELEASE U1<… -
Page 586
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8102 BALANCE U-LIMIT Measurem.Superv 10 .. 100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring 8103 BAL. FACTOR U Measurem.Superv 0.58 .. 0.90 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor 8104 BAL. -
Page 587
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8505 MEAS. VALUE 3> Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV3> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8506 THRESHOLD MV3> Threshold -200 .. 200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV3>… -
Page 588
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8511 MEAS. VALUE 6< Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV6< Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8512 THRESHOLD MV6< Threshold -200 .. 200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV6<… -
Page 589
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 8517 MEAS. VALUE 9> Threshold Disabled Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV9> Delta P UL1E UL2E UL3E UE3h IEE1 IEE2 Transducer 1 8518 THRESHOLD MV9> Threshold -200 .. 200 % 100 % Threshold of Measured Value MV9>… -
Page 590
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9015 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 120 °C RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9016 RTD 1 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 248 °F RTD 1: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup… -
Page 591
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9055 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 120 °C RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9056 RTD 5 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 248 °F RTD 5: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup… -
Page 592
Appendix A.7 Settings Addr. Parameter Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments 9095 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -50 .. 250 °C; ∞ 120 °C RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup 9096 RTD 9 STAGE 2 RTD-Box -58 .. 482 °F; ∞ 248 °F RTD 9: Temperature Stage 2 Pickup… -
Page 593
Appendix A.8 Information List Information List Indications for IEC 60 870-5-103 are always reported ON / OFF if they are subject to general interrogation for IEC 60 870-5-103. If not, they are reported only as ON. New user-defined indications or such newly allocated to IEC 60 870-5-103 are set to ON / OFF and subjected to general interrogation if the information type is not a spontaneous event („.._Ev“). -
Page 594
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Cntrl Authority IntSP Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLO- Cntrl Authority IntSP CAL) Reset Minimum and Maximum Min/Max meter IntSP LED BI counter (ResMinMax) Reset meter (Meter res) Energy… -
Page 595
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio Error Power Supply (Error Pwr- Supervision Supply) Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Supervision Sum Event) Failure: General Current Supervi- Measurem.Superv sion (Fail I Superv.) Failure: General Voltage Supervi- Measurem.Superv sion (Fail U Superv.) -
Page 596
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio Failure: Phase Sequence I side 2 Measurem.Superv (FailPh.Seq I S2) Failure: RTD-Box 2 (Fail: RTD- Supervision Box 2) Set Point Operating Hours (SP. SetPoint(Stat) Op Hours>) Set Point I<… -
Page 597
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio Primary fault current IL3 Side2 P.System Data 2 (IL3 S2:) Increment of active energy Energy (WpΔ=) Increment of reactive energy Energy (WqΔ=) 1020 Counter of operating hours Statistics… -
Page 598
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 1508 >Failure temperature input Therm. Overload LED BI (>Fail.Temp.inp) 1511 Thermal Overload Protection Therm. Overload OFF (Th.Overload OFF) 1512 Thermal Overload Protection Therm. -
Page 599
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 1897 O/C fault detection Ip phase L2 O/C Prot. Ip on off (O/C Ip Fault L2) 1898 O/C fault detection Ip phase L3 O/C Prot. -
Page 600
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 4531 External trip 1 is switched OFF External Trips (Ext 1 OFF) 4532 External trip 1 is BLOCKED (Ext External Trips on off 1 BLOCKED) 4533 External trip 1 is ACTIVE (Ext 1… -
Page 601
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 4824 Restart inhibit motor is switched Restart Motor OFF (Re. Inhibit OFF) 4825 Restart inhibit motor is Restart Motor BLOCKED (Re. Inhibit BLK) 4826 Restart inhibit motor is ACTIVE Restart Motor… -
Page 602
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5091 Reverse power prot. is switched Reverse Power OFF (Pr OFF) 5092 Reverse power protection is Reverse Power on off BLOCKED (Pr BLOCKED) 5093 Reverse power protection is Reverse Power… -
Page 603
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5165 I2> picked up (I2> picked up) Unbalance Load on off 5173 >BLOCK stator earth fault protec- Stator E Fault LED BI tion (>S/E/F BLOCK) 5176 >Switch off earth current de-… -
Page 604
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5293 >BLOCK DC protection DC Protection LED BI (>BLOCK DC Prot.) 5301 DC protection is switched OFF DC Protection (DC Prot. OFF) 5302 DC protection is BLOCKED (DC DC Protection… -
Page 605
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5369 Reset memory of thermal replica Overexcitation U/f (RM th.rep. U/f) 5370 Overexc. prot.: U/f> picked up Overexcitation on off (U/f> picked up) 5371 Overexc. -
Page 606
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5411 REF (1-3Hz) 2 Measuring circuits REF 1-3Hz open (2 Cir. open) 5413 >BLOCK interturn fault protection Interturn Prot. LED BI (>I/T BLOCK) 5421 Interturn fault prot. -
Page 607
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5519 Stage df4/dt picked up (df4/dt df/dt Protect. on off pickup) 5520 Stage df1/dt TRIP (df1/dt TRIP) df/dt Protect. 5521 Stage df2/dt TRIP (df2/dt TRIP) df/dt Protect. -
Page 608
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5584 Vector Jump is ACTIVE (VEC Vector Jump JUMP ACTIVE) 5585 Vector Jump not in measurement Vector Jump range (VEC JUMP Range) 5586 Vector Jump picked up (VEC Vector Jump… -
Page 609
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5671 Differential protection TRIP (Diff Diff. Prot TRIP) 5672 Differential protection: TRIP L1 Diff. Prot (Diff TRIP L1) 5673 Differential protection: TRIP L2 Diff. -
Page 610
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 5821 REF protection TRIP (REF TRIP) REF 5833 REF adaptation factor CT starpnt. wind. (REF CTstar:) 5836 REF adverse Adaption factor CT (REF Adap.fact.) 5837 REF adaptation factor CT side 1… -
Page 611
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 6537 Undervoltage U<< picked up Undervoltage on off (U<< picked up) 6539 Undervoltage U< TRIP (U< TRIP) Undervoltage 6540 Undervoltage U<< TRIP (U<< Undervoltage TRIP) 6565… -
Page 612
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 7961 Measured Value MV2< picked up Threshold (Meas. Value2<) 7962 Measured Value MV3> picked up Threshold (Meas. Value3>) 7963 Measured Value MV4< picked up Threshold (Meas. -
Page 613
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 14182 RTD 8 Temperature stage 1 RTD-Box picked up (RTD 8 St.1 p.up) 14183 RTD 8 Temperature stage 2 RTD-Box picked up (RTD 8 St.2 p.up) 14191 Fail: RTD 9 (broken wire/shorted) RTD-Box… -
Page 614
Appendix A.8 Information List Description Function Type Log Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103 of In- for- matio 30609 Accumulation of interrupted curr. Statistics L3 S1 (ΣIL3 S1:) 30610 Accumulation of interrupted curr. Statistics L1 S2 (ΣIL1 S2:) 30611 Accumulation of interrupted curr. Statistics L2 S2 (ΣIL2 S2:) 30612… -
Page 615
Appendix A.9 Group Alarms Group Alarms Description Function No. Description Error Sum Alarm Error A/D-conv. Error Offset Fail: RTD-Box 1 Fail: RTD-Box 2 Alarm Sum Event Fail I Superv. Fail U Superv. Fail Ph. Seq. Error PwrSupply 6575 VT Fuse Failure Alarm NO calibr Fail Battery Fail I Superv. -
Page 616
Appendix A.10 Measured Values A.10 Measured Values Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix IL< under current (IL<) Set Points(MV) Number of TRIPs (#of TRIPs=) Statistics Operating hours greater than (OpHour>) SetPoint(Stat) I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement U L1-E (UL1E=) Measurement… -
Page 617
Appendix A.10 Measured Values Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix REF(1-3Hz): Volt. of square-wave gen. Measurement (Ugen =) REF(1-3Hz): Curr. of rotor meas. circuit Measurement (Imeas. =) REF(1-3 Hz): Charge at polarity rev.(Qc) (Qc Measurement SEF100%: Prim. stator earth resistance Measurement (RSEFp=) REF(1-3Hz): Fault Resistance (R earth) (R… -
Page 618
Appendix A.10 Measured Values Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in Matrix Calculated rotor temp. (unbal. load) (Therm- Meas. Thermal Rep.=) Cooling medium temperature (AMB.TEMP =) Meas. Thermal Wp Forward (WpForward) Energy Wq Forward (WqForward) Energy Wp Reverse (WpReverse) Energy Wq Reverse (WqReverse) Energy SEF100%: Phase angle in stator circuit (ϕ… -
Page 619
Literature SIPROTEC 4 System Description; E50417-H1176-C151-A9 SIPROTEC DIGSI, Start Up; E50417-G1176-C152-A3 DIGSI CFC, Manual; E50417-H1176-C098-A9 SIPROTEC SIGRA 4, Manual; E50417-H1176-C070-A4 Planning Machine Protection Systems, E50400-U0089-U412-A1-7600. SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 620
Literature SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 621
Glossary Battery The buffer battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, timers and counters are retained retentively. Bay controllers Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protective functions. Bit pattern indication Bit pattern indication is a processing function by means of which items of digital process information applying across several inputs can be detected together in parallel and processed further. -
Page 622
Glossary Combination matrix From DIGSI V4.6 onward, up to 32 compatible SIPROTEC 4 devices can communicate with one another in an Inter Relay Communication combination (IRC combination). Which device exchanges which information is defined with the help of the combination matrix. Communication branch A communications branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n users that communicate by means of a common bus. -
Page 623
Glossary Double command Double commands are process outputs which indicate 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions) Double-point indication Double-point indications are items of process information which indicate 4 process states at 2 inputs: 2 defined (for example ON/OFF) and 2 undefined states (for example intermediate positions). -
Page 624
Glossary External command without feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific ExCF External command with feedback via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific ExDP External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific → Double point indication ExDP_I External double point indication via an ETHERNET connection, intermediate position 00, device-specific → Double point indication ExMV External metered value via an ETHERNET connection, device-specific… -
Page 625
Glossary GOOSE message GOOSE messages (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) are data packets which are transferred event- controlled via the Ethernet communication system. They serve for direct information exchange among the relays. This mechanism implements cross-communication between bay units. Global Positioning System. Satellites with atomic clocks on board orbit the earth twice a day on different paths in approx. -
Page 626
Glossary IEC61850 International communication standard for communication in substations. The objective of this standard is the interoperability of devices from different manufacturers on the station bus. An Ethernet network is used for data transfer. Initialization string An initialization string comprises a range of modem-specific commands. These are transmitted to the modem within the framework of modem initialization. -
Page 627
Glossary Limit value, user-defined Master Masters may send data to other users and request data from other users. DIGSI operates as a master. Metered value Metered values are a processing function with which the total number of discrete similar events (counting pulses) is determined for a period, usually as an integrated value. -
Page 628
Glossary Object Each element of a project structure is called an object in DIGSI. Object properties Each object has properties. These might be general properties that are common to several objects. An object can also have specific properties. Off-line In offline mode a connection to a SIPROTEC 4 device is not required. You work with data which are stored in files. -
Page 629
Glossary Project Content-wise, a project is the image of a real power supply system. Graphically, a project is represented as a number of objects which are integrated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project consists of a number of directories and files containing project data. Protection devices All devices with a protective function and no control display. -
Page 630
Glossary with basic and optional packages. SICAM PAS is a purely distributed system: the process interface is imple- mented by the use of bay units / remote terminal units. SICAM Station Unit The SICAM Station Unit with its special hardware (no fan, no rotating parts) and its Windows XP Embedded operating system is the basis for SICAM PAS. -
Page 631
Glossary Tree view The left pane of the project window displays the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form of a folder tree. This area is called the tree view. TxTap → Transformer Tap Indication User address A user address comprises the name of the user, the national code, the area code and the user-specific phone number. -
Page 632
Glossary SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010… -
Page 633
Index Directional function of the overcurrent time protection 446 Adaptation of Sampling Frequency 23 Interturn fault protection 441 Add-on stabilization during current transformer saturation Check: Analog Output 406 Check: Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 406 Additional Functions 517 Check: Switching states of binary inputs and outputs 403 Adjustment Factor Uph/Udelta 56 Check: Tripping/Closing for the Configured Operating Alternating Voltage 454… -
Page 634
Index Forward active power supervision 149 Forward Power Monitoring 29, 484 D-subminiature socket Frequency Change Protection 30 RJ45 socket 391 Frequency Protection 81 O/U 30, 181, 491 Date/Clock Management 346 Frequency-change Protection 494 DC Current Protection 509 Front Elements 24 DC Voltage 454 Front Interface 26 DC Voltage / DC Current Protection 32… -
Page 635
Index Inverse-time overcurrent protection 75 Nominal values of CTs and VTs 54 Inversion of Phase Sequence 32 Non-interlocked switching 352 IRIG B 346 Operating Hours Counter 331, 521 LEDs 396 Operating Interface 457 Life Status Contact 365 Operating mode 58 Local Measured Values Monitoring 520 Operating Range of the Protection Functions 417, 523 Logic Functions 33… -
Page 636
Index Startup Overcurrent Protection 28, 98, 475 Statistics 331, 331, 521 Rack mounting 388 Stator earth fault protection 213 Rate-of-frequency-change protection 193 Stator earth fault protection (100 %) with 20 Hz bias Rear Interfaces 26 voltage 31 Reassembly of Device 386 Stator earth fault protection (100 %) with 3rd harmonic 30 Reference Voltages 282 Stator earth fault protection (90 %) 30, 203… -
Page 637
Index Unabhängiger Überstromzeitschutz 465 Unbalanced load protection 91 Under-excitation Protection 482 Underexcitation Protection 28 Underexcitation protection 136 Undervoltage blocking 138 Undervoltage detection 75 Undervoltage Protection 27 29, 175, 396, 488 Undervoltage seal-in 65, 152 Unit connection 37 Values of the differential protection 340 Vector Jump 30, 199, 495 Vibration and Shock Stress During Stationary Operation 462… -
Page 638
Index SIPROTEC, 7UM62, Manual C53000-G1176-C149-7, Release date 03.2010…
Table of Contents for Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62:
-
Functions 262 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 The following figure shows an overview of the logic. I0 (Zero sequence current system side 2) I0/I N,S2,sec ⋅ 100 % (normalized with addr. 212) The zero sequence current is determined from the phase currents on the basis of the definition equation for symmetrical components. The calculation is perfomed once per cycle. I1 (Positive sequence current system side 2) I1/I N,S2,sec ⋅ 100 % The positive seque
-
Functions 284 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.44.4 Statistical Counters 2.44.4.1 Functional Description Number of Trips The number of trips initiated by the 7UM62 is counted, as long as the position of the circuit breaker is monitored via breaker auxiliary contacts and binary inputs. To use this function, the internal pulse counter ”Trip Count”ismaskedinthematrixtoa binary input that is controlled by the circuit breaker OPEN position. The pulse count value ”Trip Count” can be found in the submenu ”Statistic” if ”Measured and Metered Values Only” ha
-
Breaker Control 307 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Interlocking conditions can be programmed separately, for each switching device, for device control CLOSE and/or OPEN. Processing of the status of the release condition for an operation switching device can be based on information acquired: − directly, using a single point or double point indication (binary inputs), key-switch, or internal indication (marking), or − with logic using CFC. When a switching com
-
Functions 148 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.19 Undervoltage Protection (ANSI 27) General Undervoltage protection detects and reports abnormally low voltage conditions, some of which could be related to system stability problems (voltage collapse, etc.). Two-pole short circuits or earth faults cause an asymmetrical voltage collapse. Compared with three monophase measuring systems, the detection of the positive phase-sequence system is not influenced by these procedures and is advantageous especially with regard to the judgement of stability probl
-
Breaker Control 301 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration of the relay. Circuit breakers (or other equipment) that require system interlocking in a central control system (Substation Controller) must be configured in their specific commands object properties box for the specific control device. For all commands, operation with interlocking (normal mode) or without interlocking (test mode) can be selected: − for local commands,
-
4 Technical Data 414 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 4.5 Unbalanced Load (Negative Sequence) Protection (ANSI 46) Setting Ranges/ Resolutions Permissible Unbalanced Load I 2 >/I N 3.0 % to 30.0 % (Increments 0.1 %) (Warn. Stage too) Tripping Stage (Definite Time)I 2 >>/I N 10 % to 100 % (Increments 1 %) Delay Times T(I 2 >), T(I 2 >>) 0.00 s to 60.00 s (Increments 0.01 s) or ∞ (does not expire) Asymmetry Factor K 2.0 s to 100.0 s (Increments 0.1 s) Time for Cool Down T Cool down 0 s to 50000 s (Increments 1 s) Trip
-
Rate-of-Frequency-Change Protection df/dt (ANSI 81R) 169 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 The following relations can be used as an example for estimation of the pickup value. They apply for the change rate at the beginning of a frequency change (approx. 1 sec- ond). Meaning: f N Rated frequency ∆P Active power change ∆P=P Consumption –P Generation S N Rated apparent machine power H Inertia constant Typical values for H are: – for hydro-electric generators (salient-
-
A Appendix 498 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 A.4.1 Connection Examples for RTD-Box Figure A-40 Simplex operation with one RTD-Box above: optical design (1 FO); below: design with RS485 Figure A-41 Half-duplex operation with one RTD-Box above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485 Figure A-42 Half-duplex operation with two RTD-Boxes above: optical design (2 FOs); below: design with RS485 7UM62 A’ A B B’ 7XV566 RTD-Box 7XV5650 FO/RS485 Converter A B T1 Port D A’ A B B’ 7XV566 RTD-Box 7UM62 Port C or D A B Bus numbe
-
3.4 Primary Commissioning Tests with the Generator 371 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Figure 3-27 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Wye-Delta Transformer Figure 3-28 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Delta-Delta Transformer with Compensating Winding Figure 3-29 Measurement of the Zero Sequence Currents in a Zigzag Winding 7UM62 ∼ Test source ∼ Test source 7UM62 ∼ 7UM62 Test source
-
4.4 Thermal Overload Protection (ANSI 49) 413 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Figure 4-4 Trip Time Characteristic Curves for the Thermal Overload Protection (49) illi Anwender 1 0.3 0.1 1 2 3 5 10 12 100 20 10 5 2 0.5 0.2 0.05 t[min] t[min] I /k · I N 1000 1 0.3 0.1 100 20 10 5 2 0.5 0.2 0.05 [min] 3 30 30 3 Parameter: Setting Value of Time Constant 20 200 500 100 50 10 5 2 1 4678 50 t τ I k I N ⋅ ————— èø æö 2 I k I N ⋅ ———-
-
Functions 238 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 2.36.2.1 Settings of the DC Voltage Protection 2.36.2.2 Information from the DC Voltage Protection Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments 7201 DC PROTECTION OFF ON Block relay for trip com- mands OFF DC Voltage/Current Protection 7202 MEAS.METHOD Mean Value Root Mean Square Mean Value Measurement Method (MEAN/ RMS Values) 7203 DC &
-
4 Technical Data 404 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 – Recommended permanent operating temperature (acc. IEC 60255–6) +23 °F to +131 °F or –5 °C to +55 °C Visability of display may be impaired above +131 °F – Limiting temperature during permanent storage –13 °F to +131 °F or –25 °C to +55 °C – Limiting temperature during transport –13 °F to +158 °F or –25 °C to +70 °C STORE AND TRANSPORT THE DEVICE WITH FACTORY PACKAGING. Humidity Permissible Humidity Mean value per year ≤75% relative humidity, on 56 days of the year up
-
A.13 List of Information 553 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 01233 Earth current prot. is BLOCKED (IEE BLOCKED) Sensitive Earth Current Protection OUT ON OF F ON OFF LED BO 151 133 1 GI 01234 Earth current prot. is ACTIVE (IEE ACTIVE) Sensitive Earth Current Protection OUT ON OF F * LED BO 151 134 1 GI 01403 >BLOCK breaker failure (>BLOCK BkrFail) Breaker Failure Protection SP * * LED BI BO 01422 >Breaker contacts (>Break. Contact) Breaker Failure Protection SP ON OF F * LED BI BO 166 120 1 GI 01423 >ext. start 1 breaker fail
-
3 Installation and Commissioning 374 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 Seq.“ will be output. The allocation of measuring quantities to phases must be checked and corrected, if necessary. If signification deviations are found, check, and if necessary correct, the voltage transformer circuits and repeat the test. It is also possible to use for this check the operational measured value of positive- sequence
-
Threshold Supervision 265 7UM62 Manual C53000-G1176-C149-3 8503 MEAS. VALUE 2< Disabled Active Power P Reactive Power Q Change of Active Power Delta P Positive Sequence Voltage U1 Negative Sequence Voltage U2 Zero Sequence Current I0 Positive Sequence Current I1 Negative Sequence Current I2 Power Angle PHI Disabled Measured Value for Threshold MV2< 8504 THRESHOLDMV2< -200..200 % 100 % Pickup Value of Measured Value MV2< 8505 MEAS. VALUE 3> Disabled Active Power P Reactive Power Q Change o
Questions, Opinions and Exploitation Impressions:
You can ask a question, express your opinion or share our experience of Siemens SIPROTEC 7UM62 device using right now.